Tilct's Realm

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 44

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 44

He stayed there for a moment before slowly standing back up, returning to where he had been standing.

Neville reached out and patted Harry’s shoulder.

"Go on," Augusta said softly. "It’s all right to cry, Harry. You shouldn’t keep it bottled up."

A choked sob escaped Harry as he looked at the grave.

Neville sighed and gave Harry’s shoulder a gentle squeeze, looking up at the clear sky. He must be feeling really awful right now. After all, he just saw his parents alive in the Mirror of Erised—it probably gave him some hope. And now, standing in front of their graves… it must have hit him hard.

After a while, Harry slowly calmed down. Augusta, ever prepared, conjured a handkerchief and handed it to him.

"Feeling better?" she asked gently.

Harry nodded and took the tissue, wiping his eyes. "Th-thank you."

Augusta nodded. "Your parents were brave, Harry. They loved you fiercely. I know they’d be proud of who you’re becoming."

Harry nodded again, his gaze lingering on the headstone.

Neville gave his shoulder another reassuring pat. "You okay?"

Harry swallowed, pressing his lips together to keep more tears from spilling. He took a deep breath and stepped back.

"Let’s… let’s go," he said softly. "I think I’ve… done what I came here for."

…

July 23rd, 1992

The sky outside Longbottom Manor had begun to darken, clouds rolling in as the wind picked up slightly.

Neville zoomed past, gripping a ball tightly as Harry chased after him on his broom, a determined grin on his face.

Neville pushed forward, eyes locked on the floating ring ahead—a smaller version of the Quidditch goalposts they had set up for fun. He hurled the ball forward, aiming straight for the center—

Clang!

The ball hit the edge of the ring and bounced off, falling toward the ground.

Neville cursed. "Damn it! I missed."

Before the ball could hit the ground, Harry swooped in, catching it mid-air. In a smooth motion, he spun his broom 180 degrees and bolted toward the opposite goalpost, flying low to gain speed.

Neville leaned forward, pressing his body close to his broomstick to reduce drag, but his broom just wasn’t fast enough to catch up.

Harry reached the goal first and threw the ball effortlessly through the hoop.

Score.

Neville slowed to a stop, panting slightly. "Say, Harry," he called out, "how about we end this here?"

Harry grinned smugly, hovering just above him. "What? Afraid you’d lose even worse than now? It’s already 23 to 3—are you chickening out?"

Neville rolled his eyes and waved him off. "Yeah, yeah, gloat all you want." He glanced up at the sky, pointing at the darkening clouds overhead. "I don’t fancy getting struck by lightning. Gran would kill me if I got injured again."

Harry chuckled. "Just admit it—you’re quitting because you were losing so badly."

The truth was, Harry was actually thrilled that he was better at something Neville wasn’t. He had spent most of the summer struggling to keep up with Neville’s training in spellwork, so finally having the upper hand in something felt good.

Neville ignored him and angled his broom downward, steering toward the courtyard of Longbottom Manor.

Harry followed behind, landing just as Neville dismounted his broom.

Still grinning, Harry elbowed him playfully. "Go on, just admit it—I’m better than you at flying and Quidditch."

Neville scoffed, crossing his arms. "The only reason you’re better than me is because you had all of last year to train, and you actually like that dumb sport. " He turned and started walking toward the manor’s entrance. ”And it’s not like my old Comet can keep up with your Nimbus.”

Harry fell into step behind him. "Says the bloke who was quite keen on chasing me round the courtyard for half the morning," he teased. "If it’s so dumb, you sure spent a good chunk of time playing."

Neville rolled his eyes as they reached the broom rack just inside the house’s side door. "Let’s face it—I like a good challenge."

Both of them placed their brooms on the rack before stepping inside.

Neville stretched. "Man, I’m thirsty. I could really go for some chocolate milk."

Harry nodded in agreement. "Yeah, me too. And some cookies."

As they entered the dining room, Neville called out, "Clinky!"

With a soft pop, Clinky appeared in front of them, looking eager to serve.

"What can Clinky do’s for young masters?" the elf asked, bobbing slightly on his feet.

Neville smiled. "Can you get us some hot chocolate and some snacks, please?"

Clinky nodded enthusiastically. "Right away, sirs!" And with another pop, he was gone.

Neville walked over to the dining table and flopped into a chair, resting his head against the polished wood.

Harry sat opposite him, stretching his arms behind his head.

Neville let out a tired sigh. "You know… it’s kind of getting dull, doing the same thing over and over again."

Harry blinked. "Huh? What are you talking about?"

Neville tilted his head slightly. "You know, what we’ve been doing all summer. It’s the same thing every day. Don’t you find it getting dull?"

Harry shrugged. "No, actually. It’s the best summer I’ve ever had so far. It definitely beats being stuck with the Dursleys all summer."

Then he grinned at Neville. "But I get what you’re saying. I’d probably feel the same way if I kept losing every day. Hard to enjoy that, huh?"

Neville scoffed, pushing himself up from the table. "Says the guy who gets creamed every time we mock duel."

Harry laughed. "All right, all right, fair point." He smirked. "At least we each excel at something the other isn’t good at."

Neville smirked back.

After a moment, Harry leaned forward. "Well, we could do something different when Hermione gets here. She’s coming this Saturday, right? I’m sure she knows somewhere fun to go."

Neville nodded. "Yeah, I was thinking we could go watch a movie or something."

Harry grinned. "Knowing her, she’ll probably want to start studying for second year instead."

Neville grinned. "Yeah, but that’ll have to wait until we get our supply list." Then, tilting his head, he asked, "Speaking of school—have you finished all your homework?"

Harry nodded. "Yeah, just finished it yesterday. So, I’m free for the rest of the summer."

Just then, Clinky returned, balancing a tray piled high with cookies, croissants, and other baked goods.

"Anything else Clinky can do for young masters?" the house-elf asked eagerly.

Neville's eyes widened at the sight of all the baked goods. "Wow—this looks amazing! Thanks, Clinky!"

Harry nodded in agreement. "Yeah, thanks!"

Clinky bowed deeply before popping away.

Neville grabbed a freshly baked croissant, tearing it apart with his fingers as golden flakes crumbled onto his plate.

Dunking a piece into his chocolate milk, he took a bite and let out a content sigh. "This is really good."

Harry, eating a jam-filled croissant, nodded. "Yeah, this beats the food at Hogwarts." He took another big bite, savoring the taste.

Neville chuckled. "Buying those cookbooks was my best idea ever."

Last week, after their visit to St. Mungo’s, Neville had stopped by a bookstore and bought a few cookbooks—one of them focused specifically on baking.

To his surprise, Clinky and Tinky had been thrilled at the idea of learning new recipes. They had thrown themselves into their new cooking lessons with eagerness, and as a result, the meals at Longbottom Manor had improved dramatically.

Now, every day, Neville and Harry were treated to freshly baked bread, pastries, and all sorts of new dishes—a welcome change from the usual fare.Harry looked thoughtful as he swallowed a bite. "Do you think we could give a copy of the cookbook to the Hogwarts elves? Maybe they’ll start making this for us there."

Neville shrugged. "Maybe—but I’m not sure where the kitchen is, though."

Before they could say anything else, Tinky popped in beside them, carrying a stack of letters.

"Young master has letters," Tinky announced, placing them in front of Neville.

Neville popped the last bite of his croissant into his mouth, then took the letters. "Thanks, Tinky."

Neville sorted through the letters, recognizing the senders—Dean, Parvati, Lavender, and Seamus. There was also one from Hermione, addressed to both him and Harry, and finally, one from Ron, but it was addressed only to Harry.

Neville handed it over. "Here—Ron sent you another letter."

Harry groaned, reluctantly taking it. "No doubt he’s asking me to stay for the summer. This is the second letter this week."

Neville popped a cookie into his mouth. "Well, you didn’t reply to him. Maybe that’s why he sent another one."

Harry shot him an annoyed look. "You told me not to reply to him!"

Neville nodded. "Yeah, and we should keep it that way. Make it seem like Dobby is still interfering with your mail. Or do you want to explain to Ron why you don’t want to stay at his house?"

Harry let out a frustrated sigh and took a bite of his half-eaten croissant. "Why can’t things just be simple?"

Neville shrugged, dunking his cookie into his chocolate milk. "It’s all fate, mate. Can’t do much about it."

Harry shot him a flat look. "You mean that stupid prophecy?"

Neville shrugged again, clearly unconcerned. "You have to admit—my theory fits perfectly."

Harry sighed, staring at the letter in his hands.

After a moment, Neville asked, "So, what do you want to do about Ron?"

Harry sighed, leaning back against his chair. "I don’t know…" he muttered. "A part of me wants to trust Ron, but another part of me keeps wondering if becoming friends with him was orchestrated somehow. It’s all so confusing…"

He sighed again, running a hand through his messy hair, frustration clear on his face.

Then, looking at Neville, he said, "Back then, I didn’t really think about it, but now… I remember it clearly. It’s too suspicious."

Neville raised an eyebrow, taking a bite of his cookie. "You can remember it clearly? Then your Occlumency practice is going well."

Harry nodded. "Yeah. And the more I think about it, the less things add up. That moment on the platform—Mrs. Weasley should’ve known the platform number. She’s been there plenty of times before. But she asked loudly what the number was—practically making sure I heard her. Then she started talking about Muggles, trying to get my attention."

Neville listened carefully, chewing his cookie slowly.

"And then there’s Ron." Harry shook his head. "I don’t know if I should trust him or not. Is he in on it? I’m pretty sure he knew who I was before we met in the compartment. He walked in and said the other compartments were full—but back then, I didn’t question it. Now that I think about it… he came in as soon as the train left. Meaning, he already knew who I was and was looking for me."

Harry sighed again, rubbing his face before running a hand through his hair again. "And at school, it felt like he was always making sure I didn’t become friends with anyone else. Every time you or Hermione tried to talk to me after classes, he’d always pull me away, saying, ‘Come on, Harry, let’s go do something else.’"

Neville grimaced. "I think that might have just been Ron’s personality, mate."

Harry let out another deep sigh. "I don’t know what to do anymore."

Neville stared down at his cup of hot chocolate, feeling a twinge of guilt about separating Harry from Ron. But at the same time, he knew that nothing was ever a coincidence when Dumbledore was involved.

He took one last sip of his drink, then set the cup down and stood up. "Well, I’m going to take a bath and then do some studying," he said, stretching his arms. "You should probably get some rest, Harry."

Kaito Akaden Chapter 163

Author's Note:

Hey everyone,

I noticed that almost half of you aren't in favor of introducing a third love interest, Hikari Uchiha, for Kaito. As a result, I've decided to scrap that entire arc. However, due to the progression of the timeline and character development, Kaito will still have a second love interest in the future. The original canon pairing doesn't align with the current character dynamics and personalities, so this change feels more natural.​

Thank you for your understanding and continued support.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 163

Meanwhile, Tsunade was thoroughly entertained, casually eating her bento as she watched the chaos unfold.

Kushina sighed and walked over to one of the clones. She gently patted his head to get their attention. The clones turned to look at her.

Leaning in slightly, she said, "Please, guys, help Kai-kun. He really needs your help, ya know."

One of the clones muttered, looking down. "But we always get stuck with the menial tasks, ya know… it’s not fair."

Of course, since they were all Kaito, they had a soft spot for Kushina—their mother.

Kushina smiled knowingly. "How about this? If you guys help Kai-Kun with this, I’ll make your favorite for dinner."

One of the clones perked up instantly. "With zenzai?"

Kushina grinned. "Yep!"—she even popped the ‘p’ for emphasis—"I’ll even make red bean mochi for you guys."

At that, one of the clones jumped up and shouted, "What are we waiting for?! You heard Mom—let’s get this over with!"

The rest cheered in agreement and dove into the paperwork like their lives depended on it.

Meanwhile, Kaito sat there, his eyes still twitching.

Tsunade let out a loud snort, barely holding back her laughter. "Looks like your clones listen to Kushina more than you, brat."

…

Kaito sat in the Hokage's office, surrounded by stacks of paperwork. His shadow clones were seated across from him, each diligently working through the documents. Behind the desk, Tsunade reclined in her chair, sipping sake from a freshly poured cup.​

As Kaito and his clones signed the last document, they placed it atop the completed stack. Stretching his arms above his head, Kaito cheered, "Finally, I'm done! That's the last of the paperwork for the day!" His clones dissipated in puffs of smoke, their task complete.​

Just then, a knock echoed from the door. Kaito froze, a look of dread crossing his face. "Oh, come on, you've got to be kidding me," he groaned, repeatedly banging his head on the table in exasperation.​

Tsunade smirked, taking another sip of her sake, clearly amused by Kaito's reaction.​

The door creaked open, and Shizune entered, balancing yet another stack of paperwork in her arms. "Here are the mission reports from yesterday," she announced, placing the pile on the already cluttered table.​

Tsunade nodded in acknowledgment. "Ah, thank you, Shizune."​

Noticing Kaito's dejected posture, his shoulders shaking as he openly wept, Shizune pointed and asked, "What's wrong with him?"​

Tsunade's smirk widened. "Oh, him? Nothing. He's fine."​

Another knock interrupted the moment. Setting down her sake cup, Tsunade called out, "Come in."​

The door opened to reveal Hotaru, accompanied by a few others. "Good evening, Lady Tsunade," Hotaru greeted as she stepped inside. Noticing Kaito's distressed state, she hurried over to him. "Kai-kun, are you alright?" she asked, concern evident in her voice as she gently shook his shoulder.​

Kaito lifted his head, hastily wiping his face. "Ah, Hotaru, it's nothing. I'm just tired, ya know," he replied with a faint smile, sniffling slightly.​

It was then that Kaito became aware of the others who had entered the room.

Kaito lifted his head, quickly wiping at his face before forcing a small smile. "Ah, Hotaru, it’s nothing. I was just tired, ya know." He sniffled lightly, trying to compose himself.

It was then that he sensed the others in the room.

Turning around, he saw that it wasn’t just Hotaru—several familiar faces from his graduation year had also entered.

Izumi stepped in, offering a polite nod to Tsunade. "Lady Tsunade," she greeted before turning to Kaito. "Hey there, Kaito-kun."

Hana followed after her, giving a lazy wave. "Good afternoon, Lady Hokage. Yo, Kaito."

Then, another voice spoke.

"Lady Hokage," Itachi greeted as he walked in after them.

Kaito immediately noticed the raised eyebrow Itachi sent his way, along with the silent question in his eyes: ‘Why are you crying?’

Kaito coughed into his fist, subtly wiping away any remaining evidence of his earlier meltdown. He looked at all of them, raising an eyebrow. "What are you guys doing here?"

Tsunade stood up, stretching a little before walking over to Kaito’s side. She leaned against the table, crossing her arms as she faced the group. "I called them here. I have a mission for you lot."

Kaito tilted his head. "A mission?"

Tsunade nodded. "The Academy is launching a new training program for its students, and you’ve all been selected as instructors. Since you’re experienced but still close to their age, you’ll be able to connect with them better than older shinobi."

Kaito blinked. "New program?"

Tsunade explained, "The program is designed to take Academy students to a designated training ground, where you’ll teach them survival skills while also guiding them through tasks meant to simulate real missions. You will be acting as their team captains and instructors."

She paused, looking at each of them before continuing, "Additionally, all of you will be evaluated during this assignment to assess your leadership skills and ability to manage a team."

With that, she handed each of them a sheet of paper.

Kaito took his, staring at the names listed on it. "Huh? What’s this for?"

Tsunade smirked. "That’s the list of students you’ll be instructing. You’re participating in this exercise too."

Kaito’s eyes widened slightly before a hopeful thought struck him. He slowly looked up at Tsunade, cautiously optimistic. "Does this mean… I’m finally off paperwork duty?"

Tsunade’s smirk widened. "Your one-month punishment ended two days ago."

Kaito’s eye twitched violently.

His smile froze, his mind short-circuiting as he processed Tsunade’s words. "What do you mean it ended two days ago? Then why the hell did you have me doing your paperwork for the last two days?!"

Tsunade’s grin widened. "You showed up on your own, brat, and I wasn’t gonna stop you if you volunteered yourself." She shrugged casually. "Plus, you should’ve kept count of the days. It’s not my fault you didn’t."

Kaito’s eye twitched harder as he glared at her. "You know, you really shouldn’t make an enemy out of someone who can perfectly forge your signature."

Tsunade raised an eyebrow, her grin still in place. "Oh? And what exactly would you do, brat?"

Kaito shrugged nonchalantly. "Oh, I don’t know… maybe I’d take out some loans under your name, rack up an ungodly amount of debt. Or—" he paused, grinning deviously, "I could do something even worse… like signing you up for that bikini calendar ad that company approached you about last week."

Tsunade stopped laughing and her smirk faltered.

Kaito’s grin widened. "I’d take all the money in advance, leaving you with no choice but to actually pose for them." He leaned in slightly. "And just to make things even more spectacular, I could request that Jiraiya be your co-star for the entire shoot."

Her eyes narrowed dangerously. "You wouldn’t dare."

Kaito met her gaze without flinching. "Wanna bet on it?"

For a moment, there was complete silence.

Then, Tsunade suddenly burst out laughing. "Like you’d actually do that, brat." She gave him a solid slap on the back, making Kaito stumble forward. "Forget about me killing you—your mother would end you if you even tried something like that!"

Kaito groaned, slumping back in his chair. "I really hate you, ya know…"

Tsunade smirked, regaining her composure. "Well, anyways, you’re being assigned three students—just like a regular genin cell."

Kaito let out a long sigh. "Do I have to? I already wasted a month doing your damn paperwork."

Tsunade shrugged. "Too bad. It’s already been posted in the academy. Oh, and by the way… it’s your brother’s class."

Kaito grumbled under his breath, something about slave-driving women, before looking down at the paper listing his assigned students.

Kaito’s Team:

• Hinata Hyūga

• Shikamaru Nara

• Sakura Haruno

Hotaru’s Team:

• Sasuke Uchiha

• Karin Uzumaki

• Tobio

Itachi’s Team:

• Ino Yamanaka

• Naruto Uzumaki

• Ami

Hana’s Team:

• Shino Aburame

• Chōji Akimichi

• Isami

Izumi’s Team:

• Kiba Inuzuka

• Shizuka

• Shibai

Tsunade leaned back in her chair and waved them off. "Now, get out of my office and report to the Academy at 9 AM tomorrow. ."

Hotaru, Itachi, Hana, and Izumi all bowed respectfully. "Hai." They turned and began making their way toward the door.

Kaito, on the other hand, just walked out without a word, still grumbling under his breath. "Stupid lazy Hokage… all she does is drink and dump paperwork on me…"

As he reached the door, he slammed it shut— hard.

Turning around, arms crossed, Kaito saw his friends staring at him.

He scratched the back of his head, feeling a bit awkward. "Uh… hey there, guys. Been a while, huh?"

Hana smirked. "You could say that. I think it’s been over a year since I last saw you three."

As they walked down the corridor leading to the exit, Izumi nodded. "I run into Itachi-kun from time to time, but the last time we were all together was after your Chūnin Exams."

Hana sighed dramatically. "Seems like if Izumi and I wanna see you guys, we’ll have to book an appointment or something."

Hotaru chuckled sheepishly. "Sorry, Izumi, Hana. We’ve just been that busy."

Kaito nodded. "Yeah, sorry about that, guys. Tsunade’s been sending us on mission after mission. It’s been non-stop work."

Hotaru suddenly perked up, slamming her fist into her palm. "Hey! How about we go out for dinner tonight? So we can all catch up!"

Izumi and Hana’s eyes lit up. "That’s a great idea!"

Hana licked her lips, already looking like she was salivating. "We should go for some barbecue. It’s been way too long since I’ve had some."

Hotaru giggled at her reaction. "Hai, let’s go there!"

Then, Hana turned and pointed a finger at Kaito and Itachi. "And you two better not try to skip out on us!"

Kaito immediately raised his hands in surrender. "Alright, alright, I get it!"

Before Itachi could even think of slipping away, Izumi grabbed his arm, locking him in place. "And you’re coming with us, Itachi-kun!" she declared, already dragging him along.

Itachi stumbled slightly. "Wait, Izumi—"

Izumi didn’t listen.

She just kept dragging him forward with surprising strength.

Kaito watched with a sweatdrop. "Troublesome women…" he muttered under his breath.

Just then, Hotaru and Hana both grabbed him by the arms.

"Hey, you two! Wait for us!" Hana shouted, pulling Kaito along as well.

Hotaru just giggled and happily dragged Kaito forward.

….

The sun cast an orange hue over the Village Hidden in the Leaves as it began to set, bathing the streets in warm twilight.

Inside Yakiniku Q, Kaito, and his friends sat together in a private booth.

Hotaru, Hana, and Izumi sat on one side of the table, while Kaito and Itachi occupied the other.

A waiter arrived, placing their ordered food on the table. "Here you go."

The group chorused a "Thank you" in unison.

Kaito picked up a few pieces of meat and placed them on the grill, listening to the satisfying sizzle as they began to cook.

While they waited, Hana leaned forward, curiosity shining in her eyes. "Soooo… what was that about you threatening the Hokage?" she asked, flipping her meat over.

Itachi, calmly tending to his own food, answered before Kaito could. "Kaito was given a month of paperwork duty by the Hokage for doing something reckless."

Izumi blinked in realization. "Oh! So that’s why you were in the Hokage’s office for the past month. I thought it was some sort of training for when you become the Sixth."

Hana, mid-bite, froze.

Her eyes widened as she slowly turned to stare at Kaito, her hand wildly gesturing as she spoke. "Wait, stop, stop, STOP! What do you mean, ‘when Kaito becomes the Sixth’?!" She stared at him as if he had suddenly grown a second head.

Hotaru, casually flipping her meat on the grill, raised an eyebrow at Hana. "Huh? You don’t know? It’s pretty much an open secret that Kai-kun is the official candidate for the position of Sixth Hokage. Lady Tsunade made it official when she took office."

Hana’s mouth opened and closed a few times before she looked at everyone around the table. "Wait… am I the only one who didn’t know about this?!"

Izumi, Itachi, and Hotaru all nodded.

Hana slumped, her shoulders sagging. "One of my friends is the next Hokage, and NO ONE thought to tell me?! You guys are the worst—leaving me out of everything!"

Hotaru patted her back reassuringly. "Hey, don’t say that! We thought you already knew! And you know how Kai-kun is—he doesn’t like to brag about things."

Kaito, meanwhile, casually took a piece of meat off the grill, blowing on it slightly before popping it into his mouth.

"There isn’t much to brag about," he said between bites. "It’s not like I have a choice in the matter. If it were up to me, I wouldn’t want to be Hokage at all, ya know."

Hana looked at Kaito with a raised eyebrow, her expression full of confusion. "You don’t want to become the next Hokage?"

She looked completely bewildered.

Kaito shook his head without hesitation. "Too much paperwork. I’d rather do something else than be buried in documents all day, ya know."

Izumi swallowed her food before asking, "So why were you punished, then? Does it have something to do with the Yuki Clan?"

Kaito choked.

He slammed his fist against his chest a few times, coughing violently.

Hotaru and Itachi immediately looked at Izumi, while Hotaru let out a nervous laugh.

"W-What makes you say that, Izumi?" Hotaru asked, her tone not at all convincing.

Izumi tilted her head, confused. "Itachi-kun said that Kaito was punished with paperwork for a month, and I know your team was the one that brought back the Yuki Clan a month ago… so I just figured it had something to do with that."

Kaito quickly grabbed his drink, taking big gulps of water before waving his hands. "No, no, it’s something else, ya know!" He stammered, clearly struggling to come up with an excuse. "I-I kinda… um… uh…"

Hotaru, seeing Kaito crash and burn, quickly jumped in to cover for him.

"Kai-kun messed up during the mission!" she blurted out.

It was an obvious lie.

Hana grinned mischievously. "Nooo, no, I know you, Kaito. You’re not the type to mess up something big."

Her eyes suddenly widened in realization, and she pointed a dramatic finger at him.

"You were the one who rescued them, weren’t you?!" she shouted.

Before she could say anything else, Hotaru lunged forward, quickly covering Hana’s mouth.

"Please keep it down, Hana!" Hotaru whispered urgently.

Hana nodded before lowering her voice. "So you really were the one who rescued the Yuki Clan," she whispered, looking at Kaito in awe.

Kaito sighed heavily and slammed his head against the table.

Izumi’s eyes widened. "So it’s true, then?"

Hotaru let out a sigh before nodding. "Yeah… it’s true."

Itachi finally spoke, his voice calm but serious. "Please keep it to yourselves, Hana, Izumi. If word got out, it could lead to war."

Both girls nodded seriously, understanding the weight of the situation.

After a brief moment of silence, Kaito lifted his head up and immediately changed the subject.

"Soooo, I heard both of you are training under Lady Tsunade?"

Izumi perked up and nodded. "Yep! We’re learning medical ninjutsu under Lady Tsunade, but it’s not just us—there are a few others, too."

Hotaru quietly ate her food, while Hana took a bite of grilled meat before adding, "Yeah, it’s really hard… but I don’t think I’ll become a full-fledged medical nin. I’m going to be a vet!"

Kaito raised an eyebrow. "A vet?" kaito but honestly, he didn’t remember much about what she did in the original timeline.

Hana grinned. "Yup! I love animals way more than people. Plus, the Inuzuka Clan could use a skilled vet for their ninken, ya know!"

Kaito chuckled. "Makes sense."

Kaito's love interest

Hey everyone!

I know I promised a chapter today, but I’m a bit stuck right now. I’ve been considering introducing another love interest for Kaito. I already have one planned besides Hotaru, and I feel that adding this new character would fit naturally into the story.

I know the last poll about whether Kaito should have a harem resulted in a no, but when I posted that poll, I had already envisioned Kaito having more than one lover due to how the story is unfolding. This isn't about forcing a harem—it's about character development and what feels right for the narrative.

If I decide to include her, she would need to appear in the next arc to ensure their ages align. But don’t worry—Hotaru isn’t being sidelined! She remains Kaito’s main love interest. I’ve also already hinted at another love interest in the previous chapter because of the changes Kaito has already made to the timeline. Sticking to the original canon pairing wouldn’t make sense in this version of the story.

So, in total, Kaito would have three wives in the future:

• Hotaru Hyuga – She remains the main love interest.

• A second love interest – Already confirmed but will come into play later.

• A potential third love interest – If I include her, she must be introduced in the next arc to ensure their ages match.

I won’t be adding more beyond this, but I’d love to hear your thoughts! I’m putting up a poll for the next 24 hours, and based on the results, I’ll decide how to proceed with the next arc. Let me know what you think!

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 43

Author’s Note:

Hey everyone, this is last week’s chapter—sorry for the delay in uploading. I’ll do my best to stick to the upload schedule as much as possible moving forward.

Tomorrow, I’ll be uploading a new chapter of Kaito, so look forward to that!

For those wondering about Goten, I’m currently stuck on how to progress the story, so it’s on hold for now. Hope you all understand.

Thanks for your patience and support! 😊

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 43

Dobby’s head tilted dangerously close to the wall again, but Harry quickly added, "You could just shake or nod."

Slowly, Dobby shook his head. "Not—not Dumblydore, sir."

Harry exhaled heavily and ran a hand through his messy hair, frustration clear on his face.

Dobby blinked anxiously up at Harry. "Harry Potter, sir, if he gives Dobby his word that he will not return to Hogwarts, Dobby will never disturb Harry Potter again!"

Harry was about to speak, but Neville cut in first. "All right," he said smoothly. "I’ll make sure Harry doesn’t go back to Hogwarts. But in return, I don’t want you coming back into Longbottom Manor again or stealing Harry’s letters."

Harry turned to Neville in shock, wondering what he was doing.

Neville gave him a quick wink.

Harry hesitated, then nodded along. "Alright," he said. "I won’t go to Hogwarts."

Dobby jumped up excitedly. "Thank you, sirs! Thank you!"

Neville waved a hand. "Alright, alright. Now leave."

Dobby gave one last excited nod before popping away with a crack.

The moment he was gone, Harry sighed and turned to Neville. "Do you think it’s Dumbledore? Is he trying to test me like last term?"

Neville shook his head. "I don’t think so. Dobby did say it wasn’t Dumbledore."

…

Neville stepped out of his room, already dressed for the day. He wore a crisp white long-sleeve shirt, a fitted black suit vest, and matching black trousers. As he adjusted his sleeves, folding them neatly up to his elbows, he took a moment to admire his reflection in the hallway mirror.

He had always liked the way Newt Scamander, Theseus Scamander, and even Dumbledore dressed in the Fantastic Beasts movies. So, the moment he got back home for the summer, one of the first things he did was get clothes similar to theirs.

And he had to admit—he quite liked how he looked.

As he made his way down the staircase, he spotted his grandmother already dressed for the day, a handbag tucked under her arm.

"Hey, Gran," Neville greeted as he came to stand in front of her.

Augusta gave him a once-over, then gave an approving nod. "Looking sharp, Neville. Though you could stand a bit straighter."

She reached out and adjusted his shirt collar, smoothing it down before stepping back. "Where’s Harry?" she asked.

Neville shrugged. "Still getting ready, I think."

Just then, Harry appeared at the top of the stairs, making his way down.

He was wearing an oversized t-shirt and baggy jeans that had clearly seen better days. The fabric hung loosely off his frame like sacks, and the hems of his jeans dragged along the floor.

Augusta’s eyes narrowed the moment she saw him. Her expression was calm, but there was a steely edge to her tone as she spoke.

"Harry," she said, folding her arms, "what in the world are you wearing?"

Harry flushed and shifted awkwardly, fiddling with the frayed hem of his shirt. "Er… these are my clothes, ma’am—Gran," he corrected quickly, offering a sheepish smile. "I haven’t got anything else."

Neville could see his grandmother’s expression darken. She’s mad at the Dursleys.

Augusta let out a sharp tut. "That won’t do," she said, shaking her head.

Harry opened his mouth to protest, but Augusta cut him off.

"It’s fine if you wear them inside the house, but if you’re going out, you should wear something proper," she stated firmly. "I’ll not have you traipsing around Britain looking like that."

She eyed Harry for a moment before deciding, "You’re about Neville’s size—height and build—so you’ll wear some of his until we can get you a proper set of clothes."

Before Harry could react, Augusta turned her head and called sharply, "Clinky!"

There was a soft pop, and a house-elf appeared, bowing deeply.

"Yes, Mistress?" Clinky squeaked.

Augusta turned to Clinky and said, "Fetch Harry a suitable outfit of Neville’s. Shirt, trousers, vest—the lot. And be quick about it."

Clinky bowed again. "Yes, Mistress," he squeaked before vanishing with another pop.

Augusta then turned to Harry. "Go on, up you get. Change into the clothes Clinky brings for you."

Harry nodded and hurried back upstairs to change.

As Neville and Augusta watched him go, Augusta let out a disapproving sniff. "Those awful Muggles," she muttered. "The nerve of them, treating a wizarding heir as though he’s not even worth new clothes."

Neville, sensing an opportunity, asked, "Gran, mind if we stop by some Muggle bookstores later?"

Augusta raised an eyebrow. "Huh? Sure, but why? Do you need something for your research?"

Neville scratched the back of his head, looking a bit sheepish. "Ah, no… I just want to get some cookbooks. English food is all good, but it gets boring after a while. It’s been the same in Hogwarts, and even here."

Augusta gave him an amused look. "Are you planning to cook?"

Neville shrugged. "It’s a good skill to have."

Augusta hummed thoughtfully. "What did you have in mind?"

Neville perked up. "Chinese, maybe some Indian food."

Augusta nodded. "I suppose a little change is fine. I’ve had Indian food before—it was quite good. But I don’t believe I’ve ever had Chinese food."

Neville grinned. "I’ve heard Indian food is really good from one of my year-mates—she’s Indian. And a few others said Chinese food is great as well."

Augusta nodded in approval. "Well, I suppose we’ll see, then."

Then, as if remembering something, she asked, "Speaking of your friends, when is your friend Hermione coming over with her parents?"

Neville blinked. "Oh, right! I almost forgot to tell you—she sent a letter saying she’d be back in England next week and asked if she could visit on Saturday with her parents."

Augusta considered this for a moment before nodding. "Next Saturday works fine."

Neville thought for a moment before frowning slightly. "Gran, I was wondering—how will they get here? I mean, there’s no Muggle way to reach this place, and I doubt Side-Along Apparition with four people is safe. Hermione doesn’t have a Floo in her house—or at least I don’t think she does. And I doubt the Ministry would allow one to be installed just for this. Are we sending her a Portkey or something?"

Augusta sighed. "As for sending a Portkey to the Grangers—we can’t just create a Portkey to Longbottom Manor. First off, we’d need a license from the Ministry to make one. Secondly, it’s dangerous for Muggles to travel by Portkey. If they let go of the object before reaching their destination, they could be seriously injured—or worse. And thirdly, it’s generally not wise to create a Portkey that has direct access to one’s home."

Neville frowned. "Then how are they supposed to arrive? Are we going to send a carriage like the one from Hogwarts?"

Augusta gave him a pointed look. "Stop overthinking, Neville. The solution is a simple one—we’ll have them take the Floo from Diagon Alley."

Neville blinked. Then, realization hit him like a Bludger. He groaned and facepalmed. "I totally forgot about that."

Just then, Harry walked down the stairs, now dressed in a white shirt and brown vest and trousers.

He looked… a bit awkward.

Augusta’s sharp gaze flicked over him with satisfaction. "That’s much more like it. You look like a proper heir now, Harry. Your parents would be proud." She said it gently but firmly, leaving no room for protest.

Neville grinned. "Looks good on you, mate,"

Harry managed a shy grin as he adjusted his collar. "Er, thanks. Feels a bit odd, though."

"You’ll get used to it," Neville said with a shrug.

Augusta clapped her hands together. "Well, come along, boys. We should leave now if we want time later to buy some new clothes for Harry."

Harry’s head snapped up. "Um, Gran, you don’t have to do that—"

"Oh, hush, boy," Augusta interrupted, wagging a finger at him. "Your parents would be appalled to see you in those ragged hand-me-downs. I have the means, and since you’ll be staying with us for the holidays, I will not have you going without. Besides, you’re the heir to House Potter. Appearances do matter in the wizarding world."

Harry shifted uncomfortably. "But—"

Before he could argue further, Neville slapped his arm lightly. "Just let her buy you some clothes, mate. Don’t you want some of your own?"

Harry sighed in defeat. "Alright… thank you, Gran."

Augusta nodded crisply. "That’s better. Now, shall we? We’ll go shopping after our visit to St. Mungo’s."

They reached the gates of the manor, and Augusta held out her hand. "Grab hold, boys. We’re Apparating."

Neville and Harry took her hands, and with a sharp crack, they vanished.

With a sharp crack, Neville, Augusta, and Harry arrived on a quiet road leading to a small town.

Neville, by now, had gotten used to Apparition, so he managed to stay standing—though he felt a bit dizzy from the sudden shift.

Harry, on the other hand, was hunched over, one hand clutching his stomach, the other gripping his head as he took deep breaths.

Neville took a moment to look at the town in front of them. A weathered sign stood near the road, displaying the words:

"Welcome to Godric’s Hollow."

Augusta glanced at both of them, her sharp gaze assessing. "It seems you’re both getting used to traveling by Apparition. That’s good."

Harry, still a bit unsteady, straightened up and read aloud, “Godric’s Hollow,” he murmured. “My parents… they lived here.”

Augusta nodded. "Come along, then. The cemetery should be on the other side of town." She started walking down the road, her posture upright and purposeful.

Neville quickly jogged up beside her. "Is this place named after Godric Gryffindor?" he asked, just as Harry fell into step beside him. Neville knew Harry had lived here before Voldemort’s attack, but beyond that, he didn’t know much about the town itself.

Augusta nodded. "Yes. It is said that Godric’s Hollow is the birthplace of Godric Gryffindor. Though, I’m not sure if he was named after the place, or if the place was named after him."

Neville thought for a moment before asking, "So is this a magical settlement? I’ve read that there are wizard-only villages—is this one of them?"

Augusta shook her head. "No. While there is a large community of wizards living here, there are also Muggles."

Harry, looking around at the old houses and streets, frowned. "But how does that work? Wouldn’t people worry about getting caught using magic?"

Augusta shook her head again. "There are parts of the town that only wizards and witches can access. All the wizarding families live in that area, protected by charms."

As they walked, the buildings grew older and more worn, the streets quieter, until they finally reached an old cemetery, filled with rows of weathered gravestones.

Augusta paused at the entrance. "This cemetery is reserved for wizards and witches. Your parents’ graves should be among them," she said, before stepping through the iron gates.

Neville followed after her, his eyes scanning the rows of headstones,

Augusta walked ahead, her sharp gaze scanning the rows of tombstones. "This cemetery is reserved for wizards and witches. Your parents’ graves should be among them," she said, stepping further in.

Neville followed after her.

He glanced back and noticed Harry had stopped at the entrance, his posture stiff, his hands clenching slightly at his sides. He looked… hesitant.

Harry gulped, his eyes fixed on the rows of graves.

Neville waved him over. "Come on, Harry."

After a brief hesitation, Harry took a deep breath and stepped inside.

Neville wandered lazily around the cemetery, scanning the tombstones as he walked, searching for the Potter family’s grave.

As he ventured a bit farther in, his eyes landed on a large tomb, partially covered in dirt and moss.

Frowning, he knelt down and wiped the dust off the surface.

The name engraved on the stone made him pause.

"Ignotus Peverell."

Neville blinked. Wait… Ignotus Peverell? Peverell…

Why does that name sound familiar?

Still crouched, he tilted his head back and called out to his grandmother. "Gran, come here for a sec!"

Augusta, who had been scanning the graves for the Potters, turned around at his voice.

"Did you find them?" she asked, striding toward him.

Neville shook his head. "No, I just wanted to ask you—have you ever heard this name before?" He gestured to the engraved name on the tombstone.

Augusta’s brows furrowed as she looked down and read aloud, "Ignotus Peverell… hmm."

Neville tapped his chin. "I swear I’ve heard ‘Peverell’ somewhere before…"

Augusta hummed thoughtfully. "If I’m not mistaken, the Peverells were an ancient wizarding family—but they’ve been extinct for centuries. There’s even a story written about them."

Neville’s curiosity piqued. "A story?"

Augusta hummed in thought. "I think it’s about three brothers or something… I don’t quite remember." She turned to Neville with a curious look. "Why are you so interested?"

Neville shrugged. "The name just felt familiar, that’s all."

Augusta sighed. "Well, come on, we should help Harry."

She glanced up and paused. Not far from them, Harry stood silently in front of a grave, his posture rigid.

With a knowing sigh, Augusta murmured, "I think Harry might have found them."

She walked over to where Harry was standing, and Neville lingered for a moment, his gaze still on the Peverell name. Why does this feel so familiar? he wondered before shaking off the thought and following after his Gran.

As Augusta reached Harry, she pulled out her wand and with a delicate flick, conjured a bundle of neatly arranged white flowers.

She gently tapped Harry on the shoulder, offering the flowers. "Here, Harry."

Harry’s eyes were puffy, tears brimming at the edges. He looked at Augusta, then at the flowers, and took them with a small, "Thank you."

Neville stepped up, standing on Harry’s other side, saying nothing but offering silent support.

Harry knelt down in front of the grave and placed the flowers on top, his fingers lingering over the cold stone.

"Hey, Mum… hey, Dad…" Harry’s voice cracked as he whispered, "I’m… I’m sorry I haven’t come earlier. I didn’t even know… No one told me…"

He stayed there for a moment before slowly standing back up, returning to where he had been standing.

Neville reached out and patted Harry’s shoulder.

"Go on," Augusta said softly. "It’s all right to cry, Harry. You shouldn’t keep it bottled up."

A choked sob escaped Harry as he looked at the grave.

Neville sighed and gave Harry’s shoulder a gentle squeeze, looking up at the clear sky. He must be feeling really awful right now. After all, he just saw his parents alive in the Mirror of Erised—it probably gave him some hope. And now, standing in front of their graves… it must have hit him hard.

After a while, Harry slowly calmed down. Augusta, ever prepared, conjured a handkerchief and handed it to him.

"Feeling better?" she asked gently.

Harry nodded and took the tissue, wiping his eyes. "Th-thank you."

Augusta nodded. "Your parents were brave, Harry. They loved you fiercely. I know they’d be proud of who you’re becoming."

Harry nodded again, his gaze lingering on the headstone.

Neville gave his shoulder another reassuring pat. "You okay?"

Harry swallowed, pressing his lips together to keep more tears from spilling. He took a deep breath and stepped back.

"Let’s… let’s go," he said softly. "I think I’ve… done what I came here for."

Kaito Akaden Chapter 162

Kaito Akaden Chapter 162

Kaito turned to Tsunade. “According to Mei, Yagura’s personality completely changed a year after he became the Fourth Mizukage. That means he’s been under genjutsu for about six years now.”

Jiraiya exhaled, shaking his head. “Six years… That’s long enough to reshape an entire nation.”

Shikaku frowned. “If that’s the case, then Kiri’s instability isn’t just a consequence of poor leadership—it’s deliberate sabotage.”

Tsunade sighed, rubbing her forehead. “We can’t do much about the Mizukage right now without starting a war. All we can do is closely monitor Kiri.”

She then turned to Kaito, her voice tired. “Alright… I’ll allow the Yuki Clan to join Konoha under the conditions you set.” She sighed. “I assume you’ve already thought of a way to get them here without causing a major incident?”

Kaito grinned at her. “Thanks, I knew you’d agree! Tenzo and Kakashi were saying you were heartless and wouldn’t agree to giving asylum to the Yuki Clan—”

Tenzo went pale. “W-We never said that, my lady!” he stammered, then turned to Kaito with a look of betrayal before grabbing him by the head. “HEY! WHY WOULD YOU SAY SOMETHING LIKE THAT?!”

Kaito just laughed, trying to pry Tenzo’s hands off him.

Tsunade sighed and rubbed her temples. “This kid is going to be the death of me…” she muttered under her breath.

…

The sun hung high over the Village Hidden in the Leaves, casting its warm glow over the Hokage’s office.

Inside, Kaito was finishing up the last bit of paperwork for the day. He signed the final document with a relieved sigh, placing it neatly on the growing stack. Stretching his arms above his head, he grinned.

"Finally! I’m done! I’m free for the rest of the day, ya know!" he said, feeling triumphant.

Just as he was about to celebrate his small victory, the door creaked open, and Tsunade strolled in with a smirk.

"Good, you’re done, brat," she said, her tone laced with amusement.

Kaito's stomach dropped. That smirk... it never meant anything good. Before he could tell her he was officially off duty and make a run for it, another familiar figure entered the room.

Shizune walked in, balancing a massive stack of paperwork in her arms.

Kaito’s eyes widened in horror.

Throwing his hands up, he groaned, "Oh, come on! You gotta be kidding me, ya know!"

Shizune, unfazed by his outburst, walked over with a bright smile. "There's a lot more paperwork today, more than usual," she said cheerfully, setting the heavy stack down in front of him.

Kaito could only watch in despair as she picked up the completed documents he had just finished.

"Since you’re already done with the first batch, we need this new set completed by the end of the day," she added sweetly before walking off with the signed papers.

Kaito slumped back in his chair, looking like he was on the verge of tears.

Tsunade casually made her way to the sofa, plopping down and crossing her legs. Taking a swig from her sake bottle, she snorted.

"You better get to work, kid. If you want to be done by noon, you better start now—unless you wanna be stuck here till evening," she chuckled.

Kaito let his head drop onto the desk with a loud thud.

"Is saving people such a crime…?" he mumbled in defeat.

It had been a month since he rescued the Yuki Clan members, and Tsunade granted them asylum in Konoha.

As per Kaito’s suggestion, the official story was that the Yuki Clan had sought refuge in Konoha, with Kahyo leading them. The tale spun was that Kaito’s squad had coincidentally run into them near the border of the Land of Fire, where Kahyo formally requested asylum.

To cover their tracks, Kaito had used his shadow clones to create false trails in Kiri, making it seem as though the surviving clans had taken multiple escape routes to avoid their fate at Yagura’s hands. This ensured that even if Kiri investigated, they wouldn’t be able to pinpoint what truly happened.

With Tsunade’s approval, the Yuki Clan was given what remained of the former Senju compound—or at least, what was left of it. Over the years, during the Third Hokage’s tenure, parts of the Senju compound had been slowly absorbed into the village, repurposed for various administrative and training facilities. The Nine-Tails attack had further reduced what remained, leaving the land in disrepair.

Tsunade had chosen to keep the house she grew up in, but the rest of the land was given to the Yuki Clan. While the plot of land wasn’t massive, it was enough for a small clan to settle in. However, since the Senju estate had been abandoned for years, most of the buildings were in poor condition. Understanding this, Tsunade hired a renovation team to restore the structures and make them livable again—a process that took about a week.

While waiting for the renovations to finish, the Yuki Clan stayed in four temporary houses that Tenzo built nearby using his Wood Release. Their acceptance into Konoha came with conditions, as expected. First, all Yuki Clan children were required to enroll in the Konoha Academy. Depending on their individual talents, they would either be trained as shinobi or given administrative jobs within the village.

Additionally, unlike other established clans, the Yuki Clan wasn’t immediately granted the same rights and benefits. Instead, they would gradually earn full clan status over the next 15 years, proving their loyalty and value to Konoha. To help them settle, the village provided financial aid, but they were expected to become self-sufficient. Since most of the Yuki Clan consisted of children, Konoha took on the responsibility of supporting them, seeing their potential as future shinobi. Many of the adult women took on jobs within the village to support their families.

With her experience as a shinobi, Kahyo was officially named the head of the Yuki Clan. She was also offered the position of Jonin, though under a probationary period. Unlike standard Jonin, her primary responsibility was managing the Yuki Clan rather than taking on active combat missions. She was expected to attend village meetings and handle clan affairs, ensuring the integration of her people into Konoha’s system.

At Kaito’s suggestion, Kakashi was assigned to shadow Kahyo during her probationary period. Kaito had told Tsunade that Kakashi was interested in her and that the feeling was mutual. More than that, he believed Kakashi deserved happiness after everything he had been through. Tsunade had raised an eyebrow at the claim but eventually agreed, muttering something about how Kaito was too meddlesome for his own good.

The news of the Yuki Clan’s addition to Konoha wasn’t received well at first. The civilian side of the village was outraged, questioning why "Kiri scum" should be allowed asylum in Konoha. However, the shinobi side had a different reaction. Many welcomed the inclusion of the Yuki Clan, recognizing that their presence would strengthen Konoha’s military power in the long run.

So far, there had been no letters from the Land of Water demanding the Yuki Clan be returned, nor any signs of retaliation from the Mizukage.

Aside from Kahyo and her people, three others—Kimimaro, Haku, and Guren—had also taken up residence in the Yuki Clan compound. They shared a house together.

Initially, Kaito had considered letting them stay at his home with his mother, Naruto, and Karin, but with both Kimimaro and Guren, there simply wasn’t enough space. The Uzumaki residence had only one spare bedroom, and fitting them all inside would have been impossible. Fortunately, the Yuki Clan’s newly built compound was close to the Uzumaki residence, so Kaito arranged for them to have their own home there.

That said, they were always welcome at the Uzumaki house, and they regularly came over for lunch and dinner.

When Kushina found out what Kaito had done her reaction was immediate. She bonked him on the head with enough force to make his vision blur.

"Do you have any idea how dangerous that was?!" she shouted, her voice filled with both anger and worry. "What were you thinking, ya know?! You could’ve gotten yourself killed!"

Kaito rubbed his sore head, looking sheepish.

Kushina let out a heavy sigh, her expression softening. "Still… I’m proud of you," she admitted, placing a hand on his cheek. "You’ve got a good heart, but you’re too kind for this world, Kai-kun."

Despite her scolding, Kushina loved having more kids around the house. It kept her busy, gave her company, and, in a way, made the house feel even more like a home.

With their new life in Konoha, Haku, Guren, and Kimimaro were enrolled in the academy. Since they were a year older than Naruto, they were placed in the same class as Neji.

After class, they would usually hang out with Naruto and train under Kaito’s guidance.

Karin got along with the three surprisingly well. They all shared similar pasts—orphans who had suffered due to war and cruelty—and that common ground formed an unspoken bond between them.

At first, Kaito had to teach Kimimaro the basics of sparring—specifically, that he shouldn’t be trying to kill his opponent.

During Kimimaro and Naruto’s first spar, the moment Kaito gave the signal to start, Kimimaro immediately went for the kill.

Naruto managed to react, jerking his head to the side to avoid a deadly bone spear aimed straight at his throat.

Luckily, Kaito had been supervising the spar. The moment Kimimaro made his move, Kaito blurred into action, grabbing him by the wrist and stopping him before it even reached naruto.

"Whoa! That’s enough!" Kaito said firmly, pulling Kimimaro back. His grip was tight but not harsh.

Kimimaro blinked, confused. "Did I do something wrong?"

Kaito sighed, already expecting this. He let go of Kimimaro and placed a hand on his shoulder. "Look, sparring isn’t the same as a real fight, ya know. You don’t go for the kill. It’s about practice, learning, improving—not eliminating your opponent."

Kimimaro stared at him, processing the words. The concept seemed foreign to him, but he didn’t argue.

Seeing this, Kaito softened his tone. He understood where Kimimaro’s mindset came from. The boy had been raised as a weapon, trained to destroy his enemies. The idea of holding back probably never crossed his mind.

So, Kaito was patient. He took his time explaining the purpose of sparring, making sure Kimimaro understood the difference between training and actual combat.

Even though Kaito had stepped in before the fight could go any further, he had noticed something.

Naruto had reacted.

He had managed to move his head to the side—even if Kaito hadn’t intervened, he would’ve dodged the strike.

Kaito felt a swell of pride in his chest. That little reaction meant something. Naruto was getting faster. He could now react to a high-genin-level opponent.

He was improving.

Naruto, of course, didn’t take the incident seriously at all. Grinning, he patted Kimimaro on the back.

"It’s okay, ya know," he said, flashing his usual bright smile. "Just don’t try to kill me next time."

Kimimaro simply nodded, though he still seemed a little puzzled.

Beyond training, Kaito was also keeping a close eye on Kimimaro’s condition. In the original timeline, Kimimaro had suffered from a mysterious illness that eventually killed him. Kaito had no idea what the actual disease was, but he wasn’t taking any chances. If he noticed any warning signs, he’d take Kimimaro straight to Tsunade. Until then, he kept a careful watch.

That brings us to Kaito’s current situation—paying the price for his recklessness.

Tsunade had been absolutely livid when she found out what he had done. Her exact words? "You reckless idiot! What the hell were you thinking?!"

As punishment, she sentenced him to a full week of paperwork—her paperwork.

And to make things worse, she specifically banned him from using shadow clones to help.

But Kaito, being Kaito, wasn’t about to suffer through that.

He sent a shadow clone to handle the paperwork while he focused on more important things—like working on seals and training in senjutsu.

It worked. For two whole days, Tsunade was none the wiser.

Then, on the third day, disaster struck.

One of his clones, feeling particularly self-aware, muttered under its breath, "Man, why does the boss always make us do the grunt work?"

Tsunade, who had been lounging nearby, immediately turned to stare at it.

The clone froze.

Kaito, meanwhile, was across the village, peacefully working on seals—until he suddenly received the memory of the clone getting punched in the face with full force.

The moment the memory hit, Kaito winced, clutching his face. Even though the clone had dispelled, he could feel the phantom pain of his skull nearly caving in.

That punch hurt.

And, just like that, his punishment was extended from one week to an entire month of paperwork.

Tsunade had made it very clear—if he tried pulling that stunt again, the punishment would double every time.

So now, Kaito has a new strategy.

He finished all the paperwork as fast as possible, then bolted out of the office. Usually, he managed to get everything done by 3 PM. If he slacked off, he’d be stuck in the office until nightfall, drowning in paperwork.

Tsunade, of course, took great pleasure in his suffering.

Whenever he complained, she smirked and said, "Serves you right, brat. Now you know what I have to deal with every day because of you."

…

Kaito sighed, lifting his head from the desk and staring at the towering stack of paperwork in front of him.

With another tired exhale, he grabbed the top sheet, quickly scanning through it before signing and stamping it with the Hokage seal.

Tsunade, watching him from her seat. "So, brat, I heard you rejected training under Jiraiya."

Kaito frowned, not bothering to look up. "I don’t need his help. I got as strong as I am now without him. Besides, his fighting style doesn’t suit me."

Tsunade raised an eyebrow. "You ever gonna forgive him for not being there for you and Naruto?"

Kaito’s pen stilled for a moment, but he didn’t lift his gaze from the document in front of him.

"I don’t care if he was there for me or not," he said flatly. "I only met him once before the Nine-Tails incident. What I can’t forgive is the fact that he would have abandoned Naruto if Mom and I hadn’t survived that night. And trust me, us making it out alive? That was nothing short of a miracle."

He scoffed, shaking his head. "He asked to be Naruto’s godfather, but if we had died, he would’ve just left him to fend for himself. If the Third Hokage was actually a trustworthy man, maybe that would have been fine. But you and I both know how he was, ya know. He wouldn’t have let Aunt Mikoto take care of Naruto either, all because of those old cronies breathing down his neck. And with Danzo leaking Naruto’s identity as the Jinchūriki, how do you think his life would’ve gone?"

Kaito finally looked up, his gaze sharp and unwavering.

"Naruto would have been raised under the Third’s twisted version of the Will of Fire. He would have been groomed into a blindly loyal weapon for Konoha."

Tsunade leaned forward slightly, watching him carefully. "So… you don’t believe in the Will of Fire?"

Kaito let out a slow breath, shaking his head. "I don’t believe in the Third Hokage’s version of it," he corrected. "That man twisted it into a brainwashing tool—drilling it into the heads of kids in the academy, conditioning them to throw their lives away for the village without question."

His voice softened slightly. "But the First Hokage… Hashirama’s version? That, I believe in. He didn’t want us to mindlessly sacrifice ourselves for Konoha. He wanted us to form bonds, to connect with people. Through those connections, we’d find strength—not just for ourselves, but for each other. That’s the true Will of Fire. When we have people we love, people we want to protect… that’s when we become strong. Not because we were ordered to die for the village, but because we have something precious worth fighting for."

Kaito looked up from the paperwork, meeting Tsunade’s gaze head-on. "That’s the difference."

Tsunade leaned back against the couch, closing her eyes for a moment. "Sometimes, I forget how mature you really are… You’re so young, and yet you see things clearer than most adults." She sighed, shaking her head slightly. "At your age, I don’t think I was even half as mature as you."

Opening her eyes again, she smirked slightly. "If my grandfather were here, he would’ve said you’re the embodiment of the Will of Fire."

Kaito raised an eyebrow. "Does that mean I can leave without finishing the paperwork?"

Tsunade snorted. "Nice try, kid."

Kaito sighed, slumping forward onto the desk. "Worth a try, ya know."

Just then, the door to the Hokage’s office swung open.

"Time to eat, you two!" announced Kushina as she walked in, carrying several bento boxes in her arms.

Tsunade groaned, rubbing her forehead. "How many times have I told you to knock, Kushina?"

Kushina just grinned. "Too many times to count!" she said cheerfully. "Now come eat—I just finished making these, ya know. They’re still hot!"

Kaito’s face lit up at the sight of the food. "Mom, you’re a lifesaver, ya know!"

Kushina smiled warmly at him. "Well, I can’t leave my baby starving, can I?" she said, ruffling his hair.

Then, her gaze drifted toward the massive pile of paperwork still sitting on the desk. She blinked.

"Wait… you’re not even halfway done?" she asked, raising an eyebrow. "You’re usually almost finished by now."

Tsunade walked over, taking a seat in one of the two chairs in front of the desk. She stretched slightly before smirking. "This is the new batch."

Just then Shizune walked in, carrying yet another massive stack of paperwork.

She carefully placed it next to the already towering pile on the desk. Smiling sheepishly, she looked at Kaito and said, "We need this done today too, Kaito-kun."

Kaito felt his soul leave his body.

Genuine tears welled up in his eyes as he stared at the never-ending mountain of paperwork.

Kushina, watching her eldest son on the verge of breaking down, frowned and turned toward Tsunade.

"Ya know, Tsuna-nee, you’re just being mean to Kai-kun," she huffed, crossing her arms. "I know what he did was reckless, and yeah, it could’ve gone wrong, but he did it to save people—innocent kids, ya know. You should punish him, sure, but not like this!"

Tsunade, completely unfazed, casually opened her bento box. "Well, I only gave him one week of paperwork at first," she said between bites. "But he had to go and make things worse for himself."

Kushina’s glare sharpened. "You should at least let him use his shadow clones to help. He’s still a kid, ya know."

Tsunade sighed, rubbing her temples. She knew better than to argue with Kushina when she got like this. "Alright, brat. You can use shadow clones."

Before she could even finish speaking, Kaito tackled Kushina into a tight hug, burying his face into her shirt like a child.

"You’re the best, ya know! Thank you, thank you, thank you!" he cried dramatically.

Kushina giggled, ruffling his hair. "Yeah, yeah, just don’t get yourself into more trouble, Kai-kun."

Kaito immediately let go and clapped his hands together.

"Alright—Kage Bunshin no Jutsu!"

In a puff of smoke, five shadow clones appeared.

The clones took one look at the paperwork… and immediately started complaining.

One groaned. "Oh, come on, boss! Can’t we do something fun for a change?"

Another picked up a paper and sighed. "Even with the five of us, this is gonna take hours to finish!"

One of the clones turned away dramatically. "I’m going on strike."

Another followed, arms crossed. "Yeah, me too. I refuse to be a part of this nonsense."

Kaito twitched.

Tsunade, grinning, took another bite of her food. "Looks like your clones hate you, brat."

Kaito begged them. "Come on, guys! If we work together, we can get this done quickly, ya know! Please!"

One of the clones shrugged. "You’re on your own on this one, boss."

The others nodded in agreement.

"Yeah, do your own paperwork!"

One even shouted, "We’re people too, ya know!"

Kaito’s eye twitched violently.

Meanwhile, Tsunade was thoroughly entertained, casually eating her bento as she watched the chaos unfold.

Kushina sighed and walked over to one of the clones. She gently patted his head to get their attention. The clones turned to look at her.

Leaning in slightly, she said, "Please, guys, help Kai-kun. He really needs your help, ya know."

One of the clones muttered, looking down. "But we always get stuck with the menial tasks, ya know… it’s not fair."

Of course, since they were all Kaito, they had a soft spot for Kushina—their mother.

Kushina smiled knowingly. "How about this? If you guys help Kai-Kun with this, I’ll make your favorite for dinner."

One of the clones perked up instantly. "With zenzai?"

Kushina grinned. "Yep!"—she even popped the ‘p’ for emphasis—"I’ll even make red bean mochi for you guys."

At that, one of the clones jumped up and shouted, "What are we waiting for?! You heard Mom—let’s get this over with!"

The rest cheered in agreement and dove into the paperwork like their lives depended on it.

Meanwhile, Kaito sat there, his eyes still twitching.

Tsunade let out a loud snort, barely holding back her laughter. "Looks like your clones listen to Kushina more than you, brat."

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 42

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 42

They appeared with another crack in front of the gates of Longbottom Manor.

Neville had long since gotten used to the sensation of Apparition, but Harry—not so much. He was sprawled on the ground, looking like the world had just spun out from under him.

Neville walked over, grinning as he reached down to help him up. "You okay, mate?" he asked, barely holding back laughter. "Told you you’d love it."

Harry groaned, one hand clutching his stomach as he looked miserable, like he might hurl.

Augusta, already walking toward the gates, glanced back. "That’s how it is the first time. You’ll get used to it," she said smoothly. "I remember Neville being in the exact same condition the first time we Apparated."

Harry took a few deep breaths, slowly regaining his composure before grabbing the handle of his trunk and pulling it along.

As Augusta pushed open the gates, she turned back to him. "Welcome to Longbottom Manor, Mr. Potter."

Harry looked up—and his jaw dropped.

The manor was massive.

"It’s huge," he muttered, staring in awe.

…

Evening had settled over Longbottom Manor, casting a warm glow across the estate. The sky outside was painted in hues of deep orange and purple as the sun dipped below the horizon.

Inside his room, Neville sat at his study desk, surrounded by open books and scattered notes filled with his careful handwriting.

He was deeply engrossed in his research—trying to understand how potions could target specific parts of the body. In front of him were notes on Skele-Gro, a potion known for regenerating bones. Neville was studying its properties, trying to figure out how it affected only bones and not other parts of the body.

If he could unlock that secret, he could begin developing a potion that might heal the damaged parts of his parents' brains.

Leaning back in his chair, Neville threw his head up, staring at the ceiling in frustration.

"Man, this is harder than I thought," he muttered to himself. "I need to figure out a way to make a potion act only on a specific part of the brain… but how?"

Just then, a knock at his door pulled him from his thoughts.

"Huh?" Neville blinked.

"Hey, Neville, can I come in?" came Harry’s voice from the hallway.

Neville sat up. "Yeah, come in."

The door opened, and Harry stepped inside, glancing around. His eyes landed on the open potion books scattered across the desk.

"You’re still studying?" Harry asked, walking over. "Potions?"

Neville shook his head. "Something I’m working on," he replied vaguely before turning to Harry. "Did you need something? I thought you were too tired and wanted to sleep before dinner."

Harry raised an eyebrow. "It’s already evening. I was heading to dinner."

Neville frowned and glanced at the clock on the wall. His eyes widened slightly.

"What? Evening already?"

Stretching his arms, Neville stood up and yawned. "Man, it’s already seven o’clock? I didn’t even realize it was this late."

He yawned again before walking toward the door, Harry following behind.

"Were you asleep till just now?" Neville asked as they made their way down the hall.

Harry shook his head. "No, I woke up around five and did some homework."

"Finished with them?" Neville asked.

Harry sighed. "Still have Herbology and History of Magic left to do."

Neville nodded and smirked. "Good luck with that. I fell asleep when I was doing it."

It had been a week since Harry had been staying at Longbottom Manor.

The two of them had settled into a routine—waking up early for workouts, followed by spell practice.

In the afternoons, they flew around the estate on their brooms, enjoying the vast open space surrounding the manor.

Neville had found an old Comet 360 stored away in the house—one that had once belonged to his father. To his surprise, flying came naturally to him.

At first, Augusta had been apprehensive about letting him fly. after all the old Neville, had died falling of a broom.

But after watching him fly with confidence, she had reluctantly allowed it, though she always kept a close watch whenever he was in the air.

Aside from flying and training, Harry was also subjected to Neville’s etiquette and dancing lessons—a requirement Augusta had firmly insisted upon.

Much to Neville’s amusement, Harry had no choice but to attend.

While Harry grumbled about it, Augusta made it clear that as a guest in her home, proper wizarding manners were expected.

They soon reached the dining hall, where Augusta was already seated at the table, reading through a few documents.

As soon as she saw them enter, she set them aside and looked up. "Good evening, boys. I was just about to send Clippy to fetch you both for dinner."

Neville walked over and took his seat beside her. "Hey, Gran," he greeted. "How’s your day been?"

Harry sat down across from Neville, shifting slightly. "Good evening, ma’am," he said, a bit sheepishly.

Augusta waved a hand dismissively. "How many times do I have to tell you, Harry? Just call me Gran."

Harry rubbed the back of his head. "Uh, sorry, Mrs. Lon—I mean, Gran," he corrected quickly. "It’s a force of habit."

Augusta gave a small nod before turning to Neville. "The usual—meetings with the managers and supervisors, checking to make sure everything is running properly," she said, taking a sip of her tea.

She then studied Neville for a moment before humming in thought. "I should take you with me one of these days," she said. "You need to start learning about the family businesses. I won’t be around forever to manage them, and one day, you’ll have to take over."

Neville sighed and shook his head. "Don’t say that, Gran. Besides, you’re only fifty-eight. I’ve read that witches and wizards can easily live past a hundred," he pointed out. "But as for learning about the business, I’d be happy to."

Augusta nodded approvingly. "That’s good to hear," she said. "But let’s leave it for next summer. You should enjoy this one with your friends."

Just then, Tinkle appeared with dinner. The plates floated to the table with practiced ease, settling in front of them.

It was English roast again, and Neville thought to himself, I really need to get some recipe books.

As they ate, Augusta glanced between them. "So, what were you boys up to while I was gone?"

Neville shrugged. "Not much," he said between bites. "We exercised in the morning, then practiced some spells. After that, we flew around the manor for a while. Later in the evening, Harry said he was feeling tired and wanted to sleep, so I did some studying while waiting for dinner."

Augusta then turned to Harry. "And you, Harry? Did you sleep the whole evening?" she asked curiously.

Augusta turned to Harry. "And you, Harry? Did you sleep the whole evening?"

Harry shook his head. "No, ma’—Gran," he corrected quickly. "It was just a short nap. I did some homework afterward."

Augusta nodded before turning to Neville. "And what about you, Neville? Have you finished your homework as well?"

Neville nodded. "Yeah, Hermione and I finished it before the summer break."

"Smart of you to get it done early," Augusta said approvingly.

As they continued eating, she turned back to Harry. "Tomorrow, Neville and I will be visiting his parents at the hospital. Would you like to come along? It’s fine if you’d prefer to stay here."

Harry looked caught off guard. "Um… I wouldn’t want to intrude, ma’am."

Neville, swallowing a mouthful of mashed potatoes, glanced at him. "Speaking of parents, have you ever visited yours?"

Harry blinked in confusion. "Huh? No… I can’t. You know… they’re gone."

Neville sighed. "I meant visited their graves—you know, paying your respects."

Harry’s eyes widened slightly. "No, I… I haven’t thought about that."

Augusta shook her head. "That won’t do, young man. They gave their lives to protect you. The least you could do is visit their resting place."

Harry looked down, his fingers tightening slightly around his fork. "It’s just… last year was so overwhelming," he admitted. "I didn’t even know my parents were wizards. I didn’t even know the wizarding world existed. The Dursleys always told me they were drunks who died in a car crash. I guess… it just slipped my mind."

Augusta sighed, her expression softening slightly. "It’s not too late to visit them," she said gently. Then, after a moment of thought, she tapped her chin. "What do you say, Harry? We can stop by Godric’s Hollow and pay your respects before heading to St. Mungo’s to visit Neville’s parents."

Harry hesitated. "I… I don’t want to inconvenience you, Mrs. Longbottom."

Augusta shook her head. "Nonsense. It’s no inconvenience at all," she assured him. Then she raised an eyebrow. "And didn’t I ask you to call me Gran?"

Harry nodded quickly. "Thank you… Gran," he said, his voice sincere.

Augusta shook her head. "Nonsense. It’s no inconvenience. And didn’t I ask you to call me Gran?"

Harry nodded quickly. "Thank you, Gran."

She waved off his thanks.

They finished dinner and moved on to dessert.

After a while of talking, Augusta let out a tired sigh and pushed back her chair. "Well, boys, I’m knackered. I’m heading to bed," she said, standing up. Then, she turned to Neville and gave him a pointed look. "And you, I think you’ve had enough ice cream for one night."

Neville, still with a spoon in his mouth, looked up at her with wide eyes. "Aw, come on, Gran, just one more scoop? You know I can’t get this at Hogwarts!"

She sighed in exasperation but relented. "Fine. But just one more," she said, turning to Tinkle. "After this scoop, no more."

With that, she left the dining hall.

Neville grinned as he watched her leave. "Thanks, Gran!"

Across the table, Harry smirked. "So, when did Hermione say she’d be coming over?"

Neville took another bite of ice cream before answering. "I think next week. And when she’s here, we should go watch a movie or something. Entertainment in the magical world is kinda boring," he said, shaking his head. "Though, knowing her, she’ll want to go straight to Diagon Alley for the second-year books as soon as they send us our school letters."

Harry chuckled. "Yeah, she might just drag us there first."

Finishing the last of his ice cream, Neville placed his spoon down and stood up. "Alright, we should go practice Occlumency before bed."

Harry stood as well, and just as they were about to leave the dining hall, a loud commotion came from the kitchen.

Neville and Harry exchanged glances.

Neville put a finger to his lips, signaling for Harry to stay quiet.

They listened. There was the sound of pans and pots crashing to the ground, followed by muffled grunts and scuffling.

Neville pulled out his wand and cautiously approached the kitchen door. Carefully, he pushed it open and stepped inside, his wand raised.

Inside, three house-elves were fighting—two of them ganging up on one.

The small creatures were rolling around on the floor, punching, kicking, and pulling each other’s ears.

Neville immediately recognized two of them—Tinkle and Clinky, his family’s house-elves.

The third, however, was someone he didn’t recognize.

Neville immediately raised his wand and cast, "Immobulus!"

All three house-elves froze mid-fight, their limbs locked in place. Without hesitation, Neville pointed at the unfamiliar elf and cast, "Stupefy!"

The unknown elf slumped to the floor, unconscious.

To be sure, Neville followed up with "Incarcerous," ropes materializing and binding the stunned elf securely.

Now that everything had settled, Neville finally got a good look at the unfamiliar house-elf. Unlike Tinkle and Clinky, who wore clean tunics, this one was dressed in a worn, ragged pillowcase.

Neville’s eyes widened as he immediately recognized who it was in his thoughts: "This must be Dobby."

Keeping his wand at the ready, Neville waved it again and muttered, "Finite Incantatem."

Tinkle and Clinky shook off the effects of the Immobulus, both looking anxiously at Neville.

He gestured toward the bound elf. "Alright, what’s going on? Who is this?"

Tinkle and Clinky exchanged nervous glances before Clinky spoke first, their voice trembling. "We are sorry, young master Nevy. We don’t know who this is! He showed up and started stealing Harry Potter’s mail for the past two days! We finally caught him!"

Harry's eyes widened. "My mail? He’s the one messing with my letters?"

Neville shrugged slightly and nodded at Tinkle and Clinky. "Good job catching him. I’ll take care of it. Just don’t tell Gran about this, okay? I’ll explain later."

The elves nodded obediently before disappearing with two small pops!

Neville then turned back to Harry. "Well, now we know what happened to all the letters we sent you."

Harry clenched his fists. "Did Dumbledore send him? Was this to make sure I didn’t get mail from my friends?"

Neville shrugged. "Only one way to find out."He pointed his wand at the bound elf and cast, "Enervate."

The house-elf jerked awake with a jolt, its eyes blinking as it took in its surroundings. Finally, its gaze landed on Harry and Neville, and in a high-pitched, excited voice it cried out,

"Harry Potter! So long has Dobby wanted to meet you, sir... such an honour it is..."

Harry and Neville exchanged a look before Harry managed a quiet, "Umm, thank you."

Neville crossed his arms and fixed the elf with a sharp gaze. "What’s your name, and what are you doing here in Longbottom Manor?"

The house-elf turned to him, his large eyes blinking rapidly. "Dobby, sir. Just Dobby. Dobby the house-elf," he said, bowing slightly.

Harry frowned. "Dobby, why were you taking my letters?"

Dobby’s ears drooped, and he shuffled nervously. "Harry Potter mustn’t be angry with Dobby—Dobby did it for the best…" he said earnestly. "Harry Potter mustn’t be angry… Dobby hoped… if Harry Potter thought his friends had forgotten him… Harry Potter might not want to go back to school, sir…"

Neville sighed and released the Incarcerous spell with a flick of his wand. "Where are the letters?"

Dobby hesitated for a moment, then reached into the inside of the filthy pillowcase he was wearing and pulled out a thick wad of envelopes.

Harry snatched them up and quickly sifted through them—letters from Hermione, Neville, Ron, and even Hagrid.

As Harry checked through the stack, Neville narrowed his eyes at the elf. "Do you work for Dumbledore?"

Dobby shook his head rapidly. "Dobby wishes—oh, how Dobby wishes—Dobby worked for the great wizard Dumblydore!"

Harry looked up sharply. "Then who do you work for?"

Dobby’s whole body stiffened as if an invisible force had suddenly grabbed him. He shook his head violently. "Dobby can’t say who Dobby works for!"

Neville and Harry exchanged a glance.

Then, Dobby leaned in close, his wide eyes gleaming. "Dobby heard tell," he whispered hoarsely, "that Harry Potter met the Dark Lord for a second time, just weeks ago… that Harry Potter escaped yet again."

Harry stiffened. "Uh… yeah," he muttered, unsure of what else to say. He exchanged another uncertain glance with Neville before nodding.

Dobby’s eyes suddenly filled with tears. "Ah, sir!" he gasped, dabbing his face with the filthy corner of his pillowcase. "Harry Potter is valiant and bold! He has braved so many dangers already! But Dobby has come to protect Harry Potter, to warn him, even if he does have to shut his ears in the oven door later…"

Harry frowned, his concern growing. "Warn me? Warn me of what?"

Neville, arms still crossed, asked, "You don’t want Harry to go back to Hogwarts?"

"Yes!" squeaked Dobby, nodding so hard his large ears flapped. "Harry Potter must stay where he is safe! He is too great, too good, to lose! If Harry Potter goes back to Hogwarts, he will be in mortal danger."

Harry frowned. "Why?" he asked, caught off guard.

Dobby trembled all over, lowering his voice to a whisper. "There is a plot, Harry Potter. A plot to make the most terrible things happen at Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry this year. Dobby has known it for months, sir. Harry Potter must not put himself in peril. He is too important, sir!"

"What terrible things?" Harry demanded immediately. "Who’s plotting them?"

Dobby let out a funny choking noise, then suddenly banged his head madly against the floor.

Neville sighed and shook his head. "He can’t tell us, Harry. He’s bound by magic."

Harry clenched his fists. "All right!" he said, exasperated. "You can’t say, I understand. But why are you warning me?"

A sudden, unpleasant thought struck him. "Hang on—this doesn’t have anything to do with Dumbledore, does it?"

Dobby’s head tilted dangerously close to the wall again, but Harry quickly added, "You could just shake or nod."

Slowly, Dobby shook his head. "Not—not Dumblydore, sir."

Harry exhaled heavily and ran a hand through his messy hair, frustration clear on his face.

Dobby blinked anxiously up at Harry. "Harry Potter, sir, if he gives Dobby his word that he will not return to Hogwarts, Dobby will never disturb Harry Potter again!"

Harry was about to speak, but Neville cut in first. "All right," he said smoothly. "I’ll make sure Harry doesn’t go back to Hogwarts. But in return, I don’t want you coming back into Longbottom Manor again or stealing Harry’s letters."

Harry turned to Neville in shock, wondering what he was doing.

Neville gave him a quick wink.

Harry hesitated, then nodded along. "Alright," he said. "I won’t go to Hogwarts."

Dobby jumped up excitedly. "Thank you, sirs! Thank you!"

Neville waved a hand. "Alright, alright. Now leave."

Dobby gave one last excited nod before popping away with a crack.

The moment he was gone, Harry sighed and turned to Neville. "Do you think it’s Dumbledore? Is he trying to test me like last term?"

Neville shook his head. "I don’t think so. Dobby did say it wasn’t Dumbledore."

Kaito Akaden Chapter 161

Kaito Akaden Chapter 161

Kahyo stared at them as if they were crazy.

Kakashi gave her an eye-smile. “Trust us. There’s no faster way to travel.” He extended his other hand to her.

Kahyo still looked skeptical but sighed and grabbed Kakashi’s and Tenzo’s hands.

“Just hold on, and don’t let go,” Kaito instructed.

Kahyo opened her mouth to ask what he meant by that—

But before she could—

Kaito activated Hiraishin, teleporting them out of the room.

They all arrived in a snow-covered clearing, a large wooden house standing in the center.

Kahyo stumbled from the sudden shift, still disoriented. Before she could fall, Kakashi caught her, steadying her with a firm grip.

Kaito, standing beside them, smirked. “Smooth, Kakashi.”

Tenzo snickered. “Fastest I’ve seen him move.”

Kakashi sighed, already bracing for the inevitable teasing.

Kaito grinned mischievously. “Wait till Mom hears about this.”

Kakashi groaned, rubbing his temple. “Just… let me live, Kaito.”

Meanwhile, Kahyo looked around in astonishment before turning to Kaito. “That was… space-time ninjutsu. Was that the Hiraishin?”

Kaito nodded. “Yep.” Without missing a beat, he walked over to the house, slid open the door, and stepped inside.

…

As Kahyo stepped into the wooden house, her eyes immediately fell on the sleeping figures of her clan’s women and children, wrapped in blankets on the floor. A sense of relief washed over her at seeing them safe.

Standing near the entrance, Hotaru turned toward Kaito and Tenzo. “You’re back, Kaito-kun, Tenzo-sempai?”

Then, noticing Kakashi, she sighed in relief. “I’m glad you’re alright, Kakashi-sempai.”

Kakashi gave her an eye-smile. “Hey there, Hotaru.”

Hotaru nodded before her gaze landed on the unfamiliar woman standing beside Kakashi. She raised an eyebrow at Kaito.

Kaito followed her gaze and casually explained, “She’s with Kakashi. A member of the Yuki Clan—her name is Kahyo.”

Without saying anything, Kahyo walked over to one of the sleeping women, kneeling down and gently touching her shoulder.

She then looked up at Kaito. “Are they still under the genjutsu?”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah. I wasn’t sure how they’d react when they woke up, so I left it in place.”

Kahyo turned to him fully. “Can you release them?”

Kaito sighed but nodded. “Yeah, but you’ll have to convince them, ya know.”

Kahyo gave a firm nod.

Kaito formed a one-handed ram seal and called out, “Release.”

One by one, the women began to stir, blinking as they slowly regained consciousness. Murmurs of confusion spread throughout the room.

“W-What…?”

“Where are we?”

“Who are they?”

“This… this isn’t our clan compound.”

“Hey, look! She has a Byakugan—is she from the Hyuga Clan?”

“Why are we here?”

The quiet cries of babies who had begun waking up only added to the rising tension.

Before panic could fully set in, Kahyo took a deep breath and raised her voice. “Everyone, please calm down! You are all safe!”

The moment they recognized her, murmurs of recognition rippled through the group.

“Wait… isn’t that Kahyo? The chunin that went missing?”

“What’s going on?” another woman asked, her voice laced with concern.

Kahyo took a step forward, her voice steady but reassuring. “Please, calm down. I’ll explain everything… but first, I need you all to relax.”

Slowly, the nervous murmuring quieted.

Seeing that she had their attention, Kahyo exhaled, preparing to explain their situation.

Meanwhile, Kaito stood with Kakashi, Tenzo, and Hotaru, watching as Kahyo spoke to the Yuki Clan members.

Kakashi rubbed his head and sighed. “I really hope you have a good explanation for Lady Tsunade.”

Kaito chuckled nervously, rubbing the back of his head. “Yeah… about that… Kakashi, how about you come with me when I talk to her? You know, as backup.” He grinned.

Kakashi shook his head. “No way. This is your mess to clean up. I won’t be helping you.”

Kaito groaned. “Ah, come on, man. You gotta back me up here! It’ll be way easier if you guys support me, ya know?”

Tenzo crossed his arms and smirked. “Sorry, Kaito. Can’t help you with this one. You’re on your own. Good luck.”

Kaito’s jaw dropped. “Ah, not you too, Tenzo! I thought you were a cool guy! Man, I get Kakashi leaving me hanging, but you? I really thought you’d help a bro out! Guess I was wrong about you, huh?”

Kaito then turned to Tenzo, giving him his best puppy dog eyes.

Tenzo sighed, rubbing his temples. “Fine. Fine. I’ll come with you. But you’re doing all the talking.”

Kaito’s face lit up. “I knew you were cooler than Kakashi! You’re such a great guy, Tenzo. I’m sure you’ll end up with someone really hot in the future, ya know.” He grinned teasingly.

Tenzo’s face turned red, and he sputtered, looking away.

Kakashi snorted. “You’re so annoying.”

Just then, Hotaru tugged at Kaito’s sleeve. “Kai-kun, I want to come with you to meet Lady Tsunade.”

Kaito shook his head and patted her head gently. “I don’t want you getting into trouble, Hotaru-chan. I’ll be fine.” He gave her a reassuring smile before gesturing toward Haku, Kimimaro, and Guren. “Plus, I need you to keep an eye on them. We can’t just leave them here alone, ya know? They only really know us.”

Hotaru pouted but eventually sighed in defeat. “Hai…”

….

The sun shone brightly over Konoha, casting its warm glow on the bustling village. The streets were alive with vendors calling out their wares, shinobi heading to their missions, and civilians going about their daily routines.

Inside the Hokage’s Office, Tsunade leaned back in her chair, sipping her tea with a satisfied sigh. The rare moment of peace was welcome amidst the endless pile of paperwork she faced every day.

Just then, the door opened, and Shizune walked in, carrying yet another towering stack of papers. She placed them on the desk with practiced ease.

“Lady Tsunade, please try to finish this batch soon,” Shizune said before walking out of the office, leaving Tsunade to her fate.

Tsunade sighed, setting her tea down and reluctantly picking up a pen to start on the paperwork.

At that moment, the window to her office slid open.

“Hey there, Tsunade,” Jiraiya greeted with his usual grin, peeking in through the window. “Looks like you’ve adapted well to your role as Fifth Hokage.”

Tsunade didn’t even glance up from her papers. “What do you want, Jiraiya?”

Jiraiya shut the window behind him and casually strolled over, taking a seat across from her. “What, can’t an old friend stop by to check up on you from time to time?”

Tsunade sighed. “I’m surprised you’re not off peeping like you usually do whenever you’re in the village.”

Jiraiya winced, scratching the back of his head. “Yeah… I think I’ll be laying low while I’m in Konoha.”

Tsunade raised an eyebrow, smirking. “Afraid the kid might actually kill you this time if he catches you peeping?”

Jiraiya let out a nervous laugh. “Hey now, I’m not afraid of the brat! I’ve just been busy, that’s all. Spent some time with Naruto and Karin.”

Tsunade snorted. “Yeah, right. You’re just worried that if Naruto picks up on your habits, not only would Kaito hunt you down, but Kushina would personally skin you alive.”

Jiraiya paled at the thought but wisely chose not to comment.

Just then, there was a knock at the door.

“Come in,” Tsunade called out.

The door opened, and Shikaku Nara walked in lazily, a tired expression on his face. “Hope I’m not disturbing you, Lady Tsunade, Jiraiya-sama.”

Right behind him, Fugaku Uchiha entered, a file in hand. He nodded respectfully. “Lady Tsunade, Jiraiya-sama.”

Jiraiya leaned back in his chair, grinning. “Shikaku, Fugaku—it’s been a while. Hope you two have been doing well.”

Tsunade set down her pen, eyeing the two men. “Good morning to you too, Shikaku, Fugaku. I assume you’ve brought the reports I requested?”

Shikaku was the first to step forward, handing Tsunade a neatly compiled report.

“Here’s the report on the academy’s new structure that you requested,” he said lazily. “According to the jōnin instructors, the new batch of graduating genin are already showing better results than previous years. The percentage of graduates who pass their jōnin instructor’s test has risen from 33% to 44%—an 11% increase. Of course, this is only the first batch under the new structure, but the number is expected to rise every year.”

Tsunade flipped through the papers, nodding in approval. “That’s good. It’s what we expected—drastic improvement doesn’t happen overnight, but this is a solid step forward. More competent shinobi in Konoha will mean fewer unnecessary losses in the future.”

Jiraiya, curious, leaned over and took the folder from Tsunade, flipping through it. “Huh… you changed the academy structure? Why? I thought Konoha’s was already one of the best among the Great Nations.”

Tsunade exhaled, setting her pen down. “Kaito pointed something out to me—something I should have realized earlier. Too many kids died in the Third Shinobi War, most of them sent to battle way too young and before they were properly trained. They weren’t warriors—they were just numbers to fill the battlefield, and in the end, it hurt us more than anyone else.”

Jiraiya’s expression turned serious, listening carefully.

“The whole reason my grandfather created the village was nuture and protect the next generation to make sure they were trained properly before they had to take on that responsibility,” Tsunade continued. “But at some point, Konoha lost sight of that. Kaito helped me reformed the system. We increased the graduation age, introduced advanced training at the academy, and helped students find their specialization earlier so they could be properly trained before even stepping onto a battlefield. In the long run, this will reduce casualties and increase our military strength. Not just in numbers, but in quality.”

Jiraiya closed the folder, nodding. “That’s… actually a smart move. More training means stronger shinobi—and fewer unnecessary deaths.”

Tsunade smirked. “Exactly.”

Then, turning to Fugaku, she added, “Sorry to keep you waiting, Fugaku. Do you have the report I asked for?”

“Hai lady Tsunade “ Fugaku nodded, stepping forward and handing her the documents.

Tsunade opened the folder and scanned through the contents.

Fugaku began his report. “These are the latest updates from the border patrol units. So far, all borders remain relatively peaceful, and there haven’t been any major disturbances. Kumo has been quiet since you took office. Intelligence reports suggest they are focused on rebuilding their military strength after the losses they suffered.

"As for Iwa, tensions at the borders have also decreased. The small skirmishes that persisted after the war have gradually faded, and reports indicate that the Tsuchikage is considering stepping down.”

Tsunade snorted. “The old fence-sitter stepping down? I’ll believe it when I see it.”

She then turned to Fugaku. “And what about the Uchiha Clan? How have things been on that front?”

Fugaku’s expression softened slightly. “We’ve been doing well, Lady Hokage—thanks to you.”

Tsunade raised an eyebrow. “Oh?”

Fugaku continued, “Ever since the Konoha Police Force started accepting other shinobi into its ranks, the resentment toward the Uchiha Clan has significantly lessened. It’s had a positive impact on the clan.

"Additionally, since Uchiha can now enter all departments of the village’s administration, they’ve been able to integrate better with the rest of the shinobi forces. Morale is high, and for the first time in a long while, my clan members feel included. They’re happier and more sociable now.”

Tsunade smirked. “Glad to hear it.”

Just then, Kaito appeared in the middle of the room with Tenzo beside him.

“Well, hello there, Lady Tsunade!” Kaito greeted with a big grin, waving. “You’re looking extra lovely today! Did you cut your hair?”

Tsunade’s eye twitched.

Tenzo sighed heavily and facepalmed.

Kaito then turned, spotting Shikaku and Fugaku. He smiled, rubbing the back of his head. “Hey there, Sensei! Fugaku-sama! Didn’t think I’d run into you both here.”

Jiraiya frowned. “Hey! What about me?”

Kaito completely ignored him.

Tsunade groaned and slammed her forehead onto the desk. “What have you done now, Kaito?”

Kaito gasped dramatically, placing a hand over his chest. “Hey! Why do you always assume I did something bad? That’s hurtful, ya know!”

Shikaku sighed and looked at Kaito with a lazy but sharp gaze. “First,” he said, raising a finger, “you showed up in the Hokage’s office looking nervous while you were supposed to be on a mission. Second,” he raised another finger, “you brought an ANBU who was not assigned to your mission. And third,” he lifted a third finger and pointed downward, “that ANBU isn’t even in uniform… or wearing sandals.”

Kaito blinked, glancing down at Tenzo’s feet, only now realizing that he was barefoot.

Tsunade crossed her arms and leaned back. “And the last time you showed up like this, you had a half-dead kid with you and were planning to assassinate the Third Hokage and his advisors to ‘fix’ the Uchiha situation.”

Shikaku pinched the bridge of his nose. “of course he would.”

Fugaku turned to Kaito, eyes wide.

Kaito looked offended, crossing his arms. “Hey! First of all, it wasn’t my fault that Shisui was attacked by Danzo! I was the one who saved him! And secondly, no one was willing to step up and actually resolve the issue. It was the simplest solution with the least casualties, ya know?”

Then, turning to Tenzo, he added sheepishly, “Uh… sorry about the whole barefoot thing. Didn’t realize, my bad. I’ll make it up to you somehow, ya know.”

Before Tenzo could respond, Kaito’s eyes widened, and he smacked his fist into his palm. “I got it! I’ll ask Mom to set you up on a date with Shizune-san! She’s been dying to find someone for her!”

Just then, the office door opened, and Shizune walked in—only to freeze as Kaito’s words hit her.

Her face turned bright pink. “W-W-W-What are you guys talking about?!”

Tenzo’s entire face flushed red, and before Kaito could say another word, he grabbed him by the neck and started choking him. “Stop talking nonsense!”

Kaito flailed, tapping Tenzo’s hand and wheezing, “L-Let… go…!”

Tenzo quickly let go, still red-faced, and turned to Shizune, scratching the back of his head awkwardly. “Uh… don’t listen to him. He’s just blabbering.”

Tsunade sighed, rubbing her temples. “As amusing as this is, I do want to know why you both are here.” Her sharp gaze landed on Tenzo. “And why are you with Kaito?”

Kaito rubbed the back of his head nervously. “Uh… right. Well… let’s start from the beginning.”

…

Tsunade rubbed her temples, her frustration evident. “Let me get this straight—you found three orphans, fought Orochimaru, infiltrated Kiri, discovered that the Mizukage was about to wipe out three clans, rescued their civilians along with some stationed shinobi, teleported them to an island, got Tenzo to build houses for them, moved the Yuki Clan members to the Land of Tea, and then promised them you could get them settled in Konoha.”

She took a deep breath, then exhaled sharply. “Did I get all of that right?”

Shikaku, arms crossed, added in a deadpan voice, “You forgot the part where he kicked the Mizukage in the face.”

Tsunade groaned and slammed her forehead onto the desk.

Kaito laughed nervously. “Yeah… that about sums it up, ya know.”

Jiraiya chuckled, shaking his head. “Kid you said I was the one most likely to cause an international incident… but you, kid? You just took it ten steps higher.”

Shikaku let out a long sigh. “Kaito, do you realize the weight of your actions? Do you have any idea what this could cost Konoha? How can you be this reckless?”

Kaito’s face turned serious. “I know what I did isn’t what a typical shinobi in my position should do,” he said, his voice firm. “But I couldn’t just stand by and let him slaughter kids and innocent people.”His fists clenched. “Half the people I rescued are children under the age of five. I couldn’t just leave them there to die—not when I knew I could help them. And turning a blind eye? That’s not something I can do—or will do. Especially when the Mizukage isn’t even in control of himself.”

That caught everyone’s attention.

Tsunade’s sharp eyes locked onto Kaito. “What do you mean the Mizukage is being controlled?”

Kaito met her gaze, his voice firm. “Exactly what I said. He’s under a genjutsu.” He crossed his arms. “And I’ll let you take a wild guess who’s behind it.”

Fugaku’s eyes narrowed. “Danzo.”

Kaito blinked. “Huh? What?!” He stared at Fugaku like he had just grown a second head. “Why would you even think that weakling could control the Mizukage?!”

Fugaku blinked and said, “Because you said the Mizukage was being controlled, i assumed that he was under a genjutsu… and Danzo has Shisui’s Sharingan.”

Kaito blinked. 'Wait… Danzo has Shisui’s Sharingan!' He had completely forgotten about that. 'Which means he has Kotoamatsukami… Shit.'

Shikaku observed Kaito’s expression carefully before calmly stating, “It’s the masked man.”

Kaito sighed but nodded. “Yeah. It’s the masked man.”

Tsunade’s face turned serious. “Are you sure about this? That he’s the one controlling the Mizukage?”

Kaito’s expression hardened, his gaze sharp. “I’d recognize that chakra signature anywhere.”

The room fell into a tense silence, the weight of the conversation sinking in.

Jiraiya was the first to speak, rubbing his chin in deep thought. “This is bad… If the masked man has a genjutsu powerful enough to control a Kage…”

Fugaku crossed his arms, his expression dark. “And he’s using the Mizukage to cause major damage to Kiri… A personal vendetta, perhaps?”

Shikaku rubbed his chin, his gaze sharp. “We don’t even know how long the Mizukage has been under his control. If it’s been years, the level of damage could be worse than we realize.”

Kaito turned to Tsunade. “According to Mei, Yagura’s personality completely changed a year after he became the Fourth Mizukage. That means he’s been under genjutsu for about six years now.”

Jiraiya exhaled, shaking his head. “Six years… That’s long enough to reshape an entire nation.”

Shikaku frowned. “If that’s the case, then Kiri’s instability isn’t just a consequence of poor leadership—it’s deliberate sabotage.”

Tsunade sighed, rubbing her forehead. “We can’t do much about the Mizukage right now without starting a war. All we can do is closely monitor Kiri.”

She then turned to Kaito, her voice tired. “Alright… I’ll allow the Yuki Clan to join Konoha under the conditions you set.” She sighed. “I assume you’ve already thought of a way to get them here without causing a major incident?”

Kaito grinned at her. “Thanks, I knew you’d agree! Tenzo and Kakashi were saying you were heartless and wouldn’t agree to giving asylum to the Yuki Clan—”

Tenzo went pale. “W-We never said that, my lady!” he stammered, then turned to Kaito with a look of betrayal before grabbing him by the head. “HEY! WHY WOULD YOU SAY SOMETHING LIKE THAT?!”

Kaito just laughed, trying to pry Tenzo’s hands off him.

Tsunade sighed and rubbed her temples. “This kid is going to be the death of me…” she muttered under her breath.

Goten Chapter 12

Goten Chapter 12

Author's Note: Hey everyone, sorry for not uploading any new chapters of Goten this past week. To be honest, I'm struggling to move the story forward in a way that makes sense. As for the next chapter of Kaito, I'll be uploading it by the end of tomorrow. Thanks for your patience!

A while later Goten walked into the living room, towel in hand, still drying his hair.

Chi-Chi was already waiting at the dining table, setting out the reheated food. She looked up as Goten entered. "Come, sit," she said.

Moments later, Gohan joined them, and the brothers sat down. Chi-Chi handed them bowls of food, watching as they dug in hungrily.

As they ate, Chi-Chi leaned forward slightly and asked, "So… what happened? How did you both escape from the androids?"

Gohan paused, his grip on his chopsticks tightening slightly. He lowered his gaze. "It was… Goten," he admitted. "He saved us from the androids."

Chi-Chi’s eyes widened, and she looked at Goten in shock.

Goten, swallowing a mouthful of food, casually added, "Yeah, I used a distraction to get Gohan and Videl away, and then I fled."

Then, with a mischievous grin, he threw in, "Oh, and by the way, Videl is Gohan’s new girlfriend."

Gohan was caught completely off guard, choked on his food, coughing violently.

Chi-Chi paused mid-bite, her chopsticks frozen, and shouted, "WHAT?!"

….

The sun hung low in the sky, casting a golden glow over the ocean as gentle waves lapped against the shore of Kame House’s island. Videl stood on the beach, her arms tucked close to her body, eyes shut in deep concentration. She wore a loose white T-shirt over black shorts, her long dark hair neatly tied into two strands that draped over her shoulders.

The sea breeze picked up slightly, ruffling her shirt as she focused. The sand beneath her feet shifted subtly as she began to lift off the ground, her body gradually rising, inch by inch. A feeling of lightness spread through her, the wind tickling her skin as she hovered a few feet above the sand.

Finally, she opened her eyes, glancing around in amazement. A wide smile broke across her face as she exclaimed, “I did it… I finally did it!”

From below, Master Roshi nodded in approval, stroking his beard. “Well done, Videl! You managed to fly! Though…” His expression shifted into a perverted grin. “You really should have worn a skirt for this.”

Oolong, standing beside him, smirked and crossed his arms. “Yeah, that’s a shame.”

Before they could continue, a loud smack echoed through the air. Both Roshi and Oolong went flying into the sand, groaning in pain as Bulma stood over them, her fists clenched and eyes burning with fury.

“You would like that, wouldn’t you?! You old perverts!” Bulma shouted, her voice dripping with disgust.

Videl, still floating, glanced down and let out a small chuckle at the sight of Roshi and Oolong sprawled on the ground, large lumps forming on their heads.

But before she could enjoy her small victory, a sudden gust of wind slammed into her, throwing her off balance. Instinctively, she crossed her arms over her face to shield herself.

Her body wobbled in the air as she struggled to regain control. Looking toward the ocean, she saw the source of the disturbance—Goten and Gohan, locked in an intense battle above the water. Their Kamehameha waves clashed violently, the force sending shockwaves across the sea and kicking up gusts of wind that reached all the way to the island.

“man those two are on a completely different level.” Videl narrowed her eyes, steadying herself in midair. As the massive energy clash began to die down, she hovered in place, watching in awe as the two brothers continued their sparring match in the distance.

Bulma cupped her hands around her mouth and called out, “Videl! You better come down and get some rest!”

Hearing her, Videl sighed and let herself descend gently, landing next to Bulma, Master Roshi, and Oolong. She wiped her forehead with the back of her hand, breathing a little heavier than before. “Man, that was exhausting,” she muttered.

A few feet away, Pilaf and Shu sat at a small wooden table under the shade, each holding a glass of lemonade as they watched Trunks and the others train.

Pilaf took a sip, sighing in satisfaction. “Man, this lemonade is refreshing.”

Shu nodded in agreement, his tail swishing lazily behind him. “Yeah, it’s really good.”

Just then, the sound of a sliding door opening caught their attention. Chi-Chi stepped out of the house, carefully balancing a large bowl of stir-fried meat in one hand and another bowl filled with vegetables in the other. The delicious aroma quickly spread through the air.

“Hey, you two!” Chi-Chi called out, looking toward Pilaf and Shu. “Help me set up the table!”

Both of them straightened up immediately, scrambling out of their seats. “Yes, ma’am!” they said in unison, quickly moving to help arrange the plates and utensils.

Bulma, noticing Chi-Chi carrying over the food, turned her attention to the group still training nearby. She put her hands on her hips and called out, “Trunks! Come take a break!”

Trunks was in the middle of doing push-ups, a massive turtle shell strapped to his back, its weight pressing him into the sand. Sweat dripped from his forehead, but he kept pushing through.

“897… 898… 899… 900!” Trunks counted before finally stopping. He let out a heavy breath, sitting up as the weighted shell thudded onto the ground behind him.

“Huh? Sure thing, Mom,” he said, standing up and stretching his arms.

Mai, who had been watching nearby, walked over and held out a towel. “You okay, Trunks?”

Trunks gave her a small smile and took the towel, wiping the sweat off his face. “Yeah, thanks, Mai.”

Meanwhile, Videl made her way toward Chi-Chi, rolling her shoulders as she walked. “Chi-Chi you Need any help?” she asked.

Chi-Chi smiled at her. “Yeah, can you grab the rest of the food from inside?”

Videl nodded. “Got it,” she said before heading toward the house.

…

High above the ocean, Goten flew backward, twisting and weaving as he dodged a rapid barrage of Ki blasts. Each one whizzed past him, exploding upon impact with the water below. Massive splashes erupted into the air, creating waves that rippled across the ocean’s surface.

Narrowing his eyes, Goten fired a Ki blast of his own toward Gohan.

Gohan didn’t flinch. He flew straight at the attack, raising his forearm and effortlessly deflecting the blast to the side. Without slowing down, he closed the distance and threw a punch at Goten.

Goten dodged it, shifting to the side at the last second. and used the opening, he countered with a swift kick.

Gohan raised his arms in time to block, but the impact still sent him flying backward.

Goten didn’t let up. He shot forward, keeping close behind his brother. Before Gohan could fully regain control, Goten launched a punch straight into his stomach.

“Ugh!” Gohan grunted, his eyes widening as the force knocked the air from his lungs.

Goten followed up with a sharp uppercut, then twisted in midair, spinning around to deliver a powerful kick. The blow sent Gohan hurtling downward.

With a loud splash, Gohan crashed into the ocean, sinking beneath the surface.

For a moment, the water was still.

Then, with a sudden surge, Gohan burst out of the ocean, hovering above the surface. He wiped his chin with the back of his hand and smirked. “You’ve really gotten strong, Goten.”

Goten shook his head. “It’s only because you’re holding back,” he said. His expression turned serious. “Come on, Gohan, don’t hold back. Use Super Saiyan. I want to see how big the gap is between us.”

Gohan hesitated, shaking his head. “It wouldn’t be fair.”

Goten clenched his fists. “Come on, Gohan! I need to push myself. I want to unlock Super Saiyan!” His eyes burned with determination. “You know the androids won’t hold back the next time we meet them, right?”

Gohan let out a sigh, knowing Goten wasn’t going to drop it. “Alright then…”

Taking a deep breath, he clenched his fists and let out a loud, powerful shout. “AHHHH!!” His energy skyrocketed, sending shockwaves rippling through the air. Golden light burst around him as his hair turned bright blonde, his aura crackling with energy.

Gohan looked at Goten, his expression serious. “Don’t say I didn’t warn you.”

Goten grinned, the excitement clear in his eyes. “Bring it on!”

Without another word, Gohan vanished from sight.

BOOM!

Before Goten could react, Gohan’s fist connected with his face, sending him reeling.

….

Down below, the group sat around the table, finishing up the setup while watching the sparring match unfold in the sky.

Videl walked over, carrying the dishes Chi-Chi had asked her to bring. She carefully placed the food on the table before glancing up at Goten and Gohan, who were clashing fiercely above the ocean.

Taking a seat next to Bulma, Videl let out a small whistle. “Those two are really going at it, huh?”

Trunks, sitting nearby, leaned forward, eyes glued to the fight. “Man, Gohan is amazing… Goten doesn’t stand a chance.”

Chi-Chi sighed, clasping her hands together in worry. “I really hope Gohan isn’t being too rough on Goten.”

Master Roshi, stroking his beard, hummed thoughtfully. “Hmm… Goten seems to be trying to push himself to unlock Super Saiyan on his own.”

Oolong, taking a bite of a rice ball, frowned. “if Goten manages to become a Super Saiyan… wouldn’t he and Gohan actually stand a chance against the androids?”

Roshi nodded, his expression serious. “It’s possible… especially at the rate Goten is growing.”

Videl turned to Roshi, a curious expression on her face. “Super Saiyan?” she asked.

Chi-Chi, sitting beside them on the beach, sighed. “It’s the form Gohan is using right now,” she explained. “I just really hope my baby Goten doesn’t get that delinquent hair.”

Bulma sipped her iced tea, watching the fight with an amused smile. “I’m honestly surprised Goten is already this strong. It’s like watching Goku when he was young all over again.”

Chi-Chi shook her head. “Goten is just like his father—he loves to fight. But Gohan… Gohan never liked fighting. He’s only doing it because he has to. He’s carrying the weight of the world on his shoulders.” Her voice softened with sadness. “My poor baby…”

Roshi nodded solemnly. “Gohan has been under so much pressure that he’s lost sight of who he really is.”

Videl glanced at him, her brows furrowed. “What do you mean, Master Roshi?”

Roshi sighed, his voice heavy with emotion. “Like Chi-Chi said, Gohan doesn’t enjoy fighting… but ever since Goku died, he’s been trying so hard to fill his father’s shoes. He’s so focused on being Goku that he’s forgotten how to be himself. That’s why he can’t surpass the androids.”

Videl looked up at Gohan, her expression filled with concern. She muttered under her breath, “Gohan…”

Meanwhile, Trunks clenched his fists as he watched the battle unfold. The gap between him and Goten—and even more so between him and Gohan—was glaringly obvious.

Bulma noticed his frustration and reached over, gently patting his head. “You’re just getting started, Trunks,” she said with a reassuring smile. “You’ll catch up to them soon enough.”

….

Goten was struggling to keep up with Super Saiyan Gohan.

He threw punch after punch, kick after kick, pushing himself as hard as he could. But no matter what he did, Gohan effortlessly dodged each attack, weaving through them with ease.

Then, Gohan suddenly countered. He stepped in and threw a punch straight at Goten.

Goten gritted his teeth, barely managing to block. The force of the punch sent him flying backward.

Before he could recover, Gohan appeared above him. "You're wide open!" he said before bringing his leg down.

BAM!

The kick struck Goten's back, sending him hurtling toward the ocean below.

Water rushed up to meet him at high speed, but at the last second, Goten managed to stop himself just above the surface, his body trembling from exhaustion.

Panting heavily, he looked up at Gohan, determination burning in his eyes. He clenched his fists and rushed back at him, refusing to give up.

Just as they were about to clash again, Chi-Chi’s voice rang out from below.

“Gohan! Goten! Come take a break and eat your lunch!”

Gohan let out a breath and powered down, his golden aura fading. "Hey, how about we take a break?" he suggested.

Goten exhaled sharply, clearly frustrated. “Yeah, sure…”

As he flew toward the beach, irritation gnawed at him. Why can’t I unlock Super Saiyan yet?

In Dragon Ball Z, the original Goten had unlocked Super Saiyan effortlessly while sparring with Chi-Chi—even before he could fly. And Goten was certain that right now, he was stronger than the original Goten had been at that age.

So what am I doing wrong? he thought, his fists clenching slightly.

Gohan landed beside him and stretched. “Man, I’m starving.”

Chi-Chi smiled, waving them over. “Well, come on, I made lunch for everyone.”

Goten sat down next to his mother as she handed him a steaming bowl of rice. “Here you go, Goten. Eat up! You need your strength if you want to keep training.”

Goten took the bowl and gave a small smile. “Thanks, Mom.”

Everyone else gathered around, joining in as they said, “Thank you for the food,” before digging in.

Videl took a bite and hummed in satisfaction. “Chi-Chi, this is really delicious, you have to share your recipe”

Gohan nodded in agreement. “Yeah, Mom, you really outdid yourself today.”

Chi-Chi beamed at the compliments. “I’m glad you all like it! sure I’ll give it to you later.”

Goten, however, ate silently, barely paying attention to the conversation.

As they ate, the conversation naturally shifted between different topics.

Videl, sitting next to Gohan, turned to him with a curious expression. “Hey, Gohan… do you think I could become a Super Saiyan too?”

Gohan paused mid-bite, blinking in confusion. “Huh?”

Videl repeated, “I asked if I could also become a Super Saiyan like you.”

Gohan scratched the back of his head, looking a little unsure of how to answer. “Well, you see—”

Before he could finish, Goten chimed in. “You can’t.”

Videl frowned, confused. “Huh? Why not?”

Goten looked at her like it was obvious. “Because you’re not a Saiyan… or even half-Saiyan, like me and Gohan.”

Videl raised an eyebrow. “A Saiyan? What’s that?”

Goten swallowed his bite of food before answering. “It’s an alien race. My dad and Trunks’ dad—Vegeta—they’re both aliens.”

Videl’s eyes widened in shock. “Wait… what?! Aliens?!”

Bulma chuckled, sipping her iced tea. “It’s been a while since we’ve talked about this kind of stuff.”

Chi-Chi nodded thoughtfully. “Hmm, yeah… the last time we were all together like this was before you guys went off to space.”

Videl nearly choked on her food. “Wait—you’ve been to space?!”

Bulma nodded casually. “Yep. Me, Gohan, and another friend of ours went to Planet Namek.”

Goten’s ears perked up. This is the perfect chance to ask about the Dragon Balls… he thought.

Looking at Gohan, he asked, “Planet Namek? Why did you go there?”

Gohan sighed, setting down his chopsticks. “We were looking for the Dragon Balls.”

Videl, still trying to wrap her head around everything, asked, “Dragon Balls?”

Bulma leaned back and explained, “They’re magical wishing orbs that can grant any wish. We used to have them on Earth, but they were deactivated when the Guardian of Earth died.”

Videl crossed her arms, giving Gohan a skeptical look. “You have to be kidding me, right?”

Gohan shook his head. “It’s real. The Dragon Balls can grant almost any wish.”

Trunks, who had been listening intently, suddenly perked up. “Then why don’t we just go to Planet Namek and wish for a way to defeat the androids?”

Gohan sighed, setting down his bowl. “It’s not that simple. Planet Namek was destroyed when we were there. Frieza managed to blow it up, even after Dad defeated him. Before that happened, everyone on Namek was wished to Earth for safety. Later, they used the Dragon Balls to wish for a new planet, but it’s somewhere far away, and they relocated.”

Bulma leaned back and crossed her arms. “I’ve tried searching for New Namek, but it’s beyond our sector of the universe. It’s completely out of our reach.”

Goten let out a small sigh, pretending to be frustrated. “If only there was a way to go back in time and use the Dragon Balls to stop the androids…” He said the words casually, but inside, he was watching carefully for Bulma’s reaction.

Bulma froze.

She turned her head sharply toward Goten, narrowing her eyes slightly as if processing what he just said. Then, without a word, she grabbed a notepad and started scribbling furiously, numbers and equations filling the page.

Chi-Chi tilted her head, watching Bulma work. “Bulma? What in the world are you doing now?”

Bulma didn’t look up, her voice filled with excitement. “Time travel.”

Videl nearly choked on her food. “Wait—what?!”

Bulma continued writing, flipping pages as she went. “I think it might be possible. We already have the technology to build spaceships, gravity machines, and all sorts of advanced tech. If I adjust some of the theories I’ve been working on… yes, this could work.”

Videl stared at her, wide-eyed. “Time travel? Seriously? That’s even crazier than magical Dragon Balls.”

Gohan leaned forward, clearly interested but hesitant. “You really think it can be done, Bulma?”

Bulma finally paused her note-taking and looked up, pushing her pen against her chin in thought. “I won’t promise anything,” she admitted. “But if we could create a machine that can move across timelines, it might be our best shot. We’d have to be extremely careful… but it could change everything.”

Trunks stared at his mother, awe evident in his eyes. “That’s incredible, Mom.”

Goten gave a small, knowing smile, trying to look just as amazed as everyone else. But inside, excitement bubbled within him.

This is it, he thought. Bulma’s going to build the time machine. If we do this right, we might actually be able to fix everything.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 41

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 41

He kept his expression neutral. He didn’t want her storming off to Dumbledore demanding answers. If his theory was right, the old man had likely placed some kind of mild compulsion charm on student so they wouldn’t talk about certain things with their parents. It would explain why no parents seemed to know about the troll on Halloween.

Before Augusta could press further, Neville smoothly changed the subject.

"Hey, Gran, do you think Harry could stay over for the summer?" he asked casually. "His relatives aren’t exactly kind to him."

Augusta pursed her lips thoughtfully but didn’t interrupt, so Neville continued. "Oh, and by the way, would it be alright if Hermione visited as well? Maybe even her parents? It’d be nice for her to show them what she’s learned so far—especially with the Trace not working inside the manor."

Augusta took a moment, finishing her bite before nodding. "Hmm, I don’t see why not. Mr. Potter is welcome to stay if he’d like. It would be nice to have more people around the manor." She took another sip of her tea before adding, "As for Miss Granger, she’s welcome as well, and her parents too. Just let me know before inviting them over."

Neville grinned. "Thanks, Gran. I’ll send them a letter soon."

….

Morning sunlight streamed over Longbottom Manor, nestled in Birsay on the Orkney Islands. The estate basked in the golden glow, the vast greenery stretching as far as the eye could see.

Neville made his way down the staircase, adjusting the cuffs of his white shirt. He wore long black trousers and a brown sweater vest, his hair neatly swept up. He was heading to the dining room, his stomach already grumbling in anticipation of breakfast.

As he stepped inside, he spotted his grandmother sitting at the table, her sharp eyes scanning the morning paper as she sipped her tea.

"Good morning, Gran," Neville greeted cheerfully as he took a seat beside her.

Augusta looked up from the newspaper and gave him a nod. "Morning, Neville. I see you’re all dressed for the day," she remarked, setting the paper down. Her gaze flickered over him. "I take it you’re done with your workout. Are you planning on trying out for your house Quidditch team this year? Is that why you’ve been training so diligently?"

Neville reached for a plate, grabbing a few pancakes and drenching them in syrup before shaking his head. "Nope," he replied, taking a bite.

Augusta raised an eyebrow. "No?"

Neville snorted. "Quidditch?" He swallowed his bite before continuing, "I find the whole sport dumb."

Augusta folded her newspaper, placing it neatly on the table as she gave him a skeptical look. "You don’t like Quidditch? I’m surprised—it’s usually quite popular with kids your age. Your father, Frank, was fanatic about the sport. He trained hard and made it onto the Gryffindor team in his third year."

Neville shrugged, taking another bite before explaining, "I just find Quidditch poorly balanced. It relies way too much on the Seeker, which makes the rest of the game basically pointless."

Augusta took another sip of her tea, nodding slowly as she considered his words. "Hmm… I suppose when you put it like that, it is heavily biased toward the Seeker position."

Neville glanced at the clock hanging on the wall. His eyes widened slightly. "It’s already ten!" he said, sitting up straighter. "We’ve got to hurry if we want to pick up Harry on time!" He started shoveling his food down, eager to finish quickly.

"Slow down, Neville," Augusta admonished, raising an eyebrow. "You’ll choke on your food at this rate. We still have time before it turns eleven."

She set her teacup down and asked, "Has your friend, Mr. Potter, replied to the letter you sent him?"

Neville swallowed a mouthful of pancakes before shaking his head. "No, he hasn’t replied to my letter. Actually, he hasn’t replied to any of the letters my friends have sent him either."

Augusta frowned slightly. "That’s concerning. Could his relatives be blocking his mail?" she mused. "If that’s the case, he’ll be quite surprised when we show up unannounced."

Neville already knew the real reason—Dobby had been interfering, making sure Harry didn’t receive any of his letters.

Shaking his head, Neville set down his fork on his now-empty plate. "I already told Harry I’d be coming in a week to pick him up if you gave permission for him to stay."

Augusta nodded, glancing at the clock. "Well, we should get going then. Have you got everything you need?"

Neville stood up. "Yes, ma’am," he answered as they made their way to the drawing room.

Reaching the room, Augusta turned to him. "Where did you say Mr. Potter stays?"

Neville pulled out the piece of parchment where Harry had written his address. "4 Privet Drive, Little Whinging, Surrey."

Augusta nodded. "Surrey, hmm… Since I’ve been there before, it’ll be easier if we take a taxi from the Leaky Cauldron to his place." She grabbed her coat and picked up an umbrella.

Walking over to the fireplace, she reached for a handful of Floo Powder before turning to Neville. "You remember how to use the Floo?"

Neville nodded and grabbed some powder for himself.

"Right then," Augusta said, stepping aside. "Go to Diagon Alley."

Neville stepped into the fireplace, took a deep breath, and threw down the Floo Powder. "Diagon Alley!" he called out as emerald flames roared up around him, swallowing him whole.

…

Neville appeared in the Floo station of Diagon Alley, stepping out of the fireplace and brushing off the stray soot from his clothes. A moment later, Augusta emerged from the Floo next to him, as composed as ever.

"Come on, Neville," she called, ushering him forward.

Neville followed as Augusta led him out of the alley and into the bustling streets of Diagon Alley. The morning rush was in full swing, with witches and wizards moving about, shopping and chatting, while owls hooted from their perches outside Eeylops Owl Emporium.

Augusta glanced at Neville. "Is there anything you want to get while we’re passing through?"

Neville shook his head. "No, Gran, I’m fine."

She nodded. "Well then, we should make haste." Without wasting any time, she began walking toward the Leaky Cauldron.

Neville followed behind her, taking in the sights around him. This was only his second time here, and the first time, he barely had the chance to explore—mostly because it had taken forever to find a wand that actually worked for him.

As they reached a familiar brick wall at the end of the alley, Augusta stopped and turned to him. "Make sure to remember this, Neville," she instructed.

He watched as she took out her wand and tapped a specific brick—three up, two across—three times. The wall shifted and folded inward, revealing the entrance to a dimly lit pub.

As they stepped inside, Augusta continued, "If you ever need to return, just tap the wall in the same pattern."

Neville nodded, storing the information away. As he followed his grandmother through the pub, he glanced around, taking in the worn-down interior. When was the last time they renovated this place? he wondered, eyeing the cracked wooden tables and the dim lighting.

The magical world, he was starting to realize, seemed stuck in the late 1800s or early 1900s. Everything from the furniture to the clothing styles felt like they hadn’t changed in over a century. Maybe even longer.

They made their way past the pub’s patrons and toward the exit.

Stepping out of the Leaky Cauldron, Neville blinked as they emerged onto Charing Cross Road, smack dab in the middle of London.

"Welcome to the Muggle side of London, Neville," Augusta said, watching his reaction. "So, what do you think?"

Neville’s first thought came out instantly. "Noisy," he muttered, wincing slightly at the sudden shift in atmosphere. The honking cars, the chatter of pedestrians, the occasional blare of music from passing shops—it was loud.

After spending an entire year in a castle, he had almost forgotten how busy the normal world was.

Augusta chuckled. "That’s one way to put it. Well, we should catch a cab."

She led him over to the curb, where they hailed a taxi.

As soon as they got in, the driver glanced at them through the rearview mirror. "Where to?"

Neville straightened up and replied, "4 Privet Drive, Little Whinging, Surrey."

The driver nodded, pulled into traffic, and began the journey.

Neville gave the driver the address. "4 Privet Drive, Little Whinging, Surrey."

The driver nodded and pulled into traffic, starting the journey.

It had been a week since the end of his first year at Hogwarts, and Neville had returned home for the summer.

The past week had been busy. Most of his time was spent studying and researching potential ways to treat his parents, though progress was slow. He had also been practicing his spellcasting with Augusta, refining his control and expanding his repertoire.

Speaking of Augusta, she had taken it upon herself to hire tutors for him—lessons in wizarding etiquette and formal dancing, subjects she deemed essential for the heir of a noble house. The lessons weren’t too demanding, taking place only every other day for two hours, with each subject being taught once a week.

Outside of his studies, Neville had also been working on a training schedule for himself, Harry, and Hermione once they arrived. In Harry’s case, he’d be staying for the summer, so Neville wanted to make sure they made good use of their time.

But beyond just training, Neville had been thinking about the bigger picture.

Dumbledore’s influence in the magical world was something that needed to be undermined.

He remembered how, with the help of the Daily Prophet, Fudge had successfully stripped Dumbledore of much of his power and credibility in the Order of the Phoenix timeline. That gave Neville an idea—a new newspaper. A publication that wasn’t controlled by the Ministry or dictated by the whims of powerful figures like Dumbledore.

There was just one problem.

He couldn’t run it.

At least, not yet.

He was too young to legally start a business, and he didn’t have access to the necessary funds. Sure, the Longbottoms were wealthy, but as a minor, he needed supervision over any major financial decisions. Augusta, as his legal guardian, controlled the family accounts until he turned seventeen. Right now, he could only access his trust vault, which had enough for school expenses but nowhere near enough to fund a newspaper company.

When he had asked Augusta for her thoughts on starting a newspaper, she had actually approved of the idea, acknowledging that an independent news source could be very useful. However, she had also made it clear that she wasn’t interested in dealing with the headache of starting a company from scratch—research, hiring, managing—she was already overwhelmed with overseeing the existing Longbottom businesses.

Her advice?

"If you still want to do it when you’re old enough, go for it. But for now, focus on your studies."

Neville hadn’t pushed further. He understood—she was tired, stretched thin with her responsibilities.

So, for now, he would focus on training, studying, and setting the foundation for what he wanted to do.

…

After an hour-long drive, the taxi pulled into a quiet neighborhood lined with identical houses.

They stopped in front of Number 4, Privet Drive, a pristine, overly neat home that looked as unwelcoming as it felt.

Neville and Augusta stepped out of the taxi, and Augusta paid the driver while Neville walked up to the front door and knocked firmly.

They waited.

A moment later, Augusta joined him at the doorstep just as the door swung open, revealing a very surprised Harry Potter.

"Neville? Lady Longbottom?" Harry blinked in shock, glancing between them.

Neville grinned. "Hey, Harry. You all packed?"

Harry nodded, but before he could say anything else, a loud, irritated voice bellowed from inside the house.

"Boy! Who’s at the door?"

Harry winced, turning his head toward the hallway. "It’s my friend!" he called back hesitantly.

Heavy footsteps pounded toward them, and a moment later, Vernon Dursley appeared, his face already turning a shade of puce. He eyed Augusta and Neville with barely concealed disdain before his lips curled into a smug sneer.

"So you lot are here to take the boy off our hands for the rest of the summer?" Vernon barked. "No take-backs. We won’t be dealing with him again until school starts!"

Augusta bristled at his crude tone but kept her composure. "Yes," she said coolly, "as you so eloquently put it, we are here to take Mr. Potter off your hands for the summer."

Vernon grunted, clearly pleased with himself. "You heard her, boy! Get your things and leave."

Harry didn’t need to be told twice. "Right, sir," he muttered before bolting up the stairs.

Vernon turned back to them. "Wait here. I don’t want your kind inside my house," he said with a glare.

Augusta’s lips curled in distaste, but her voice was laced with mock politeness. "We wouldn’t dream of stepping inside such a small home," she said dryly.

Vernon’s face darkened, but he merely grumbled under his breath and stepped back inside.

Neville thought to himself, I knew Vernon was unpleasant in the movies, but this is just outright hostility.

A short while later, Harry hurried back down the stairs, his trunk in one hand and Hedwig’s cage in the other.

Neville stepped forward and took the cage from him. "Here, let me carry this," he offered.

"Thanks," Harry said gratefully.

The moment Harry was outside, Vernon slammed the door shut. Augusta pursed her lips in disapproval. “That man is insufferable,” she muttered. “In all my years, I’ve never met a ruder Muggle.”

They headed down the path, Harry apologizing. “I’m sorry about my uncle. He hates anything to do with magic.”

"It’s not your fault, dear," Augusta reassured him. Then, with a rare softness in her voice, she added, "And you are welcome in our home every summer."

Harry looked up at her, a little stunned.

"Thank you," he said sincerely.

Neville lifted Hedwig’s cage door and let her out.

“Go on to Longbottom Manor in Birsay, Hedwig,” Neville said, giving her a gentle nudge. The snowy owl hooted and flew off, disappearing into the morning sky.

Harry frowned. “So, how do we get there? Train? A bus?”

Augusta glanced at him. "We’ll be Apparating," she explained. "We just need to find a quiet, secluded spot so no Muggles see us."

Harry still looked confused, so Neville clarified, "It’s basically teleporting."

Harry blinked. "Oh… right." He hesitated before adding, "There’s a playground nearby. It’s usually empty around this time."

"That’ll do," Augusta said, and they set off toward the playground.

As they walked, Neville glanced at Harry and asked, "By the way, why did you look so surprised when Gran and I showed up? I did tell you I’d come in a week."

Harry hesitated before shrugging. "I didn’t think you’d actually come. You said you’d send a letter before coming."

Now Neville understood. So that’s why. Feigning ignorance, he frowned. "Huh? I did send you a letter. You didn’t get it?"

Harry shook his head. "No. I haven’t gotten any mail."

Augusta frowned. "That’s odd. The owls came back empty. Even if there was a mail-redirection ward, the letters should have returned to the sender."

Harry shot Neville a knowing look, silently mouthing Dumbledore.

Neville simply shrugged in response, playing along.

They soon reached the playground and found a spot near a large tree.

Augusta turned to them and held out her hands. "Grab onto my arm and don’t let go," she instructed. "The first time is uncomfortable, but as long as you hold on, you’ll be fine."

Neville grinned mischievously at Harry. "You’re totally gonna love traveling this way. Trust me," he said with a shit-eating grin as he grabbed Augusta’s outstretched arm.

Harry, looking wary, grabbed her other hand.

With a loud crack, they vanished from the playground.

…

They appeared with another crack in front of the gates of Longbottom Manor.

Neville had long since gotten used to the sensation of Apparition, but Harry—not so much. He was sprawled on the ground, looking like the world had just spun out from under him.

Neville walked over, grinning as he reached down to help him up. "You okay, mate?" he asked, barely holding back laughter. "Told you you’d love it."

Harry groaned, one hand clutching his stomach as he looked miserable, like he might hurl.

Augusta, already walking toward the gates, glanced back. "That’s how it is the first time. You’ll get used to it," she said smoothly. "I remember Neville being in the exact same condition the first time we Apparated."

Harry took a few deep breaths, slowly regaining his composure before grabbing the handle of his trunk and pulling it along.

As Augusta pushed open the gates, she turned back to him. "Welcome to Longbottom Manor, Mr. Potter."

Harry looked up—and his jaw dropped.

The manor was massive.

"It’s huge," he muttered, staring in awe.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 160

Kaito Akaden Chapter 160

Tenzo frowned. “You think something might’ve happened to him?”

Kaito rubbed his chin in thought. Could Kakashi have run into trouble? He dismissed the thought of Obito being involved. No… if it were him, he wouldn’t go after Kakashi.

After a brief pause, Kaito looked at Tenzo. “I don’t know. But I’m going to check on him. The seal I gave him has my Hiraishin marker on it.”

Tenzo’s expression hardened. “Then I’m coming with you. If Kakashi-sempai is in trouble, I have to help.”

Kaito sighed. “Alright.”

Before they could leave, Hotaru stepped forward. “I’m coming with you, Kai-kun.”

Kaito shook his head. “No, Hotaru. You stay here with them. I need you to keep watch until I get back. Please.”

Hotaru hesitated for a moment before nodding. “Fine… but keep your communication channel open.”

Kaito smirked. “Yeah, yeah, sure.” Then, turning to Tenzo, he asked, “You ready to go?”

Tenzo nodded firmly.

With a final glance at Hotaru, Kaito placed a hand on Tenzo’s shoulder. Closing his eyes, he focused on Kakashi’s Hiraishin marker—then, in a blink, they vanished.

…

Kaito and Tenzo teleported into an inn room—only to freeze at the scene in front of them.

Tenzo openly gaped, completely caught off guard.

Kaito’s eyes widened, his mouth slightly open as a single thought ran through his mind: Wait… what?

Before them, Kakashi—disguised as Sukea—was hovering over a woman with long black hair, his hand gently caressing her face. Their lips were locked in a deep kiss, the woman lying beneath him.

Kaa-san has been trying to set this guy up with dates for years, and he didn’t even entertain them! Kaito thought, stunned. I was starting to think he was gay! But now he's making out with this woman?

The two immediately broke apart the moment they sensed the presence behind them.

Kakashi sprang to his feet, grabbing a kunai and pointing it toward Kaito and Tenzo, his posture tense.

The woman, equally startled, leaped up, swiftly forming a series of hand signs. The moisture in the air condensed into ice, forming deadly spears that she launched at them.

Kaito’s instincts flared. His chakra chains shot out from his back, shattering the ice projectiles before they could even get close to him or Tenzo.

That’s Hyoton… Kaito thought, his gaze sharpening as he studied the woman now standing beside Kakashi. His eyes narrowed as he took in her features. She looks a lot like the Yuki Clan members I rescued…

Tenzo, finally snapping out of his shock, shifted into a defensive stance.

Kakashi, still gripping his kunai, stared at them in confusion. “Kaito? Tenzo?” His voice carried a mix of surprise and wariness as he lowered his weapon slightly.

The woman, already running through another set of hand signs, hesitated when she noticed Kakashi’s reaction. Her eyes narrowed at him. “You know them, Kakashi-kun?” she asked, her guard still up.

“Yes,” Kakashi nodded, his expression still confused. “What are you two doing here?”

Kaito’s eyes gleamed with interest. Huh… she called him Kakashi-kun. That’s interesting. She knows his real identity.

Smirking slightly, Kaito crossed his arms and retracted his chakra chains. “You weren’t answering your seal, so we came to see if you needed help,” he said, his tone teasing. “But it seems like you have everything covered, eh, Kakashi?”

Kakashi spluttered, quickly raising his hands. “This isn’t what it looks like, guys!”

Tenzo smirked, clearly enjoying the situation. “From what we see, it seems exactly like what it looks like, sempai.”

Kakashi opened his mouth, struggling for words. “That… what… I—”

Ignoring the exchange, Kaito shifted his gaze to the woman. “You’re from the Yuki Clan, aren’t you?”

Kahyo stiffened at the question, her wariness evident.

Kakashi sighed, lowering his kunai. “Yeah… her name is Kahyo Yuki.”

Kaito nodded. “Nice to meet you, Kahyo-san. I’m Kaito Uzumaki, and this is Tenzo. We’re friends of Kakashi.”

Kahyo remained cautious but slowly lowered her stance, though her eyes still held a trace of suspicion.

Taking the chance to change the subject, Kakashi cleared his throat. “So… what are you both doing here? Especially you, Tenzo. Weren’t you supposed to be back in the village?”

Tenzo’s teasing expression faded, replaced with seriousness. “Yeah… about that. Things got serious. And when you weren’t answering your seal, we thought you might be in trouble, so we came looking for you.”

Kakashi’s demeanor immediately shifted, his posture straightening. “What happened?”

Before Tenzo could respond, Kaito interjected. “Before we answer that… what’s her status?” He gestured toward Kahyo.

Kakashi understood what Kaito meant and gave a firm nod. “She’s with me. She defected from Kiri. When we met, she was fighting off Hunter-nin. She was injured, and after I helped her, she decided to travel with me for a while.”

Tenzo eyed Kahyo skeptically. “Why did you defect from Kiri?”

Kahyo lowered her head, her expression darkening. “I lost my brother because of that village.” Her voice was quiet but steady. “He was injured during a mission and brought back to Kiri… but they refused to treat his wounds. The higher-class shinobi were always the priority. By the time they even considered helping him, it was too late.”

She clenched her fists. “Before he died… he told me to leave. To go somewhere peaceful. Somewhere far away from that village and live a happy life.” She exhaled before glancing at Kakashi with a slight blush. “I met Kakashi-kun. He saved me… and let me travel with him while I figured out where to go.”

Kaito silently observed her as she spoke, activating his Mind’s Eye of Kagura.

She wasn’t lying.

Everything she said was the truth.

Kaito placed a privacy seal on the ground, activating it before turning back to Kahyo and Kakashi.

He nodded. “I’m sorry to hear that, Kahyo-san… but in a way, it’s a good thing you defected when you did. Because even if you were still part of Kiri, I doubt you’d be able to return.”

Kakashi and Kahyo’s expressions hardened. Kakashi narrowed his visible eye. “Why is that?”

Kaito exhaled. “Because the Mizukage issued an order to wipe out the Yuki, Terumi, and Hozuki clans.”

Both Kakashi and Kahyo’s eyes widened in shock.

Kakashi took a step forward. “Wait… what?”

Kaito nodded grimly. “It all started when the Kaguya Clan launched a surprise coup d’état against the Hidden Mist. The Mizukage ordered their complete extermination. But after that, he held a meeting and revoked all clan privileges.”

His expression darkened. “The Yuki, Terumi, and Hozuki clans had enough of the Fourth Mizukage, so they banded together and attempted an assassination. But… it failed miserably.” He looked at them, his voice steady. “He expected them to make a move. This was all part of his plan—a way to get rid of anyone who opposed him under the guise of punishing ‘traitors.’”

Kaito clenched his fists. “I was too late to save the Kaguya Clan. Women, children—people who weren’t even involved—were slaughtered.” His voice was tight with frustration.

He turned to Kahyo, his expression resolute. “I couldn’t just stand by and watch him do the same thing again, ya know? So I took them. All of the clans’ non-shinobi members. Got them to a safe place. As for the rest… anyone who took part in the coup is probably dead.”

Kakashi rubbed his face and let out a sigh. “You not only infiltrated Kiri Even after I told you not to? but you interfered with another village’s affairs?”

Kaito scratched the back of his head, grinning slightly. “Hey, where else would you get intel on a village if not inside the village?” He shrugged. “And I couldn’t just let kids be killed, ya know?”

Kahyo’s lips parted slightly in shock. “You… saved my clan?” she swallowed, clearly emotional but keeping her composure. “Where… where are the survivors?”

Kaito explained, “The Terumi and Hozuki had jonin with them, so I left them on an island with protection seals to keep Yagura from finding them.” He then grinned sheepishly, glancing at Tenzo. “That’s also why Tenzo is here. I, uh… needed his help to, you know… build houses.”

Tenzo snorted, crossing his arms. “Yeah, yeah. You owe me for that, Kaito.”

Kaito rubbed the back of his head. “As for the Yuki Clan… I took them to the Land of Tea. I’m planning on bringing them to Konoha since most of them are civilians. The reason I didn’t leave them with the other two clans is because, well… the Yuki Clan was never really treated well by them in the first place.”

Kakashi raised a skeptical brow but remained silent, letting Kaito continue.

“If I left the civilians and kids with the Terumi and Hozuki, I doubt they’d treat them fairly or even protect them. The Yuki Clan has always been treated as lesser for generations. I don’t think that would suddenly change—especially now that they have no shinobi left to contribute.”

Kakashi exhaled. “And you convinced them to join Konoha just like that?”

Kaito let out a nervous chuckle, scratching his head. “Yeah… about that. They’re, uh… still asleep.”

Kakashi narrowed his visible eye. “What do you mean, asleep?”

“I put them under a genjutsu,” Kaito admitted. “It made transporting them easier. I haven’t actually talked to them yet.”

Kaito suddenly perking up as an idea struck him. Smacking his fist into his palm, he turned to Kahyo. “Hey! Since you don’t have a place to go, why don’t you come back with us to Konoha? You can help convince the others to live there! I’ll talk to the Hokage and get you and the rest of the Yuki Clan asylum.”

Kahyo’s expression remained unreadable as she listened.

Kaito continued, “I am the son of the Fourth Hokage. I promise you’ll all be treated fairly. And even if you don’t want to become a shinobi of the Leaf, that’s totally fine, ya know.”

Tenzo groaned, running a hand down his face. “Kaito, you can’t just go making decisions on your own like this.”

Kakashi let out a long sigh, rubbing his temple. Of course Kaito would pull something like this—he should have seen it coming the moment Kaito mentioned rescuing civilians.

Ignoring Kakashi’s reaction, Kaito smirked at Kahyo, his tone turning playful. “And besides, you’ll get to stay close to Kakashi. He needs someone to keep him from getting too depressed, ya know?” He threw a wink at Kakashi.

Kahyo’s face turned red, and she went silent for a moment. After a brief pause, she finally spoke. “Then… I agree. But only if we’re treated fairly.” She met Kaito’s gaze, her voice firm.

Kakashi looked at her, slightly surprised, but then nodded in understanding.

Kaito clapped his hands together. “That’s great!”

But while Kaito celebrated, Kakashi’s expression remained serious. He folded his arms, deep in thought. “Still… something doesn’t add up, Kaito,” he muttered. “Why would the Mizukage intentionally weaken his own village?”

Kaito looked at Kakashi seriously. “That’s because the Mizukage isn’t himself. He’s being controlled by a genjutsu. I’ll let you guess who’s behind it.”

Kahyo’s eyes widened in shock. The idea that someone as powerful as the Mizukage could be under a genjutsu was almost unbelievable.

Kakashi narrowed his eyes. “O…” He stopped himself before finishing the name, then instead asked, “The masked man?”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah.”

Kahyo frowned. “Who is this masked man?”

Tenzo stepped in. “He’s the mastermind behind the Nine-Tails attack on Konoha eight years ago. Wears an orange mask. We don’t know much about him—his real identity is a mystery. But what we do know is that he’s dangerous. Almost impossible to land a hit on. And now, we also know he’s controlling the Mizukage.”

Kaito turned to Kakashi, his expression serious. “He needs to be put down.”

Kakashi clenched his fists and nodded.

Kahyo glanced at him, concern flickering in her expression at his reaction.

Kaito exhaled. “Right. We’d better leave the Land of Water before he realizes we’re here.”

Kakashi nodded. “Right.” He immediately started packing his things.

Kahyo followed suit. “Hai,” she said, helping Kakashi gather his belongings.

A while later, with everything packed, Kahyo turned to Kaito. “So… how exactly are we leaving the Land of Water? If what you said is true, then the country might already be under lockdown.”

Kaito smirked and held out his hand. “The same way we got here.”

Kakashi didn’t hesitate, grabbing on. So did Tenzo.

Kahyo stared at them as if they were crazy.

Kakashi gave her an eye-smile. “Trust us. There’s no faster way to travel.” He extended his other hand to her.

Kahyo still looked skeptical but sighed and grabbed Kakashi’s and Tenzo’s hands.

“Just hold on, and don’t let go,” Kaito instructed.

Kahyo opened her mouth to ask what he meant by that—

But before she could—

Kaito activated Hiraishin, teleporting them out of the room.

…

They all arrived in a snow-covered clearing, a large wooden house standing in the center.

Kahyo stumbled from the sudden shift, still disoriented. Before she could fall, Kakashi caught her, steadying her with a firm grip.

Kaito, standing beside them, smirked. “Smooth, Kakashi.”

Tenzo snickered. “Fastest I’ve seen him move.”

Kakashi sighed, already bracing for the inevitable teasing.

Kaito grinned mischievously. “Wait till Mom hears about this.”

Kakashi groaned, rubbing his temple. “Just… let me live, Kaito.”

Meanwhile, Kahyo looked around in astonishment before turning to Kaito. “That was… space-time ninjutsu. Was that the Hiraishin?”

Kaito nodded. “Yep.” Without missing a beat, he walked over to the house, slid open the door, and stepped inside.

Authors note: Kahyo is the same character from Kakashi Hiden: Lightning in the Icy Sky novel but with a modified backstory. She's 19 years old, and her brother, Rahyo, is dead. She will be Kakashi’s love interest in this story.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 40

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 40

Author's note: I'm changing the fanfic's title from "A Neville SI" to "Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert." Also, I'll be uploading two chapters tomorrow—one for Kaito and one for Goten. I've been busy and haven't kept up with the schedule, but rest assured, I'll be posting all of this week's chapters soon.

Neville nodded. "Yeah. And worse—it’s perfectly legal to use." He shook his head in disgust. "I don’t think the magical world has common sense at all. It’s basically like using the Imperius Curse on someone, but somehow, it's considered acceptable."

Hermione’s face twisted in revulsion, but before she could say anything else, there was a knock on the compartment door.

She jumped slightly, startled by the sudden noise.

Neville sighed. "I really need to learn how to cast a Notice-Me-Not charm."

The knocking grew more persistent. Neville stood up but turned back to Harry before opening the door.

"Whatever you do, don’t go to the Weasleys," Neville warned, his voice low and serious. "We don’t know if they’re involved with Dumbledore. Just wait for me—I’ll try to come get you within a week."

Harry’s expression hardened with determination. "Got it."

With a final nod, Neville undid the Muffliato and the locking charm, then swung the door open, looking mildly annoyed. "What?"

Seamus and Dean stood there, looking a bit sheepish.

"Hey, mate," Seamus said with a grin. "We were wondering if you guys wanted to join us for a game of Gobstones."

Neville glanced over his shoulder at Harry and Hermione before nodding. "Yeah, sure. But we’ve got to wake Ron up first."

Seamus groaned. "Ah, that’s gonna take a while."

….

By the time the train reached King’s Cross, it was already evening—around 6 PM.

Neville, Harry, Ron, and Hermione parted ways with the other Gryffindors as they gathered their things.

"See you guys in two months," Neville said, giving a nod to Seamus, Dean, Lavender, Parvati, and Fay Dunbar.

"Yeah, see you next term, mate," Seamus replied with a grin.

"Goodbye, guys," Parvati added, waving.

Fay gave Hermione a quick hug. "See you soon, Hermione."

Hermione smiled and waved back. "See you guys!"

As their friends left the compartment, Hermione brushed off her skirt and cleared her throat. "We should hurry before the platform gets too crowded," she said hastily, eager to escape the awkward atmosphere lingering between them and Ron.

Neville stretched as he got up. "Yeah… we might already be too late for that," he remarked, glancing towards the window at the bustling platform outside.

As Hermione reached for her bag, Neville gestured toward her pocket. "Aren’t you forgetting something?" he teased. "You don’t want to be stuck all summer without your books."

Hermione blinked before realization hit. "Oh! Right—I almost forgot about that." She quickly pulled out her shrunken trunk and gave Neville a grateful smile. "Thanks for reminding me."

Neville smirked. "No problem."

Meanwhile, Harry and Hermione tried to act normal around Ron, but their interactions still felt awkward and strained. Ron, who had just woken up groggy and confused, wasn’t exactly helping the situation.

Hermione took out her wand and tapped her trunk. "Engorgio," she muttered, and the trunk expanded back to its full size.

Ron frowned slightly, still not entirely used to seeing people shrink and unshrink their trunks so casually. He muttered something under his breath but said nothing.

"Here, let me help you," Neville offered, grabbing one side of Hermione’s trunk and lifting it with ease.

"Thanks," Hermione said, giving him a small smile as they stepped out of the compartment, making their way onto the busy platform.

As they stepped off the train and onto the platform, they were met with the bustling noise of King’s Cross Station. The air was filled with the sounds of chatter, rolling luggage, and the distant whistles of other trains arriving and departing.

A wizened old guard stood by the ticket barrier, letting students pass through in twos and threes to avoid alarming the Muggles by having a large group suddenly appear out of a solid wall.

"You lot have to come and stay this summer," Ron said eagerly. "All three of you. I’ll send you an owl!"

Harry shifted uncomfortably. "Uh… thanks, Ron, but I’ll have to ask the Dursleys first. Not sure they’d go for it. I’ll let you know if they allow it."

Hermione gave an awkward laugh. "Yeah, I don’t know, Ron… I’m not sure when I’ll be back from France."

neville shook his head and said “no thank mate ill be busy all summer“

Ron frowned slightly, confused at their hesitant responses.

Before he could say anything, his face lit up. "There they are! Mum, look—there he is!"

Following his gaze, they spotted the Weasleys waiting nearby.

Ginny, Ron’s younger sister, was practically bouncing on her toes, eyes wide with excitement. "Look, Mum! I can see him! That’s Harry Potter!"

Neville noticed Harry’s grip tightened on the strap of his trunk as he looked at the Weasleys. Neville bumped his shoulder.

Harry turned, and Neville gave him a subtle nod before jerking his head in another direction—away from the Weasleys.

Taking the hint, Harry quickly stepped back, following Neville as he led them away. Hermione, catching on, quietly fell into step beside them.

The three of them ducked through the crowd, weaving past the other students and parents before stopping near an older woman standing with impeccable posture, a dignified air about her.

Neville smiled as he approached. "It’s good to see you again, Gran. Have you been waiting long?"

Augusta Longbottom, dressed in her usual elegant green robes with her signature vulture-hat perched on her head, gave her grandson a once-over before shaking her head. "It’s good to see you too, my boy. And no, I just arrived." Then, turning her sharp gaze to Harry and Hermione, she asked, "Are these your friends?"

Neville nodded and gestured to Hermione first. "This is Hermione Granger—easily the brightest witch of our year."

Hermione, recalling the etiquette book she had borrowed from Neville, bowed politely. "It’s a pleasure to meet you, Lady Longbottom."

Augusta raised a mildly surprised eyebrow before returning the greeting with a small nod of approval. "How refreshing. It’s nice to meet you as well, Miss Granger. Neville has told me quite a bit about you."

Then, Neville smirked slightly as he gestured to Harry. "And this is Harry Potter—the boy wonder."

Harry shifted uncomfortably. "Uh, hello, ma’am," he said awkwardly, not quite sure how to address her.

Augusta’s sharp eyes studied Harry for a moment before she nodded. "You certainly look like a Potter," she remarked. "The resemblance to your father, James, at your age is striking."

Harry blinked, caught off guard. "You—you knew my dad?"

"Of course," Augusta said simply. "I knew many of the Potters. Your father was a troublemaker, but a brilliant wizard nonetheless."

Before Harry could respond, Augusta’s eyes flicked back to Neville—and to his empty hands. Her lips pressed together, and she raised an eyebrow.

"Neville," she said pointedly, "where’s your trunk? Did you leave it behind?"

Neville shook his head and patted his pant pocket. "No, it’s in here. I shrunk it to make it easier to carry."

Augusta nodded approvingly. "You’ve learned the Shrinking Charm? That’s quite advanced for your age," she said, clearly impressed.

As Neville was introducing Harry and Hermione to his gran, the Weasleys made their way over. Ron, looking pleased to see his family, quickly introduced them to Harry, Neville, and Hermione.

Neville leaned toward Harry and whispered, "Act normal."

Harry gave a slight nod and, despite his earlier hesitation, shook hands with the Weasleys as if nothing was amiss.

Mrs. Weasley beamed at them. "Busy year?" she asked kindly.

"Very," Harry replied. Then, remembering his manners, he added, "Thanks for the fudge and the sweater, Mrs. Weasley."

Before Mr. Weasley could say anything, a sharp voice cut through the noise of the station.

"Ready, are you?"

They all turned to see Uncle Vernon standing a short distance away, his face still a deep shade of purple, his thick mustache twitching in irritation. He looked absolutely furious—likely at the sight of Harry standing in the middle of a crowded station with an owl in a cage, completely unconcerned about how "normal" people might react.

Behind him, Aunt Petunia stood stiffly, her lips pressed into a thin line, while Dudley hovered behind her, looking terrified at the very sight of Harry.

"You must be Harry’s family!" Mrs. Weasley said brightly, offering them a warm smile.

"In a manner of speaking," Uncle Vernon replied gruffly. "Hurry up, boy, we haven’t got all day." Without another word, he turned on his heel and stomped away.

Harry, for possibly the first time in his life, actually felt relieved to see his relatives. He turned back to Neville, Hermione, and the Weasleys. "I’ll see you all soon," he said quickly. "Bye!

Ron gave Harry a confused look but said, "Yeah… goodbye, mate."

Neville quickly leaned in and whispered, "I’ll come in a week, okay?"

Harry nodded, his expression serious. Hermione stepped forward and gave him a quick hug. "Just hang in there," she said softly.

Harry nodded once more before quickly turning and hurrying after Vernon, eager to avoid any more lingering goodbyes.

Neville glanced back and saw Mr. and Mrs. Weasley looking bewildered. Beside him, Augusta observed quietly, her sharp eyes catching something others might have missed—Harry actually looked relieved to be going with his relatives.

Before Neville could dwell on it, his gaze shifted across the platform, spotting a woman who looked quite a bit like Hermione standing beside a man who was likely her husband.

He nudged Hermione. "Looks like your parents are here," he said, pointing towards them.

Hermione turned, immediately recognizing them. A wide smile spread across her face, and without hesitation, she grabbed Neville’s arm and started pulling him along. "Come meet them, Neville!" she said excitedly, leaving the Weasleys behind as they made their way over.

As they approached, Hermione called out, "Mum! Dad!"

Her parents turned, smiling warmly as she reached them.

"Mom, Dad, this is my friend Neville Longbottom," Hermione introduced proudly.

Her mother, Bonnie Granger, smiled kindly. "Ah, so this is Neville! It’s finally nice to put a face to the name. I’m Bonnie Granger, and this is my husband, Wendell Granger. Hermione has been writing about you in all her letters."

Hermione blushed. "Mum!" she groaned, clearly embarrassed.

Neville smirked. "All good things, I hope?" he said, shaking their hands. "It’s nice to meet you both, Mr. and Mrs. Granger."

Then, gesturing towards his grandmother, he added, "And this is my gran, Augusta Longbottom."

Augusta stepped forward, offering a firm handshake. "It’s a pleasure to meet you both," she said, her voice dignified but warm. Then, with a small approving nod towards Hermione, she added, "You’ve raised a very bright young witch."

Mr. and Mrs. Granger beamed with pride. "Thank you," Mr. Granger said.

After a bit more polite conversation, they soon said their goodbyes.

As Hermione turned to leave with her parents, she looked at Neville with a pointed expression. "You’ll write to me, right? And don’t say it’s too bothersome—promise," she demanded, narrowing her eyes.

Neville chuckled. "Yeah, sure, Hermione. I promise I’ll write to you."

Hermione smiled, satisfied. "Good. See you soon, Neville."

With that, she left with her parents, heading towards the station exit.

Augusta placed a gentle hand on Neville’s shoulder. "Come along now, dear. Time to go home."

She led him toward the Apparition point, and with a quiet pop, they disappeared from King’s Cross Station.

…

They arrived at the gates of Longbottom Manor with a soft pop, Augusta turned to Neville with a small nod. "Welcome back, Neville."

Neville grinned. "Good to be back, Gran."

Stepping into the manor, they were immediately greeted by a small, eager voice.

"Welcome back, young master Nevy! Does the young master be needing anything, sir?" chirped a house-elf, bouncing on his feet.

Neville smiled. "It’s good to be back, Tinkle. And no, thank you. I’m good for now."

Augusta turned to him. "I’ll let you settle in dear. Once you’re done, come down for dinner."

Neville nodded. "Sure thing, Gran. I’ll just put my things away and take a bath first."

Before he could say another word, Tinkle clapped his hands excitedly. "Then I will get the bath ready for the young master!"

And with a pop, the elf vanished before Neville could even protest.

With a sigh, Neville made his way up the staircase, heading toward his room.

Once inside, he reached into his pocket, pulled out his trunk, and unshrunk it with a quick Engorgio.

Grabbing a towel, he headed to the bathroom, letting the warm water wash away the exhaustion from the long train ride.

After a refreshing bath, Neville stepped out of his room, now dressed in a simple black t-shirt and grey pants. He made his way downstairs to the dining room, where Augusta was already seated, waiting for him.

She gestured to the seat beside her. "Come, take a seat, Neville. You must be starving."

Neville slid into his chair and nodded. "Yeah, I’m starving—especially after skipping lunch."

Tinkle appeared again, swiftly serving dinner—a perfectly cooked roast with all the trimmings. The rich aroma filled the room as Augusta delicately cut into her chicken.

"So," she asked, taking a measured bite, "how was your first year? I hope it went well."

Neville swallowed a mouthful of food before replying, his voice light but deliberate. "Yeah, it was great," he said before lowering his voice so Augusta wouldn’t hear him. "—except for the whole incident in the Forbidden Forest and, you know, fighting a troll again. Other than that" He shrugged casually. " It was a good year."

Augusta froze mid-bite, her fork pausing halfway to her mouth. Her sharp eyes flicked up, locking onto him. "Hmm? What was that?"

Neville tilted his head slightly, feigning mild confusion. "Huh?" he asked, already knowing full well that Dumbledore wouldn’t have shared any of it with her. "I said it was a good term."

He kept his expression neutral. He didn’t want her storming off to Dumbledore demanding answers. If his theory was right, the old man had likely placed some kind of mild compulsion charm on student so they wouldn’t talk about certain things with their parents. It would explain why no parents seemed to know about the troll on Halloween.

Before Augusta could press further, Neville smoothly changed the subject.

"Hey, Gran, do you think Harry could stay over for the summer?" he asked casually. "His relatives aren’t exactly kind to him."

Augusta pursed her lips thoughtfully but didn’t interrupt, so Neville continued. "Oh, and by the way, would it be alright if Hermione visited as well? Maybe even her parents? It’d be nice for her to show them what she’s learned so far—especially with the Trace not working inside the manor."

Augusta took a moment, finishing her bite before nodding. "Hmm, I don’t see why not. Mr. Potter is welcome to stay if he’d like. It would be nice to have more people around the manor." She took another sip of her tea before adding, "As for Miss Granger, she’s welcome as well, and her parents too. Just let me know before inviting them over."

Neville grinned. "Thanks, Gran. I’ll send them a letter soon."

Kaito Akaden Chapter 159

Kaito Akaden Chapter 159

Mei’s eyes widened. “This is…” She looked up at him and nodded. “Thank you again.”

Kaito gave a small nod before his expression turned serious again. “And I meant what I said before—neither of you are strong enough to take on Yagura as you are now. I’d suggest laying low and gathering support from the rest of the village before making your move.”

He then turned to Mangetsu and pointed at him. “And you—you’re way too weak to fight him right now, especially with that dumb sword of yours. Ditch the damn thing and start learning techniques from your late Second Mizukage, Gengetsu Hozuki. If you do, maybe you’ll stand a chance against Yagura.”

Mangetsu scowled but didn’t say anything.

Kaito rummaged through his pouch and pulled out a small seal, handing it to Mei. “This is a one-time-use seal designed to counter powerful genjutsu. When you fight Yagura, use it on him.”

This was a seal Kaito had specifically designed to counter Kotoamatsukami and Tsukuyomi.

Mei took the seal, nodding in understanding. “I’ll make sure to use it wisely. Thank you.”

With that, Kaito turned to Tenzo. “Alright, let’s go.” He placed a hand on Tenzo’s shoulder, and in the next instant, they vanished from the field.

…

The snow-covered clearing stretched under the glow of the high-hanging moon.

With a faint flash, Kaito and Tenzo arrived in the clearing. A moment later, five of Kaito’s shadow clones, still disguised as Kiri shinobi, appeared one after another, carrying the unconscious Yuki clan members.

Tenzo took a cautious step forward, glancing around before turning to Kaito. “So… where are we? I assume we’re no longer in the Land of Water?”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah. We’re in the Land of Tea. I placed a Hiraishin marker here a while back during a mission.”

Tenzo hummed in understanding, but his brows furrowed as he turned to Kaito again. “Alright, I’ll ask again—what exactly is your plan here? Why did you bring them with us?” He gestured toward the unconscious Yuki clan members being carried by the clones. “Don’t tell me you’re planning on taking them back to Konoha. If that’s the case… how do you plan on convincing the Hokage? And for that matter… them?”

Kaito exhaled, rubbing the back of his neck. “I know how it looks, but this was the only way to keep them safe. I couldn’t just stand by and let the Mizukage wipe them out, ya know? And as for leaving them with Mangetsu and Mei…” He shook his head. “I considered it, but let’s be real—what do you think would’ve happened to them? They would’ve been used as sacrifices or treated like disposable pawns.”

Tenzo remained silent, listening.

Kaito continued. “Kiri has a caste system. The other two clans were from the higher caste, while the Yuki Clan has been at the bottom for generations. Now that all their shinobi are most likely dead, they would’ve been treated even worse. These are just civilian women and children. They don’t deserve to be thrown into a fight they don’t want any part of. I couldn’t turn a blind eye to that, ya know?”

Tenzo sighed. “Okay, I get that you want to help them. But bringing them to Konoha? Even if they want refuge, this could turn into a massive political mess for the Hokage. And if Kiri finds out that Konoha’s harboring them, they might see it as an act of aggression.”

He crossed his arms. “And if what you said about the masked man controlling the Mizukage is true… don’t you think he’d use this as an excuse to start the next war?”

Kaito nodded. “I don’t think it’ll cause that much of a problem. They’re all civilians, ya know. The oldest kid here is five—by the time he even becomes a genin, and rest of the world find out that Konoha is harboring them. enought time would have passed that we can just say they escaped from Kiri and came seeking refuge.”

He crossed his arms, his voice steady. “As for Lady Tsunade, I’m sure she’ll permit them to stay.”

One of Kaito’s clones, who was carefully holding a Yuki clan baby, shifted uncomfortably. “Uh, boss… not to interrupt, but can we speed things up? I’m not sure how much longer we can keep them out here in the cold, ya know.”

Kaito blinked. “Oh, right.” Kaito looked sheepish before turning to Tenzo. “Umm… can you build them a temporary house in the clearing? Just for the night?”

Tenzo exhaled, already knowing he wouldn’t get out of this. “Fine,” he muttered, his tone resigned. “But you owe me for this, Kaito.”

“I know, I know,” Kaito grinned, rubbing the back of his head. “I owe you big time.”

With a sigh, Tenzo stepped forward, rolling his shoulders before forming a series of hand seals. Pressing both palms to the ground, he called out, “Mokuton: Shichūka no Jutsu!”

The ground rumbled as thick wooden pillars burst from the soil, twisting and bending into the framework of a broad, sturdy structure. Within minutes, beams connected, walls rose, and a roof took shape. By the time the chakra settled, a simple yet durable two-story house stood in the clearing, large enough to shelter the entire group.

Panting slightly, Tenzo straightened up, wiping sweat from his forehead. “Alright,” he said, his voice a little strained. “That should do for now.”

Kaito’s shadow clones immediately carried the unconscious Yuki clan members inside. Meanwhile, Kaito placed a hand on Tenzo’s back. “Thanks, Tenzo. You really helped a lot today,” he said, smiling before channeling some of his chakra into him.

Tenzo let out a relieved sigh as the chakra flowed through him. “Appreciate it. I used up way too much chakra,” he admitted, his voice sounding more like himself again.

As Tenzo caught his breath, he watched Kaito’s clones carefully lay the Yuki clan members onto the wooden floor, covering them with blankets Kaito had pulled from his storage seals.

“So,” Tenzo said, turning back to Kaito, “your plan is to keep them here while you go back to Konoha to ask the Hokage for permission?”

“Yeah. Can’t just bring them into Konoha without telling Lady Tsunade first,” Kaito muttered, a nervous sweat drop forming at the thought of that conversation. “She’d kill me, ya know”

Tenzo crossed his arms. “Alright. Makes sense.”

“But first,” Kaito added, “I’m heading out to pick up Hotaru and the others. They’re still in the Land of Water.”

Tenzo nodded, his expression firm. “Go. I’ll keep an eye on them.”

Kaito gave a grateful nod, lifting his hand off Tenzo’s shoulder. “I’ll be back, thank for watching over them, ya know”

Tenzo sighed, running a hand through his hair before walking into the wooden house to help the clones. “Yeah, yeah…” he muttered. while Kaito vanished, teleporting away.

….

Kaito arrived back in the alleyway where he had teleported from earlier.

Immediately, he activated his Mind’s Eye of Kagura, scanning for familiar chakra signatures. Within seconds, he located Hotaru and the others in their rented inn room.

“Good, they’re are in the inn,” he muttered to himself before vanishing once again.

Inside the Inn Haku, Guren, and Kimimaro stood in the room, each with a small backpack strapped to their backs, ready to leave.

Meanwhile, Hotaru paced back and forth in front of them, biting her nails anxiously.

Haku glanced at her before speaking. “Hotaru-nee… do you think Kaito-nii is in trouble?”

Hotaru stopped pacing and turned to him. She forced a small smile. “No, I don’t think so, Haku-kun. I think… something just needed him to go personally.” But in her mind, worry lingered. I really hope Kai-kun is okay…

Guren, leaning against the wall, glanced at Kimimaro. “Do you think it has something to do with the Hidden Mist Village?”

Before anyone could answer, Kaito suddenly appeared right beside Hotaru.

“Hey, guys.”

Hotaru whirled around. The moment she saw him, she quickly stepped closer. “Are you okay? Did something happen?” Her eyes were filled with concern.

Kaito gave a reassuring nod. “Yeah, everything’s fine. I’ll explain later, but first, we need to get out of here.” As he spoke, a shadow clone popped into existence beside him. “Are you all packed?”

Hotaru nodded. “Hai! We’re ready.”

“Alright then.” Kaito placed a wad of cash on the table, placing a glass cup on top to keep it from scattering.

The shadow clone extended chakra chains, wrapping them securely around Guren and Kimimaro, while the real Kaito placed a hand on Haku’s and Hotaru’s shoulders.

The clone swiftly formed a series of hand signs before vanishing, teleporting Guren and Kimimaro away.

A moment later, Kaito disappearing with Hotaru and Haku.

…

They arrived in the clearing in front of the large wooden house. Haku, Guren, and Kimimaro stumbled slightly, disoriented by the sudden shift in location.

Hotaru raised an eyebrow as she took in the sight of the unfamiliar structure. “Kai-kun, where are we?” she asked.

“We’re in the Land of Tea,” Kaito replied as he walked toward the house and pushed open the door.

Hotaru, Haku, Guren, and Kimimaro followed closely behind him. As they stepped inside, Hotaru’s snow-white hair slowly shifted back to its natural dark indigo as she released her transformation.

The moment she entered, her eyes widened as she took in the sight of multiple unconscious people lying on the wooden floor.

“Kai-kun… who are these people?” she asked, concern evident in her voice.

Kaito exhaled. “These are the remaining members of the Yuki Clan.” Then, turning to Haku, he added, “The same clan you’re a part of.”

Haku’s eyes widened. “My… clan?”

Hotaru frowned. “But why are they here, Kai-kun? What are they doing in the Land of Tea? Aren’t they part of Kirigakure?”

Kaito nodded. “Right. Remember my clone that found Kimimaro? Well, after sending him to us, he went back to Kiri to see the aftermath of the Kaguya Clan’s coup d’état.” His voice darkened. “It was… bad. By the time my clone got there, the entire Kaguya Clan—including the women and children—had been wiped out. Burned. Slaughtered under the direct orders of the Mizukage.”

Kaito continued. “After that, the Mizukage held a meeting and stripped all the clans of their privileges. He made it clear—if any clan dared to rebel, he’d wipe them out, just like the Kaguya.”

Running a hand through his hair, Kaito sighed. “The clans didn’t take it well. The Yuki, Hozuki, and Terumi clans joined forces and planned to overthrow him. But… it failed.” His expression darkened. “The Mizukage knew they’d try. He was waiting for them. The moment they made their move, he ordered their complete extermination.”

Hotaru inhaled sharply. “And you…?”

“I managed to rescue the civilians and kids,” Kaito said firmly. “I couldn’t just leave them to die, ya know?”

He continued, “After getting them to safety, I decided to take the Yuki Clan members with me. They’re all civilians—just women and small kids. And let’s be honest, they were already being treated badly in Kiri. I doubt the other two clans would have protected them. They have no shinobi left, so they wouldn’t be of any use to them.”

Hotaru nodded, already understanding Kaito’s plan. “So, you plan on bringing them to Konoha?”

Kaito nodded.

Hotaru then frowned, her expression serious. “But what I don’t understand is why the Mizukage would do something like that. Why would he intentionally weaken his own village? Especially now, when most villages are still recovering from the Third Great Shinobi War. It… doesn’t make any sense, Kai-kun.”

Kaito nodded. “It doesn’t make sense… unless he isn’t himself.”

Hotaru’s eyes narrowed. “What do you mean, Kai-kun?”

Hotaru narrowed her eyes. “What do you mean, Kai-kun?”

Kaito exhaled and crossed his arms. “One of the things my clone found out while spying in the Hidden Mist… is that the Mizukage is under a genjutsu.” His expression darkened. “And I recognized the chakra signature immediately. It was the masked man’s.”

Hotaru’s eyes widened. “The masked man?”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah. My guess is he’s using the Mizukage to fund his operations and destabilize a major nation in the process.”

Hotaru clenched her fists, nodding in understanding before asking another question, but before she could, Tenzo walked over.

“Alright, Kaito, I’m all done here,” Tenzo said before glancing around. “Where’s Kakashi-sempai? I thought he was on this mission with you.”

Kaito turned to him. “We split up to cover more ground. Hotaru and I took the southern part of the Land of Water while he covered the north. But I gave him a seal that lets us communicate with each other.”

Tenzo nodded, but Kaito’s expression turned serious. “Thing is… I’ve been trying to contact Kakashi for the last hour, but he hasn’t responded.”

Tenzo frowned. “You think something might’ve happened to him?”

Kaito rubbed his chin in thought. Could Kakashi have run into trouble? He dismissed the thought of Obito being involved. No… if it were him, he wouldn’t go after Kakashi.

After a brief pause, Kaito looked at Tenzo. “I don’t know. But I’m going to check on him. The seal I gave him has my Hiraishin marker on it.”

Tenzo’s expression hardened. “Then I’m coming with you. If Kakashi-sempai is in trouble, I have to help.”

Kaito sighed. “Alright.”

Before they could leave, Hotaru stepped forward. “I’m coming with you, Kai-kun.”

Kaito shook his head. “No, Hotaru. You stay here with them. I need you to keep watch until I get back. Please.”

Hotaru hesitated for a moment before nodding. “Fine… but keep your communication channel open.”

Kaito smirked. “Yeah, yeah, sure.” Then, turning to Tenzo, he asked, “You ready to go?”

Tenzo nodded firmly.

With a final glance at Hotaru, Kaito placed a hand on Tenzo’s shoulder. Closing his eyes, he focused on Kakashi’s Hiraishin marker—then, in a blink, they vanished.

Goten Chapter 11

Author's Note: Sorry, I couldn’t upload Goten on Saturday—I was busy. As for Kaito, I’ll be uploading a chapter by the end of tomorrow.

Goten Chapter 11

Goten nodded. "Yeah, we’ve been training with Master Roshi for six months now," he confirmed.

Trunks clenched his fists, looking determined. "I also want to help! Can I join you?" he asked, looking directly at Gohan.

Gohan blinked in surprise, then awkwardly looked at Bulma, unsure of what to say.

Trunks turned to his mother, pleading with her. "Mom, please! You know I’m half-Saiyan, just like them. I can help!"

Bulma let out a deep sigh, shaking her head. "It’s too dangerous, Trunks."

"But Mom!" Trunks pleaded, his voice desperate. "It would just be training! I swear I won’t go and fight the androids!"

As the argument between Trunks and Bulma continued, Goten fell deep into thought. "We need a way to go back in time… to get the location of New Namek. But if we defeat the androids too soon, Bulma won’t have a reason to build the time machine." He furrowed his brows, thinking harder. "If I remember correctly, Bulma only started working on the time machine after Gohan’s death. But I’m not planning on letting him die. We need him. And honestly… I’ve grown attached to him." Goten frowned, realizing the problem. "That would mean Bulma won’t build the time machine…"

…

Goten was deep in thought, his mind racing. ‘How am I going to get Bulma to build a time machine?’ He tried to think of ways to convince her. ’If we’re going to survive in this timeline, we need the time machine. But how am I going to convince her? Even Mom and Gohan still haven’t talked about the Dragon Balls in front of me, so I should know that the Dragon Ball existed…’

His thoughts then shifted to the androids. ‘There’s no way they’ll let us live next time. I bet they’ll be out to kill the next time we meet. I’m not even as strong as Gohan when he goes Super Saiyan yet… I need to get stronger fast.

We could go to the Hyperbolic Time Chamber, but how am I going to explain that to them? I can’t just tell them, ‘Hey, let’s go to the Lookout.’

Then, another idea hit him. Wait… didn’t Bulma build a gravity chamber for Vegeta? Maybe she still has it. And if I remember correctly… Gohan never trained under increased gravity in this timeline.

Just then, Goten was pulled from his thoughts when he heard Trunks pleading with Bulma.

"Mom, please! You have to let me train with Gohan!" Trunks begged, his voice full of desperation. "I can’t just sit around while they fight the androids alone!"

Bulma let out a long sigh, rubbing her forehead. After a moment, she relented. "Alright, Trunks," she said, giving in. "I’ll let you train with Gohan."

Trunks’ face lit up in excitement. He jumped up and hugged Bulma tightly. "Thank you! Thank you!" he cheered.

Bulma quickly put a stop to his celebration by holding up her hand. "But under one condition," she said firmly. "I don’t want you picking a fight with the androids before you’re ready."

Trunks nodded seriously. "I understand, Mom. I won’t do anything reckless."

Bulma then turned her sharp gaze toward Gohan, her expression serious. "And I trust you not to let him recklessly run off to fight the androids like you did today," she said, her tone making it clear she wasn’t playing around.

Gohan rubbed the back of his head sheepishly. "Yeah… don’t worry about it, Bulma. I learned my lesson."

Goten chimed in, his voice deadpan, "Yeah, that’s good—because I don’t think the androids will let us live next time." He gave Gohan a flat stare.

Gohan looked down for a moment before nodding. "Yeah… I know that," he admitted.

Goten then turned to Trunks, his expression serious. "And Trunks," he said, crossing his arms. "Fighting the androids isn’t going to be easy. They were literally toying with both me and Gohan, and we barely survived. I doubt they even used half of their full strength."

Pilaf, who had been quiet up until now, swallowed nervously. "A-Are they really that strong?" he asked, looking shaken.

Goten nodded and said, "If I had to guess, I’d say they’re at least three times stronger than Gohan in his Super Saiyan form. And that’s just one of them. If both of them fight together, even if Gohan was a match for one, he’d still lose."

In his mind, Goten calculated the numbers. If I remember correctly, the androids had a power level of around 400 million, while Future Gohan was somewhere between 200 to 250 million before he died. If I had to guess, this Gohan is probably around 150 million right now.

Bulma frowned, concern deep in her features. "Even after all these years, are they really that strong, Gohan?"

Gohan sighed, his expression grim. "Yeah, what Goten said is true, Bulma. They were just toying with me. If it weren’t for Goten’s quick thinking, we’d both be dead."

Hearing that, Trunks clenched his fists. "Is there even a way we can defeat the androids if they’re that strong?" he asked, frustration evident in his voice.

Goten rubbed his chin thoughtfully and muttered out loud, "If only there was a way to get stronger faster… like training in increased gravity or something." He purposely hinted at it, hoping that Bulma had the gravity chamber.

Bulma blinked, processing what he had just said. "You mean… a gravity chamber?" she asked. "I had one built for Vegeta. He used to train in it almost every day before the androids came."

Gohan’s eyes widened in realization. "I remember that!" he exclaimed. "Dad used one too—on his way to Namek! He got exponentially stronger using it. He was able to go toe-to-toe with Frieza after training in it!" He quickly turned to Bulma. "Bulma, do you still have the gravity chamber?"

Bulma sighed and shook her head. "I did… but it was destroyed when the androids attacked Capsule Corp."

Goten sighed, feeling disappointment creep in. Well, there goes that plan…

But then, Bulma tapped her chin thoughtfully. "But… I think I can have it rebuilt in about two weeks. I should have the scraps lying around, so it should be easy to put together."

Gohan’s face lit up with a wide smile. "Thanks, Bulma! That’s going to help us a lot!"

Goten grinned, thinking, That’s great! This could really help us!

Then, out of nowhere, a small voice spoke up.

"Can… I join you guys?"

Everyone turned in shock to see Videl standing there, looking serious but slightly nervous.

Gohan blinked in surprise. "What?"

Videl clenched her fists, her eyes filled with determination. "Can I train with you as well?" she asked firmly.

Gohan scratched the back of his head, looking a bit unsure. “Eh… Videl, no offense, but I don’t think—”

Before he could finish, Videl cut him off, her voice firm. “The androids have taken everything from me,” she said, clenching her fists. “I want to be able to defend myself and help fight back against them.”

Gohan’s expression softened as he looked at her. He could see the determination in her eyes, but also the pain. After a moment of silence, he nodded. “Alright… you can join us,” he said. “But I’ll warn you—it’s not going to be easy.”

Videl nodded resolutely, already prepared for the challenge ahead.

Just then, a loud rumbling echoed through the room, catching everyone’s attention.

Everyone turned to look at Goten, whose stomach had just made the offending noise.

Goten frowned, rubbing his belly. “Man, I’m really hungry,” he complained before shooting a glare at Gohan. “I abandoned dinner because of you, Gohan.”

Gohan smiled sheepishly and rubbed the back of his head. “Yeah… sorry about that,” he said. “Let’s get going. I’m sure Mom saved our dinner.”

Goten nodded but then turned to Videl, his expression thoughtful. “Wait, what about her?” he asked. “She said she didn’t have anywhere to go.”

Then he looked back at Gohan. “Should we bring her with us?”

Before Gohan could answer, Bulma spoke up.

“She can stay here,” Bulma said. “There are spare rooms in Capsule Corp, and I could use some extra help around anyway.” She smiled gently at Videl. “If you want to stay, I’d be glad to have you.”

Videl’s eyes softened, a hint of relief washing over her. She bowed her head slightly. “Thank you so much,” she said sincerely. “I promise I’ll help however I can.”

Trunks, eager to begin, stepped forward and asked, "Hey, what about my training? When are we going to start?"

Gohan rubbed his chin, thinking for a moment. "Well, we can start tomorrow," he said. "I can take you both to Master Roshi and get you started on the basics."

Bulma blinked, her expression turning to surprise. "Wait… Master Roshi?" she asked. "Are you telling me that old perv is still alive?"

Gohan nodded casually. "Huh? Yeah, Master Roshi is still alive. Me and Goten have been training under him for the past six months."

Just then, Goten’s stomach rumbled again, louder this time. He groaned, rubbing his belly. "Come on, Gohan! I’m starving!"

Bulma chuckled. "We have some food here if you want, Goten."

Goten shook his head. "Thanks, Bulma-san, but Mom has already made dinner, and she’s probably waiting for us," he said. Then, looking back at Gohan, he added, "Come on, Gohan!" as he started walking toward the exit. "I’m sure Mom’s worried sick."

"Hey, Goten, wait for me!" Gohan called out, nodding to Bulma and the others before following after his brother.

He turned back one last time and smiled. "Thanks again for everything, Bulma."

Then, looking at Trunks and Videl, he added, "I’ll come for you early tomorrow." He waved to everyone. "Bye, guys!"

With that, Gohan turned and ran out the exit, following Goten.

Bulma and the others followed them outside, watching as they left Capsule Corp.

As soon as Gohan stepped outside, he sensed that Goten had already taken off without him.

Looking up, he spotted his brother as a golden streak in the sky, already speeding toward Mount Paozu.

"That little—" Gohan muttered before quickly taking off after him.

A while later, Gohan finally caught up, flying beside him. "Hey, wait up, Goten!" he called out.

But Goten only smirked, looking over at him playfully—before increasing his speed even more.

"Seriously?!" Gohan grumbled before chasing after him.

Before long, they arrived at Mount Paozu, landing just in front of the Son house.

Goten walked up to the door and swung it open. "Mom, we’re back!" he called out.

Inside, Chi-Chi was sitting at the table, her head resting on her folded arms. The moment she heard Goten’s voice, her head shot up, and she immediately rushed toward them.

She pulled both of them into a tight hug, her body shaking as she held them close.

"Oh, my babies!" she cried. "Both of you are alright!"

Goten, his face squished against her shoulder, tapped her back weakly. "M-Mom… can’t breathe!" he wheezed.

Chi-Chi hugged them tightly, her body trembling. "Oh, my babies! Both of you are alright!" she cried.

Goten, his face squished against her shoulder, tapped her back weakly. "M-Mom… can’t breathe!" he wheezed.

Chi-Chi immediately let go, but as soon as she did, her expression shifted to pure rage. She turned to Gohan first, placing her hands on her hips.

"What were you thinking, Gohan?! You rushed off without even thinking! What if you got killed?!" she yelled. "I can’t lose you both! Do you have any idea how worried I was?! I thought… I thought I’d never see my babies again!"

Her voice cracked, and she clenched her fists. "The radio said that Parsley City was completely destroyed! My heart stopped—I thought I had lost you both until Bulma called and told me you showed up at her house all injured!"

She then grabbed both their ears and yanked them hard, making them wince in pain.

"What if one of you died?!" she scolded. Then, her angry gaze shifted to Goten. "And you, mister! What were you thinking?! You are far too young to be fighting the androids!"

Goten, wincing in pain, shouted, "I’m sorry, Mom! But I couldn’t just let Gohan face the androids alone!"

Gohan, gritting his teeth through the ear-pulling, managed to say, "I’m sorry, Mom… I promise not to do that again."

Chi-Chi finally let go and crossed her arms with a huff. "It better be!"

Goten, rubbing his sore ear, grumbled under his breath, "Stupid Gohan…"

Just then, Goten’s stomach rumbled loudly, breaking the tension.

Chi-Chi sighed and looked at both of them. "Go wash up, and both of you take a bath—you’re filthy!" she ordered. "I’ll reheat the food while you clean up."

….

A while later Goten walked into the living room, towel in hand, still drying his hair.

Chi-Chi was already waiting at the dining table, setting out the reheated food. She looked up as Goten entered. "Come, sit," she said.

Moments later, Gohan joined them, and the brothers sat down. Chi-Chi handed them bowls of food, watching as they dug in hungrily.

As they ate, Chi-Chi leaned forward slightly and asked, "So… what happened? How did you both escape from the androids?"

Gohan paused, his grip on his chopsticks tightening slightly. He lowered his gaze. "It was… Goten," he admitted. "He saved us from the androids."

Chi-Chi’s eyes widened, and she looked at Goten in shock.

Goten, swallowing a mouthful of food, casually added, "Yeah, I used a distraction to get Gohan and Videl away, and then I fled."

Then, with a mischievous grin, he threw in, "Oh, and by the way, Videl is Gohan’s new girlfriend."

Gohan was caught completely off guard, choked on his food, coughing violently.

Chi-Chi paused mid-bite, her chopsticks frozen, and shouted, "WHAT?!"

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 39

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 39

Neville exhaled. “It’s possible. If Voldemort believed in the prophecy—if he thought the one who could defeat him would be like Dumbledore, another half-blood—then he had to choose between us. And he chose you.”

Harry stared at the floor, trying to process it all.

Neville continued. “And here’s something else I figured out… I think Voldemort himself is a half-blood.”

Hermione gasped. “What?”

Neville nodded. “Think about it. If he was a pureblood, he would have kept his family name. You know how much purebloods flaunt their blood status. They’re obsessed with their lineages.”

Harry frowned. “But his name is Voldemort.”

Neville shook his head. “That’s a chosen name, Harry. No pureblood family, no matter how twisted, would name their kid ‘Voldemort’. They’d give him a proper wizarding name—one with a legacy, one that ties back to an ancient lineage. But he changed his name. That means he was hiding something.”

Hermione bit her lip. “You think he was ashamed of his real name?”

Neville nodded. “Yeah. Because if he wasn’t a pureblood, that means he wasn’t what his followers thought he was.”

...

Neville shrugged. “So yeah, I think that’s why Voldemort went after you on Halloween. He chose you because you were a half-blood, and your mum sacrificed herself to protect you that night… that’s what shielded you when he cast the Killing Curse. And it’s probably the same thing that protected you when Quirrell touched you.”

Harry let out a shaky breath, sinking into a chair and holding his head in his hands. “This is… a lot to take in. My mum sacrificed herself to protect me… and Voldemort is after me because of some dumb prophecy?”

Hermione, looking stricken, reached out and rubbed his back gently. “Oh, Harry…”

Harry exhaled heavily before lifting his gaze to Neville. His voice was quiet but firm. “You think Dumbledore’s pulling all the strings?”

Neville nodded without hesitation. “Yes. And I think there’s even more to it.” He leaned forward. “You told me Dumbledore was the one who left you with your relatives, right? But don’t you think it’s strange that you were sent to the Dursleys instead of your godparents? Why would Dumbledore put you there when my parents could still care for you?”

Harry frowned, confusion flickering across his face.

“That brings me to something else,” Neville continued, his expression darkening. “My mum—Alice Longbottom—was your godmother, which means you should have automatically been under her custody when your parents… weren’t able to care for you anymore.”

Harry’s eyes widened. “Wait… what?”

Neville clenched his fists. “My gran told me that my parents were found on November 3rd—a full three days after Halloween. They were still in hiding. Then, suddenly, they weren’t. They left wherever they were hiding and ended up in a place that was immediately found by Death Eaters. And they were tortured for hours under the Cruciatus Curse.”

“So here’s my question.” He met Harry’s gaze. “If my mum was still capable of taking care of you… why didn’t Dumbledore hand you over to her? Why did he leave you with the Dursleys instead?”

Neville leaned forward, his expression serious. “You know what’s really suspicious about all this?”

Harry and Hermione looked at him, confusion etched on their faces.

“What do you mean?” Harry asked.

Neville exhaled sharply. “They were in hiding, right? Safe. Completely off the grid. Then, suddenly, they’re lured out—right into a trap. That means someone they trusted told them it was safe. Someone they believed without question. And then, somehow, the Death Eaters knew exactly where to find them.”

Hermione furrowed her brows. “But how? I mean, how could anyone just… find them if they were hiding?”

Neville looked at her, weighing his words carefully. “Do you know what a Fidelius Charm is?”

Hermione shook her head, and even Harry looked puzzled.

Neville leaned back slightly. “It’s one of the most powerful protective spells that exist. It works by hiding a secret inside a living person—the Secret Keeper. The location can only be revealed if the Secret Keeper willingly tells someone. Even if you tortured them, they couldn’t let the secret slip by accident. As long as the Secret Keeper doesn’t talk, the place remains hidden forever.” He hesitated before adding, “According to my gran, my parents were hidden under that spell. And I think yours were too, Harry.”

Harry’s eyes widened, and Hermione’s mouth parted slightly as she processed this information.

“So…” she said slowly, connecting the dots, “whoever told your parents it was safe… had to be the Secret Keeper. The only way they would ever come out was if someone they trusted convinced them to.”

Neville nodded grimly. “Exactly. My mum and dad weren’t reckless. They were Aurors. They knew how dangerous it was, yet they left their hiding place. Why? Because they trusted the person who told them it was safe.”

Silence stretched between them. Then Hermione whispered, “You’re suggesting that the person they trusted… was Dumbledore.”

Neville didn’t say anything at first, just letting the weight of the words sink in. Then, slowly, he nodded.

Harry’s breath hitched. “But why? That doesn’t make sense—”

Neville gave him a sharp look. “Harry, you were placed with your Muggle relatives immediately after your parents were killed. My mum—your godmother—was rendered incapable of taking care of you within the next three days. Don’t you think that’s just a bit too convenient?”

Harry’s face paled.

“If my theory is right,” Neville continued, his voice dark, “then Dumbledore was the one who told them to go into hiding in the first place. And then, for some reason, he brought them out. And the moment they left, the Death Eaters knew exactly where to find them.”

Harry swallowed hard. His hands clenched into fists on his lap. “Why?” he asked, his voice barely above a whisper. “Why would Dumbledore go to those lengths to keep me at the Dursleys?”

Neville looked him dead in the eye. “To mold you.”

Harry flinched.

“To make you the perfect pawn,” Neville continued, his voice unwavering. “Harry, you had to be broken. Beaten down. Desperate for love and validation. Abused enough that, when Dumbledore finally showed up to ‘save’ you, you’d see him as your hero. Someone you’d follow without question.”

Hermione let out a small, horrified gasp, her hands covering her mouth.

“Harry,” Neville said, his voice softer now, “you’ve got no sense of self-worth. Dumbledore made sure of that. He needed you to feel indebted to him. That way, you’d never question him. Never think for yourself. Never ask if there was another way.”

Harry sat down, hard, his whole body trembling. “Is that all I am?” he asked numbly. “Just… a pawn in Dumbledore’s grand plan?”

Neville nodded.

“If I had to guess,” he said carefully, “Dumbledore leaked the prophecy. Voldemort got wind of it, and suddenly, two babies became targets—you and me. Then Dumbledore went to our parents, telling them to hide. And he waited.”

Neville pointed to the scar on Harry’s forehead. “For Voldemort to choose.”

“He needed Voldemort to mark his chosen enemy,” Neville continued. “Dumbledore didn’t know which one of us the prophecy was about. He needed Voldemort to decide for him.”

“But Dumbledore didn’t expect Voldemort to survive,” Neville went on. “The prophecy wasn’t fulfilled, so he still needed you to do it. And to make sure you played your part… he had to control you.”

The compartment fell into silence.

No one spoke.

Neville turned his gaze to the window, watching as the scenery blurred past.

Harry sat slumped forward, his elbows resting on his knees, his hands clasped together as he stared at them, lost in thought.

Hermione stood beside him, biting her lip. She glanced between Harry and Neville, her mind racing through the implications of everything they had just talked about.

Finally, she broke the silence. "So... the prophecy is still active? And Dumbledore is manipulating everything to make sure Harry fulfills it?" Her voice was quiet, but there was a sharp edge to it.

Neville nodded. "Yeah, pretty much. We know Voldemort is still out there, so the prophecy hasn't been fulfilled yet. And as long as that’s the case, Dumbledore will keep pushing things to fit his plan."

Harry lifted his head slightly, his brows furrowed. "Then... can’t we go to the Aurors or something? Report Dumbledore?"

Neville shook his head. "Harry, if it were that simple, don’t you think I would’ve done it when he tried wiping my memories?" He leaned forward, lowering his voice. "Dumbledore isn’t just some random wizard. We don’t have proof—just speculation. And even if we did, do you really think people would believe three first-years over him?"

Hermione sighed, crossing her arms. "He's right, Harry. Dumbledore is the Chief Warlock of the Wizengamot, the Supreme Mugwump of the International Confederation of Wizards—he’s one of the most powerful and respected wizards in the world. Even if we did tell someone, it wouldn't make a difference."

Neville nodded. "And if we tried, he could just erase our memories, make us forget everything… or worse, he might decide to get rid of me."

Harry’s head snapped up, his green eyes dark. "Then what do we do? If we can’t report him, what’s the point of you telling us all this in the first place?" His frustration bubbled over, his voice rising slightly.

Neville raised an eyebrow at Harry. "Let me finish," he said firmly. "What I’m saying is that we do nothing for now. We can’t openly challenge him or go against him yet."

Harry and Hermione exchanged glances, still looking uneasy, but they let Neville continue.

"The first thing we must do is make sure Dumbledore never finds out that we know what’s going on," Neville went on, lowering his voice. "That means we act normal—like we don’t suspect a thing. And whatever you do, don’t look Dumbledore in the eye. He can read minds."

Harry frowned. "How are we supposed to stop that?"

Neville reached into his pocket and pulled out a folded piece of parchment, handing it to Harry. "That’s why I want you to start learning Occlumency over the summer. I wrote down the method and shortened it for you to make it easier to follow. I also put an Impervious Charm on it, so it won’t get damaged."

He turned to Hermione next. "Same goes for you. I’ll lend you my book on Occlumency. Just promise me you’ll take good care of it."

Hermione nodded, gripping the book tightly as if it were the most valuable thing she’d ever held. "You don’t have to worry about that, Neville. I’ll take good care of it."

Neville then turned back to Harry. "I’ll talk to Gran and get her to let you stay over for the summer," he said. "Give me a week, and I’ll come get you."

Harry looked surprised. "Stay over? Why?"

Neville leaned forward, his expression serious. "Harry, the prophecy hasn’t been fulfilled yet. That means, at some point, you will have to face Voldemort. We need to start getting you ready for that." He paused before adding, "When you come to stay at Longbottom Manor, we’ll start training—learning how to fight using magic."

Harry blinked. "But… I thought students weren’t allowed to perform magic outside of school?"

Before Neville could answer, Hermione scoffed. "That only applies to Muggle-borns," she said, her voice tinged with irritation. "The Trace can’t detect magic in a wizarding household, only in Muggle homes."

Neville nodded. "Hermione, when you visit over the summer, you can join us then."

She gave a firm nod in response, already mentally preparing for what was to come.

Neville exhaled and leaned back. "For now, all we can do is prepare and get stronger."

Harry nodded. "Right."

After a moment of thought, Neville added, "I don’t know if there’s such a thing as a loyalty potion, but I do know love potions and even hate potions exist in this world. I’ll be looking into it, see if there’s some kind of purging potion—something to protect us from being affected by them."

Hermione looked horrified. "You mean there's really something as vile as a love potion?"

Neville nodded. "Yeah. And worse—it’s perfectly legal to use." He shook his head in disgust. "I don’t think the magical world has common sense at all. It’s basically like using the Imperius Curse on someone, but somehow, it's considered acceptable."

Hermione’s face twisted in revulsion, but before she could say anything else, there was a knock on the compartment door.

She jumped slightly, startled by the sudden noise.

Neville sighed. "I really need to learn how to cast a Notice-Me-Not charm."

The knocking grew more persistent. Neville stood up but turned back to Harry before opening the door.

"Whatever you do, don’t go to the Weasleys," Neville warned, his voice low and serious. "We don’t know if they’re involved with Dumbledore. Just wait for me—I’ll try to come get you within a week."

Harry’s expression hardened with determination. "Got it."

With a final nod, Neville undid the Muffliato and the locking charm, then swung the door open, looking mildly annoyed. "What?"

Seamus and Dean stood there, looking a bit sheepish.

"Hey, mate," Seamus said with a grin. "We were wondering if you guys wanted to join us for a game of Gobstones."

Neville glanced over his shoulder at Harry and Hermione before nodding. "Yeah, sure. But we’ve got to wake Ron up first."

Seamus groaned. "Ah, that’s gonna take a while."

Kaito Akaden Chapter 158

Kaito Akaden Chapter 158

Mangetsu’s eyes narrowed again. "Why would you risk a war just to help us? How do we know you weren’t the one who informed the Mizukage?"

Kaito shrugged. "I couldn’t let literal children die, just because they’re from another village. If I wanted to betray you, I could’ve just let Yagura kill you and taken the kids back to Konoha myself."

Mei’s gaze sharpened. "Then why didn’t you warn us before the coup?"

Kaito raised an eyebrow. "And risk a full-scale war between Konoha and Kiri? Or worse, be labeled a rogue shinobi? Even if I had told you, would you have even believed me?"

Mangetsu looked at the restrained civilians and gestured to them. "Then why haven’t you let them down yet?"

Kaito smirked slightly, raising an eyebrow. "And what? Drop them in the snow?"

Mei sighed, rubbing her head. "If Yagura planned this whole thing, then we just gave him a reason to exterminate the clans."

Kaito’s expression turned serious as he crossed his arms. "There’s another thing you both should know."

Mei looked at him cautiously. "What?"

"The Mizukage isn’t himself," Kaito said firmly. "He’s being controlled."

…

Mei's eyes widened. "What?" she asked, her voice sharp with surprise.

Mangetsu's expression darkened, his brows furrowing. "What do you mean he's being controlled?"

Kaito shrugged casually. "Exactly that. The Mizukage is under a genjutsu—a powerful one."

Mei's eyes narrowed. "A genjutsu?" she echoed, skepticism creeping into her tone.

Mangetsu crossed his arms, clearly unconvinced. "How do you know that? How can you be sure he's under genjutsu?"

Kaito sighed. "Because I'm a damn good sensor," he said plainly. "I can feel foreign chakra traces on him." And he wasn't lying—he could clearly sense Obito’s chakra signature clinging to Yagura like a shadow.

Mei exhaled, her mind racing. "That… makes sense," she murmured. "Yagura wasn’t like this before he became Mizukage. I remember—before he was elected, he wanted to end most of Kiri’s old ways. The people loved him. But a year after he became the Fourth Mizukage, he just… changed. We all thought he was just showing his true colors, but if he’s been under someone’s control this whole time…" Her fists clenched. "That explains everything."

Kaito thought to himself, Man, I feel bad for Yagura. The guy’s been a puppet for years. And even after dying, he was still used—turned into an Edo Tensei pawn by Obito.

Mangetsu rubbed his chin, considering the information. "But who the hell could pull off a genjutsu strong enough to control a Kage?" His eyes sharpened as he turned to Kaito. "Is this Konoha’s doing? Only someone with a Sharingan could pull off something like this."

Kaito raised an eyebrow. "And what exactly would Konoha gain from controlling the Mizukage?" he shot back. "And if it was Konoha, why would I be telling you this now?"

Mangetsu scowled, unable to argue with that logic.

Kaito pressed on. "Besides, I know who’s controlling him."

Mei’s eyes snapped to him, her gaze intense. "You know who’s behind this?"

Kaito nodded. "Yeah. It’s the same person who was behind the Nine-Tails attack on Konoha eight years ago."

Mei’s eyes narrowed. "The same person?"

Kaito’s expression hardened. "He calls himself Madara Uchiha."

Mei's eyes widened. "Madara Uchiha?" she asked in disbelief.

Kaito nodded. "I'm not sure if he's Madara Uchiha, ya know. He hides his face behind an orange mask, but he has a Sharingan in his right eye. What I do know is that he's ridiculously strong—one of the hardest people to fight. He was the one behind the Nine-Tails attack on Konoha eight years ago, and I'm sure he's the one controlling the Fourth Mizukage."

Mangetsu crossed his arms, his expression skeptical. "How can you be so sure?"

Kaito met his gaze. "Because I've met him. Twice. And his chakra signature? It’s not something I’d ever forget. I’ve been hunting him for the past eight years, and I can feel that same chakra interfering with the Mizukage’s."

Mei absorbed the information, and then asked, "What can you tell us about him? This man who calls himself Madara?"

Kaito exhaled. "Not much, but what I do know is that physical attacks don’t work on him. He uses some kind of space-time ninjutsu that makes him intangible—he can phase through attacks and objects like they’re nothing. And he’s fast. Might even be faster than the Raikage. He also has the Sharingan strong enough to control a Tailed Beast. On top of that, he’s part of a mercenary group that calls themselves the Akatsuki. I think he’s their leader. The group is mostly made up of A-rank shinobi and higher… one of your former seven ninja swordsman Juzo biwa is a part of it."

Mei frowned. "He can use space-time ninjutsu?"

Mangetsu’s expression hardened. "If the Mizukage is under a genjutsu, wouldn’t breaking him out of it free him?"

Kaito shrugged. "Maybe. Or it could kill him." His tone was blunt, but there was a trace of something else—hesitation. "He's been under that genjutsu for years now, ya know? I don’t know what kind of side effects that has. If I had to guess…" His voice trailed off as he thought to himself. In my opinion, Yagura probably died when he was freed—maybe from the genjutsu’s side effects. I don’t know the exact details, but in the original timeline, Ao figured out he was under a genjutsu with the Byakugan… and I doubt Mei was the one who killed him.

Mei clenched her fists. "Even if his life is at risk, we don’t have a choice. This 'Madara' has already caused too much damage to the Hidden Mist. If we let him continue, there won’t be a village left to save."

Kaito’s gaze sharpened. "Are you even strong enough, though? I doubt either of you can take Yagura on and win right now."

Before either of them could respond, another Kaito suddenly appeared on the field—this time bringing someone with him.

….

The moon hung high over the Hidden Leaf Village, casting a soft glow over the rooftops.

One of Kaito’s clones sat cross-legged on the roof of the Uzumaki residence, eyes closed in deep meditation. Using his Mind’s Eye of Kagura, he remained alert, silently watching over the house.

Meanwhile, another of Kaito’s shadow clones, still disguised, materialized inside his room in a crouch. Standing swiftly, it strode over to the table and began rummaging through a stack of scrolls.

“Come on, come on… where is it?” the clone muttered, unrolling one of the scrolls and scanning its contents.

A moment later, its eyes sharpened. “Here it is.” Finding the seal it needed, the clone unsealed it—only for another scroll to materialize on top of the one it had just opened.

"Alright," it murmured, pocketing the scroll it had been searching for. Carefully, it rolled the original scroll back up and placed it exactly where it had found it.

Taking a steady breath, the clone closed its eyes and focused on a specific Hiraishin marker. In an instant, it vanished.

Just as it disappeared, the door creaked open, and Kushina peeked her head inside.

“I could’ve sworn I heard something in here…” she muttered.

Seeing nothing out of place, she sighed. “Must’ve been one of Kaito’s shadow clones.”

With one last glance around, she shrugged and closed the door, leaving the room silent once more.

….

In a small apartment on the quieter side of the village, Tenzo stepped out of the shower, towel draped over his head as he dried his damp hair. He wore a simple black shirt and blue pants, his body still warm from the steam.

With a satisfied sigh, he muttered, “Nothing like a hot shower.”

He walked over to the small table in his apartment and sat down, unwrapping the packed food he had bought earlier. The rich aroma of fried rice filled the air, making him sigh again. “Smells delicious,” he mumbled to himself before digging in.

Just as he took his first few bites, he suddenly felt a hand on his back.

His eyes widened in alarm, and before he could think, he instinctively jumped away—only to choke on the rice still in his mouth. Coughing violently, his reflexes kicked in, and a wooden spike shot out from his left hand as he tried to aim it threateningly at whoever was in front of him.

His throat burned, eyes watering as he struggled to clear the lodged rice.

Meanwhile, the intruder—still in disguise—leapt to the side. “Hey, hey! It’s me—Kaito Uzumaki!” Kaito shouted, his chakra chains shooting from his back to wrap around the wooden spike before Tenzo could fully attack.

Recognizing the chains, Tenzo exhaled sharply and retracted his Wood Release. He was still coughing as he shot Kaito an annoyed glare. “Damn it,” he muttered once he could finally breathe again. “Don’t do that! You nearly made me choke to death! How the hell did you even sneak up on me without me noticing?”

Kaito scratched the back of his head sheepishly. “Uh… yeah, my bad. I didn’t mean to startle you. I placed a Hiraishin marker on you the last time we met, ya know?”

Tenzo sighed, rubbing his forehead before crossing his arms. “Alright… what brings you here? Aren’t you supposed to be on a mission?”

Kaito’s face turned serious. “I’m here for you. I need your help.”

Noticing the shift in Kaito’s tone, Tenzo immediately straightened. “What is it?”

“I’ll explain, but we have to hurry.”

Tenzo frowned but nodded, walking toward his room. “Let me get changed first. And we should inform the Hokage—”

“No time for that,” Kaito interrupted, grabbing Tenzo by the shoulder.

“Wait—!” Tenzo barely had time to protest before they both vanished, leaving behind the quiet apartment.

….

Tenzo stumbled into the snow-covered clearing, his breath coming out in short puffs from the cold air.

As he steadied himself, he looked up and took in the scene before him. Several Kiri shinobi stood in the clearing, chakra chains sprouting from their backs as they restrained a group of unconscious people. His eyes narrowed—those weren’t actual Kiri shinobi. That was Kaito using a Henge. And from the way one of his clones was handling the prisoners, it was clear Kaito had been busy.

His gaze shifted to another Kaito, one identical to the one that had appeared in his home. This one stood alongside two Kiri shinobi—one with auburn hair and piercing eyes, and another with silver hair and a sharp gaze.

The clone that had brought Tenzo handed the real Kaito a scroll. “Here you go, boss.” With that, it dispelled itself.

Kaito scratched the back of his head. “Yeah… sorry for bringing you here so suddenly, Tenzo, but I need your help.”

Tenzo took a moment to compose himself before turning his attention to the two unfamiliar shinobi. His gaze flicked back to Kaito. “Alright… what exactly is going on here?”

Kaito exhaled. “Long story short the Mizukage was about to wipe out them for planning a coup. I kind of… interfered and got the civilians out of there.”

He then gave a quick rundown of everything that had happened.

Tenzo’s eyes widened in shock. “You interfered in another village’s affairs? Do you have any idea how serious that is?”

Kaito crossed his arms, his expression unwavering. “Hey, I couldn’t just stand by and let him slaughter defenseless women and children, ya know?”

Tenzo opened his mouth to argue, but Kaito cut him off. “Besides, the Mizukage is being controlled by the masked man.”

Tenzo stiffened. “Are you sure?”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah. No doubt about it.”

Tenzo rubbed his chin, his expression darkening. “That’s worse than we thought… If his genjutsu is strong enough to control the Mizukage, then he’s even more dangerous than we initially believed.” He turned to Kaito, his tone firm. “We need to inform Lady Hokage immediately.”

Kaito nodded. “Already planned to.”

Tenzo crossed his arms. “Then what exactly do you need my help with?”

Kaito hesitated for a second before rubbing the back of his head. “Yeah, about that…” He gestured toward the unconscious civilians. “They need shelter. They’ve got nowhere to go, ya know. So… I need you to build houses for them.”

Tenzo’s eye twitched. He stared at Kaito, deadpan.

“You want me to build houses?”

Kaito nodded, rubbing the back of his head sheepishly. “Yeah… Can you? I’ll owe you one, ya know.”

Tenzo sighed, shaking his head. “Alright, but you definitely owe me for this.”

Kaito grinned. “Sure thing.”

Tenzo exhaled, already regretting this. “How many do you need?”

Kaito thought for a moment. “Fifteen large houses should be enough.”

Mei, looking skeptical, crossed her arms. “How is he going to build houses alone?”

Kaito smirked at her. “Just watch.”

Tenzo let out another sigh before running through a series of hand signs. Placing his palm on the ground, he called out, “Mokuton: Shichūka no Jutsu!”

Immediately, massive wooden structures sprouted from the ground, twisting and expanding until they formed fifteen large houses.

Mei’s eyes widened in shock. “Mokuton…” she whispered.

Mangetsu narrowed his eyes. “The Kekkei Genkai of the legendary First Hokage.”

Tenzo panted heavily, his breathing ragged from the exertion. He dropped to one knee, sweat forming on his forehead.

Kaito was beside him in an instant, placing a supportive hand on his back. “Thank you, Tenzo. You’re a lifesaver. You alright?” he asked, smiling widely as he channeled some of his chakra into Tenzo to help him recover.

Tenzo nodded, still catching his breath. “Yeah… I’m fine.”

Meanwhile, a Kaito clone carried the unconscious civilians into the newly built houses, carefully placing them inside. After ensuring they were settled, the clone placed seals on each house to keep them warm.

Kaito nodded in satisfaction before forming a series of hand signs. Placing his palm on the ground, a complex seal matrix spread across the island, glowing faintly before disappearing into the earth.

Mangetsu eyed him suspiciously. “Hey… What was that? What did you do?”

Kaito, still crouched with his palm on the ground, glanced up at him, slightly annoyed. “I used a seal to make sure Yagura doesn’t find this island. They’re safe here now.”

He stood up, dusting his hands off. “And before you ask, the seals on the houses are warming seals—to keep them from freezing, ya know.”

Mangetsu’s gaze then shifted to the Yuki clan members who were still being held by chakra chains. He pointed at them. “And what about them? Why haven’t you put them in one of the houses?”

Kaito met his gaze, then glanced at Mei before answering. “Because I’m taking them with me.”

Tenzo’s attention snapped to Kaito, his brows furrowing.

Mangetsu’s eyes narrowed. “What?”

Kaito met his gaze, his own eyes sharpening. “I said I’m taking them with me,” he repeated firmly. “The Yuki Clan is finished in Kiri. There are no shinobi left—only women and small children. Not a single genin or chunin. They’re civilians. And let’s be real here… Kiri has treated them like garbage for years. Do you really think they’d want to help you take back the village?”

Mangetsu’s grip tightened around the hilt of his Hiramekarei, his posture tensing. Tenzo shifted slightly, preparing for a potential fight—until Mei spoke.

“That’s fine by me.”

Mangetsu turned to her sharply. “What do you mean?”

Mei crossed her arms and looked at him seriously. “The only reason we’re even alive right now is because of him. He didn’t just save us, he saved our clan. He could’ve ignored what was happening and walked away, but instead, he chose to help. He even found us a place to stay.” She exhaled. “And he’s right. The only ones left in the Yuki Clan are civilians and children. Kiri has treated them like nothing for years. We should let them go.”

Then, to everyone’s surprise, Mei bowed slightly toward Kaito. “Thank you, Kaito-san.”

Kaito scratched the back of his head, looking a little awkward. “I was just doing what was right, ya know.” He then pulled out a scroll and handed it to her. “This contains a year’s worth of rations for a large group… and 50 million Ryo.”

Mei’s eyes widened. “This is…” She looked up at him and nodded. “Thank you again.”

Kaito gave a small nod before his expression turned serious again. “And I meant what I said before—neither of you are strong enough to take on Yagura as you are now. I’d suggest laying low and gathering support from the rest of the village before making your move.”

He then turned to Mangetsu and pointed at him. “And you—you’re way too weak to fight him right now, especially with that dumb sword of yours. Ditch the damn thing and start learning techniques from your late Second Mizukage, Gengetsu Hozuki. If you do, maybe you’ll stand a chance against Yagura.”

Mangetsu scowled but didn’t say anything.

Kaito rummaged through his pouch and pulled out a small seal, handing it to Mei. “This is a one-time-use seal designed to counter powerful genjutsu. When you fight Yagura, use it on him.”

This was a seal Kaito had specifically designed to counter Kotoamatsukami and Tsukuyomi.

Mei took the seal, nodding in understanding. “I’ll make sure to use it wisely. Thank you.”

With that, Kaito turned to Tenzo. “Alright, let’s go.” He placed a hand on Tenzo’s shoulder, and in the next instant, they vanished from the field.

Goten Chapter 10

Goten Chapter 10

Videl’s legs almost gave out in relief when she saw them. Her gaze quickly landed on Bulma, and she staggered forward. "Please, ma’am! They need help—both of them are seriously injured!" she pleaded, motioning to the two brothers sprawled on the ground.

Bulma gasped as she ran to them, immediately kneeling beside Goten. She placed her hands on his face, checking his breathing, then quickly moved to Gohan. "Oh, Gohan... what did you get yourself into this time?" she whispered, her heart clenching at the sight of him.

Trunks stood over Gohan, his voice tense. "Are they okay, Mom?" he asked, then turned his gaze toward Goten, noticing how much he looked like his father.

Bulma let out a sigh, shaking her head. "They’re in bad shape... We need to get them inside, now." She looked up at her son. "Trunks, you carry Gohan. I’ll take Goten."

Videl took a step forward, about to help Trunks lift Gohan, but to her surprise, Trunks bent down and effortlessly hoisted Gohan onto his back.

Bulma, now carrying Goten, turned to Videl. "Come on!" she urged.

With urgency, they all made their way inside.

Bulma led them straight to the medical room, quickly instructing Trunks to place Gohan on the operating table.

…

Bulma carefully placed Goten on one of her desks, then stepped back, assessing his condition. Her eyes filled with concern as she took in the deep bruises, burns, and scratches covering his small body.

Meanwhile, Trunks gently laid Gohan on the medical bed, his expression tense as he looked at his unconscious mentor. Gohan looked even worse—his body was covered in burns and scrapes, and his arm was twisted at an unnatural angle.

Pilaf, Mai, and Shu, who were standing near Videl, watched the scene with nervous expressions. Pilaf cleared his throat awkwardly before speaking. “Excuse me,” he said, glancing at Videl. “Do you need anything? Water? A place to sit?”

Mai stepped closer and asked, “Are you okay?”

Videl shook her head, still clutching her injured arm. “My arm is broken, but… take care of Gohan and Goten first,” she insisted.

Meanwhile, Bulma quickly hurried over to Gohan’s side and began searching his pockets. Her fingers carefully felt around, hoping she would find what she was looking for.

After a few moments, her eyes lit up. “Found them,” she murmured, pulling out a small pouch. She carefully opened it and counted three senzu beans inside.

She let out a relieved breath. “Perfect,” she whispered.

Straightening up, Bulma scanned the room, taking in their injuries. Gohan was in the worst shape—his body was battered, his arm was completely broken, and he was barely breathing. Goten, while not as severely wounded, was still covered in bruises and scorch marks. Videl, though conscious, winced at every small movement, her broken arm still throbbing.

“All right,” Bulma said, grimacing at Gohan’s condition. “I’ll give Gohan a full senzu bean since he’s the worst off. Goten and Videl can split one. We’ll keep the last one in case of an emergency.”

Trunks, staring at the unconscious forms of Gohan and Goten, turned to his mother, his voice filled with concern. “Are you sure they’re going to be okay, Mom?”

Bulma nodded, holding up the senzu beans for him to see. “Yeah. These will heal them just fine,” she reassured him. She stepped toward Gohan and gently placed a bean in his mouth, helping him swallow.

A few moments passed in silence.

Then, Gohan’s body twitched, his muscles tightening as the healing properties of the senzu bean took effect. His breathing steadied, the burns on his skin disappearing, and then—

His eyes snapped open.

Gohan sat up instantly, his body still tense from battle. His eyes darted around, trying to assess the situation. Then, when he spotted Goten lying unconscious, his heart clenched.

“Goten!” he gasped, quickly moving over to his younger brother’s side. He reached out, checking his breathing, his face tight with worry.

Bulma crossed her arms and shook her head disapprovingly. “I’m really disappointed in you, Gohan,” she said, her voice sharp. “Why did you take Goten with you to fight the androids?”

Still kneeling beside his brother, Gohan turned toward her, shaking his head. “I didn’t bring him! He followed me!” he said.

Bulma sighed, rubbing her temples. "Of course he did," she muttered before walking over to Gohan and handing him half of a senzu bean. “Here, feed him this.”

Gohan wasted no time. He carefully placed the bean in Goten’s mouth, helping him chew.

Bulma walked over to Videl and handed her the other half of the senzu bean. “Here, take this. It’ll help with your arm,” she said.

Videl hesitated for a moment but then looked over at Gohan, watching in bewilderment and shock as he recovered almost instantly. Just moments ago, he had been on the verge of death, his body broken and covered in burns, and now… he was sitting up, moving as if nothing had happened.

“How…?” she muttered, still stunned. “He was almost dead.”

She took the senzu bean from Bulma, still staring at it in disbelief.

Videl still looked skeptical, but after witnessing Gohan’s miraculous recovery, she hesitated for only a moment before eating it.

The effect was immediate.

A warm sensation spread through her body, and she felt her broken bones snap back into place. The pain disappeared as if it had never been there.

Her eyes widened in shock as she flexed her fingers. “I-I’m completely healed… My arm—it’s like it was never broken!” she gasped.

Turning to Bulma, still in shock, she asked, “What was that thing?! Is it some kind of new medicine or experimental drug?”

Bulma crossed her arms and smirked slightly. “Something like that,” she said. “They’re called senzu beans, but they’re extremely rare. It’s a good thing Gohan still had some.”

Meanwhile, Gohan had fed Goten, the other half of senzu bean. “Come on, Goten… slowly,” he urged.

Goten’s body twitched as the healing effects began to kick in. His eyes slowly fluttered open, and he took a deep breath, feeling his strength return. He looked around, blinking a few times before sighing in relief.

"Good thing we made it to Capsule Corp…" he thought.

Though he was still exhausted, his injuries were completely healed. He sat up, stretching slightly—

Only to be immediately grabbed by Gohan, who gripped his shoulders tightly.

“What the hell were you doing there, Goten?!” Gohan shouted, his voice filled with frustration and fear. “You could have been killed! What would I have told Mom?!”

Goten, still processing everything, looked up at his brother. He shrugged off his grip and frowned.

“We’re alive because of me,” Goten shot back. “If I hadn’t been there, you would have been dead.”

Gohan opened his mouth to argue, but Goten cut him off.

“And I could say the same thing about you,” he continued. “What were YOU thinking, Gohan? Going off to fight the androids without even thinking about it?!”

Gohan flinched.

“You knew you weren’t strong enough! Even Master Roshi told you that!” Goten’s voice grew sharper. “What do you think would have happened to Mom if you died? Did you even stop to think about that?”

Silence filled the room.

Goten let out a deep sigh, shaking his head. “You’re not Dad, Gohan,” he said firmly. “Stop trying to be some kind of savior. You need to start being yourself—like Master Roshi told you. Stop trying to be someone you’re not.”

Gohan clenched his fists, his eyes closing as he thought about what could have happened. The image of himself and goten, lying dead at the androids’ feet, flashed in his mind.

And then the thought of what Goten said—what if Mom had lost them both?

He took a deep breath and finally let go of his frustration.

“…You’re right,” Gohan admitted, his voice quieter now. He let out a long sigh and looked at his younger brother. “I didn’t think before heading out to fight the androids… and if you hadn’t shown up, I would have died.”

He glanced down at the floor, guilt settling in. “And I put you in danger too,” he added. “I’m sorry, Goten.”

Gohan let out a deep sigh, his shoulders slumping. "I'm sorry… I didn't think before heading off to fight the androids," he admitted, guilt weighing heavy in his voice. "And you're right… I would have died if you hadn't arrived to help. I also put you in danger, Goten."

Goten sighed before stepping forward and hugging his brother. He could tell that this Gohan was going through an existential crisis, burdened by everything he had to endure alone.

After a moment, Goten pulled back and offered a small smile. "Hey, you did save someone," he said, nodding toward Videl, who was quietly watching them.

Noticing both Gohan and Goten looking at her, Videl hesitated for a second before stepping forward. "Thank you," she said sincerely, looking at both of them. "For saving me."

Gohan blinked at her, scratching the back of his head awkwardly. "There's nothing to thank me for," he said, a little flustered. "I’m Gohan, and this is my brother Goten." He then motioned toward Bulma and Trunks. "That's Bulma, and her son, Trunks."

Videl gave them all a small smile. "It's nice to meet you all, I’m Videl" she said. Turning to Bulma, she bowed her head slightly. "And thank you for healing me."

Bulma waved a hand dismissively. "Don't mention it," she said with a small smile. "I'm just glad you're alright now."

Meanwhile, Goten turned his gaze toward Trunks, who had been standing quietly at the side, watching everything unfold.

Goten studied him for a moment. So this is Trunks, huh? this version has blue hair…

His eyes then flickered toward Shu, Mai, and Pilaf, standing near Trunks.

Wait… what are they doing here? Goten thought. Were they with Bulma in this timeline?

Before he could dwell on it, Bulma walked over and knelt beside him, placing a gentle hand on his shoulder.

"My, my," she said with a nostalgic smile. "You're a carbon copy of your father. You look just like Goku did when I first met him."

Goten blinked before offering a small, shy smile. "Ah, Bulma-san… I've heard about you from Mom and Gohan," he said, nodding respectfully. "Thank you for helping us."

Goten scratched the back of his head before explaining, "I was just following the strongest ki signature I could sense and flew here."

He then turned to Trunks and pointed at him. "That must have been you."

Bulma smiled warmly. "No problem at all, kid."

Bulma noticed Trunks eyeing Goten, curiosity in his expression. Smiling, she decided to formally introduce them. "Trunks, you might not remember, but you and Goten met when you were babies. This is Goten."

Goten waved and said, "Nice to meet you, Trunks."

Trunks looked a bit awkward at first, rubbing the back of his neck. "Nice to meet you too," he said. Then, gesturing toward the trio standing beside him, he added, "These are Mai, Shu, and Pilaf. They’ve been living here for a while now."

Goten nodded and smiled. "It’s nice to meet you all."

Pilaf, still skeptical, crossed his arms. "Did you really fight against the androids?" he asked, raising an eyebrow.

Shu, looking at Goten’s torn and dirt-covered clothes, scratched his head. "Well… those injuries did look real to me."

Trunks, now more serious, looked at Goten. "Are they really that strong?"

Goten grimaced as he thought about the fight. He nodded slowly. "The only reason we even survived… was because they were toying with us," he admitted. "I’m sure next time… we won’t be so lucky." His expression darkened. "And I’m pretty sure they weren’t even using half their power."

Bulma sighed at that, rubbing her temples. “Well… what’s important is that you’re all safe now. That’s all that matters.”

Bulma let out a relieved sigh, placing her hands on her hips. "I’ll call Chi-Chi and let her know that both of you are safe. She must be worried sick."

Gohan scratched the back of his head, feeling guilty. "Thank you, Bulma."

As Bulma left to make the call, Gohan turned to Trunks, finally taking a good look at him. "Oh wow, Trunks—you’re a lot bigger than the last time I saw you," he said with a grin. Then, glancing at the others, he added, "And these must be your friends?"

Trunks nodded and introduced Mai, Shu, and Pilaf to Gohan.

Meanwhile, Goten noticed Videl standing to the side, trying to hold back her tears.

He walked over to her and asked gently, "Hey, how are you holding up?"

Videl forced a small smile and nodded. "I’m okay," she said, though her voice lacked its usual strength.

Goten hesitated for a moment before asking, "Do you… have anywhere to go?"

At that, Videl’s face fell, and she slowly shook her head.

Videl then took a deep breath and explained, "I was part of the Rebellion… but they were all wiped out, just before Gohan showed up." Her hands clenched into fists, her voice trembling as she fought back tears.

Gohan's face fell, his expression filled with guilt. "...I'm sorry about that," he said softly.

Goten thought to himself, 'She doesn't have anywhere to go, and if she’s going to end up with Gohan like in the Super timeline, she should have a way to stay close to him… If she just leaves on her own, who knows if they’ll even meet again?'

With that thought, he looked over at Gohan and smirked. "Hey, Gohan—what do you think about Videl coming with us?"

Gohan blinked in surprise. "Huh?"

Goten continued, "She’d be a lot safer if she stayed with us. Plus, she could learn martial arts from Master Roshi too." He then grinned mischievously and added, "And if you’re going to marry her someday, she should meet Mom, you know."

Gohan immediately turned red. "Wha—?! Goten!" he spluttered, flustered beyond words.

Videl, equally caught off guard, felt her face heat up. "H-Hey! Who said anything about marriage?!" she stammered, glaring at Goten.

Gohan’s face turned red. He immediately grabbed Goten by the head, shaking him roughly. "Stop saying weird stuff, Goten!" he shouted, his embarrassment making him more aggressive.

Gohan then turned back to Videl, clearing his throat. "Just… ignore him. He doesn’t know what he’s talking about," he said, forcing a casual smile.

Still trapped in Gohan’s headlock, Goten struggled, waving his arms. "But isn’t that why you rescued her? Because you like her—?"

Before he could finish, Gohan tightened his grip, nearly choking him.

Goten coughed, his face turning slightly purple before he elbowed Gohan hard in the stomach.

"Ugh!" Gohan grunted in pain, immediately letting go of Goten.

Goten gasped for air, rubbing his neck. "Jeez, learn to take a joke," he muttered.

Just then, Bulma walked back in, holding a phone in her hand. "Hey guys," she said. "I just got off the phone with Chi-Chi. She’s glad you two are okay, but she wants you back home for dinner."

Trunks perked up at that and turned to Gohan and Goten. "Wait… you guys are training to fight the androids?" he asked.

Goten nodded. "Yeah, we’ve been training with Master Roshi for six months now," he confirmed.

Trunks clenched his fists, looking determined. "I also want to help! Can I join you?" he asked, looking directly at Gohan.

Gohan blinked in surprise, then awkwardly looked at Bulma, unsure of what to say.

Trunks turned to his mother, pleading with her. "Mom, please! You know I’m half-Saiyan, just like them. I can help!"

Bulma let out a deep sigh, shaking her head. "It’s too dangerous, Trunks."

"But Mom!" Trunks pleaded, his voice desperate. "It would just be training! I swear I won’t go and fight the androids!"

As the argument between Trunks and Bulma continued, Goten fell deep into thought. "We need a way to go back in time… to get the location of New Namek. But if we defeat the androids too soon, Bulma won’t have a reason to build the time machine." He furrowed his brows, thinking harder. "If I remember correctly, Bulma only started working on the time machine after Gohan’s death. But I’m not planning on letting him die. We need him. And honestly… I’ve grown attached to him." Goten frowned, realizing the problem. "That would mean Bulma won’t build the time machine…"

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 38

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 38

Harry and Hermione gasped, their heads snapping toward Neville in shock. But before they could shout, Neville swiftly flicked his wand at them and muttered, "Silencio."

Both of their mouths opened, but no sound came out. Wide-eyed, they scrambled for their wands, panic flashing in their expressions.

Before they could react further, Neville quickly traced a few glowing words in the air using Flagrate,

"PLEASE DON’T PANIC. I WILL EXPLAIN. JUST GIVE ME A MOMENT."

Harry and Hermione hesitated, exchanging a look before reluctantly lowering their hands from their wands, though their wariness remained.

Neville wasted no time. He stood up, flicked his wand at the compartment door, and whispered, "Colloportus." The door sealed shut, ensuring no unexpected interruptions.

Then, he waved his wand and cast a quiet, "Revelio." A faint glow pulsed through the compartment, scanning for any listening charms or magical surveillance.

When nothing was detected, he followed up with "Muffliato." A subtle buzzing filled the air, ensuring their conversation stayed private.

Finally, he turned back to Harry and Hermione, and murmured, "Finite Incantatem."

The Silencing Charm on both of them lifted.

Neville looked at them both. “I know that looked bad,” he admitted. “But I needed to make sure no one was listening before I said anything.” He raised his hand in a non-threatening gesture.

…

Hermione sucked in a breath, her hands balling into fists. “Neville,” she hissed, her voice sharp but controlled, “you have about ten seconds to explain before I hex you.”

Harry, still gripping his wand tightly, nodded. “Yeah. What the hell was that about?” He gestured to Ron, still slumped unconscious in his seat.

Neville exhaled slowly and raised a hand. “Alright, let me explain—just hear me out,” he said, keeping his voice calm. “Hermione, who escorted you when you went shopping for your school supplies?”

Hermione frowned at the sudden question but answered without hesitation, “Professor McGonagall.”

Neville nodded as if expecting that. “I asked everyone in our year the same question. I even asked the older years and every Muggle-born I could find. They all told me it was always a professor.”

He then turned to Harry. “And you, Harry? Who took you shopping?”

Harry hesitated for a moment. “Hagrid,” he said simply.

Neville nodded again, his expression unreadable. “Right. Why would Hagrid—the Keeper of Keys and Grounds at Hogwarts—be the one to take you shopping?”

Harry blinked. “Well… Hagrid was a friend of my parents,” he said, though there was uncertainty in his voice.

“Maybe,” Neville allowed, “but he’s also Dumbledore’s biggest fanboy.” He leaned forward slightly. “Tell me, Harry, how many times during that trip did Hagrid tell you that Dumbledore was a great wizard? That Dumbledore defeated Grindelwald? That Dumbledore was the greatest headmaster Hogwarts has ever had? That he’s a good person?”

Harry paused, thinking back. “He… did say that a lot,” he admitted. “But that doesn’t mean anything.”

Neville tilted his head. “Doesn’t it?” He turned to Hermione. “Hermione, based on everything Hagrid told Harry, what kind of impression do you think Harry would’ve formed about Dumbledore?”

Hermione’s brow furrowed as she thought about it, then she nodded seriously. “He would have had a favorable opinion of him.”

Harry shook his head, frowning. “But that’s just Hagrid. He’s not like that—he wouldn’t try to manipulate me or anything.”

Neville sighed. “No, Hagrid wouldn’t do it on purpose,” he agreed. “But that’s the point. Hagrid didn’t need to be ordered to do it—he did it involuntarily because of how much he idolizes Dumbledore.”

Harry remained silent, his fingers tightening slightly around his wand.

“Neville… what are you trying to say?” Hermione asked, her voice cautious.

Neville leaned back, crossing his arms. “Harry, think about it—you were isolated from the magical world your whole life. No books, no stories, no anything. The first thing you heard about Dumbledore was from Hagrid, the man who rescued you from the Dursleys and told you that you were a wizard.”

He paused, letting the words sink in before continuing. “And then, you get to Hogwarts, and everything Hagrid told you lines up. Everyone respects Dumbledore. Everyone admires Dumbledore. The teachers—most of them—follow him without question. If someone only told you good things about him, why wouldn’t you think he’s a great man?”

Harry looked down at the book still in his hands. “I don’t know…” he muttered.

Neville let out a small breath before saying, “Alright, let’s move on. Remember when I asked you how you met Mrs. Weasley? You told me that after Hagrid left, you were confused at the station, and she was the one who helped you find Platform 9¾.”

Harry nodded slowly. “Yeah?”

Neville looked at him seriously. “Didn’t you find it odd that she was shouting about Platform 9¾ in the middle of a Muggle train station?”

Harry and Hermione both frowned.

“She went to Hogwarts for seven years herself,” Neville pointed out. “Then another seven years while Bill and Charlie were there. Then Percy, Fred, George—Ron last year.” He raised an eyebrow. “Why would she need to loudly announce the platform she’s used for over a decade?”

Hermione’s mouth parted slightly as realization dawned. “You’re saying… she did it on purpose?”

Neville nodded, watching Harry carefully. “I reckon she was told, Harry,” he said steadily. “She was told to keep an eye out for you.”

Harry shook his head immediately. “That can’t be right,” he muttered, though there was hesitation in his voice. “She was just being nice…”

Neville nodded. “It was too convenient, don’t you think? She just so happened to be there at the exact moment Harry needed help? And instead of quietly showing him the way, she makes a scene?” He looked straight at Harry.

Harry frowned. “But why?”

Neville shrugged “If I had to guess,” he said, “it was to make sure you formed a good opinion of the Weasley family. Dumbledore wanted you close to them. Maybe so you’d be more likely to go there in the summer, or so you’d have a certain group of friends.

Harry blinked, confused. “But what does that—”

Neville pressed on, his voice lowering. “Harry, have you ever noticed that Ron actively made it hard for you to make friends with anyone else?”

Hermione straightened at that, a thoughtful expression crossing her face.

Neville turned to her. “Hermione, don’t tell me you didn’t notice it too. Ron always tried to keep Harry away from us—he constantly distracted him. And whenever someone else tried to befriend Harry, Ron would get… hostile.”

Hermione hesitated before nodding slowly. “Now that you mention it… he did seem to do that.”

Harry’s face twisted with discomfort. “Are you saying Ron was in on this?”

Neville lifted a hand. “I don’t know if he was in on it. He might have been… or he might have been compelled to be your friend and keep you away from others. Or maybe he’s just naturally… possessive.”

He leaned forward slightly, his eyes serious. “But don’t you find it suspicious that for almost half a year, your only friend was the one whose mother was possibly sent to look out for you at King’s Cross?”

Neville said calmly. “And think about it, Harry—what if Ron wasn’t the first person you met? What if you ended up sitting with someone else? Wouldn’t things have turned out differently?”

Harry opened his mouth but hesitated.

Hermione, deep in thought, whispered, “It’s… a little too coincidental, isn’t it?”

“And that’s not all,” Neville continued, his voice gaining an edge. “Think about everything that happened this year—the Stone, the obstacles, Fluffy… Doesn’t it all seem tailored for us four in particular?”

Hermione stiffened. “What do you mean?”

Neville raised his fingers, ticking off the points one by one.

“You, Hermione—you’re brilliant at logic,” he said, gesturing toward her.

“Ron—he’s good at chess,” Neville continued.

“Harry, you’re a natural flyer.”

“And me?” Neville let out a breath. “I defeated the troll.”

Hermione paled.

Neville pressed on, his tone unwavering. “And remember Devil’s Snare? We learned about it in Herbology this year.”

Harry frowned. “Fluffy—”

Neville nodded. “Fluffy? We learned about him from Hagrid. Hagrid, the first person you met from the wizarding world. The one you trust completely.”

Harry’s expression darkened. “But Hagrid wouldn’t—”

Neville gave a small, almost sad smile. “Hagrid wouldn’t do anything on purpose,” he agreed. “But tell me, Harry… who let slip about Fluffy? Who told the wrong person about how to get past him?”

Harry’s breath hitched. “Hagrid…”

Neville nodded. “Exactly.”

Hermione let out a quiet gasp. “Oh my God…”

Neville’s eyes flickered between them, making sure they were following. “Now, ask yourself… does it really seem like a coincidence? Or does it look like we were being set up to go after the Stone?”

Silence filled the compartment.

Harry clenched his fists. “Are you saying… Dumbledore planned all this?”

Hermione swallowed hard. “But why?”

Neville leaned back against his seat. “Manipulated,” he corrected. “Dumbledore has been managing this whole year. He’s been… guiding things to go exactly how he wanted them to.

Neville leaned forward, his tone serious. “You both know that Quirrell was the one after the Stone, right?”

Harry and Hermione both nodded cautiously.

“What if I told you,” Neville continued, “that I knew it was Quirrell since the night in the Forbidden Forest?”

Hermione’s eyes widened in shock. “What?” Harry blurted, his posture straightening.

Neville nodded. “I saw his face before I blacked out.”

Hermione looked stunned. “Then… why didn’t you tell us? Or the professors?”

Neville exhaled. “I did.” He looked between them, his face grim. “When I woke up in the hospital wing, Dumbledore was there with Madam Pomfrey. I told them—both of them—that Quirrell was the one who cursed me.”

Harry frowned. “And?”

Neville’s expression darkened. “Madam Pomfrey was about to call the Aurors. But then… she froze. Like she suddenly forgot what we were talking about. And at the same time, I felt… a haze clouding my thoughts. My mind felt… fuzzy.”

Harry’s brows furrowed. “That doesn’t make sense.”

“When I came to,” Neville continued, “I saw Dumbledore putting his wand away. And suddenly, Madam Pomfrey acted like I’d never even said anything.”

Hermione looked skeptical. “But if Dumbledore erased your memory, then how do you remember it happening?”

Neville reached into his sling bag and pulled out a book. He placed it on the table between them.

“This,” he said, tapping the cover, “is a book on Occlumency. I’ve been practicing since winter break. It protects the mind from Legilimency and helps organize your thoughts.”

Harry frowned. “Legili-what?”

“Legilimency,” Neville explained. “The ability to read minds. Or, more accurately, to invade them—to see into your thoughts, even manipulate them.”

Hermione’s face paled. “Wizards can read minds?” she whispered, horrified.

Neville nodded. “Yeah. And I think that’s why the memory wipe didn’t fully work on me. I’d been practicing Occlumency for a while by then. I didn’t fully block it, but I resisted enough to keep my memories.”

Harry stared at him, completely thrown. “But… why would Dumbledore do that?”

Neville clenched his fists. “Because Dumbledore has been controlling your life, Harry. He’s always known what we were up to. He knew about Norbert. He knew about Quirrell. He knew about everything happening in Hogwarts… and he did nothing to stop it.”

Neville’s expression hardened. “That’s why he sent us into the Forest for detention. He knew Quirrell was hunting unicorns. He knew you’d run into him.”

Hermione gasped softly. “He… wanted Harry and Quirrell to meet?”

Neville nodded. “Quirrell attacking me, and Firenze saving you in the Forbidden Forest, that wasn’t part of Dumbledore’s plan. So, Dumbledore had to allow one last chance—with the Stone. That’s why he left Hogwarts that night—to make sure you followed Quirrell and it all played out exactly as he wanted. No interruptions.”

Harry frowned. “So… you think he was testing me?”

Neville shook his head. “No, Harry. Dumbledore wasn’t just testing you—he’s been manipulating you. Ever since you became an orphan.”

Harry’s face darkened. “What do you mean?”

Neville exhaled, choosing his words carefully. “Dumbledore wanted you to meet Voldemort at the end of the year. He wanted to see if the magic protecting you was still working.”

Hermione gasped. “You mean… he planned this?”

Neville nodded. “Dumbledore spent the whole year making sure you’d confront Voldemort. He tried to set it up in the Forbidden Forest, but Firenze saved you. So, he had to arrange another way—through the Stone.”

Harry’s hands clenched into fists. “But why? Why me?”

Neville looked at him seriously. “Harry, your parents weren’t the only ones Voldemort was after before he was defeated.”

Both Hermione and Harry stared at him, confused.

Neville continued. “Both my parents and your parents went into hiding at the same time. Do you know what they had in common?”

Hermione thought for a moment. “…They both opposed Voldemort?”

Neville nodded. “Yeah. They were both fighting him. And they both had babies—born just one day apart. And both families went into hiding suddenly.” His voice lowered. “According to my Gran, someone told them they should hide because Voldemort was after them.”

He let the words sink in before adding, “Do you want to take a guess who told them?”

Hermione’s face paled. “…Dumbledore.”

Harry looked between them, confused. “What are you saying, Neville?”

Neville exhaled. “I’m saying it was Dumbledore who told both our parents to go into hiding.” He paused before continuing. “I learned from my Gran that my parents were part of a group that fought against Voldemort—an organization that worked directly under Dumbledore. I think your parents were part of it too.”

Harry’s expression darkened, but he stayed quiet, letting Neville continue.

Neville took a breath. “Harry… Voldemort was after us. That’s why our parents went into hiding. He was after you.”

The compartment fell silent for a moment.

Neville then turned to Hermione. “Hermione, what is magic in its purest sense?”

She blinked, caught off guard by the sudden question. “Intent,” she answered automatically.

Neville looked straight at Harry, his voice steady.

"Intent, Harry. The magic that protected you. The magic that rebounded Voldemort’s attack. The magic that burned Quirrell when he touched you—it was intent. A mother’s intent to protect her child.”

Harry’s breath caught. “My mother…” he whispered.

Neville nodded. “Yes, Harry. Your mother protected you because Voldemort was after you.”

Harry shook his head, confusion written across his face. “That… that doesn’t make sense. Why would Voldemort be after me in the first place?”

Neville nodded, as if expecting that question. “Yeah, why would he, huh?” He leaned forward slightly. “Remember, I told you—your parents weren’t the only ones who went into hiding. Mine did too.”

Harry frowned.

Neville continued. “So let’s think about it. What do we have in common, Harry? We were both born around the same time—just one day apart. Both of our parents were part of Dumbledore’s vigilante group. And Voldemort was after both of them.” His eyes narrowed. “Why would he be after two babies?”

Hermione paled. “Unless… it was a prophecy.”

Harry’s head snapped toward her. “A prophecy?”

Neville nodded. “Yeah, Harry. Prophecies in the magical world are real. There’s an entire department for them in the Ministry.” He exhaled. “And I think we—you and me—were part of one.”

Harry’s face twisted in confusion. “A prophecy… about me?”

Neville nodded. “It’s the only reason that makes sense. It had to be about either of us—but in the end, Voldemort chose you.”

Harry’s breath hitched slightly. “Chose… me?”

“The only difference between you and me, Harry,” Neville said, “is that I’m a pureblood, and you’re a half-blood.”

Hermione’s eyes widened. “Wait—you think that’s why Voldemort chose Harry?”

Neville nodded. “It makes sense, doesn’t it? Voldemort despises half-bloods, but he also fears them. Who’s the most powerful wizard Dumbledore ever faced?”

Hermione answered immediately. “Grindelwald.”

“Exactly,” Neville said. “And who’s the most powerful wizard alive now?”

Harry and Hermione exchanged glances before Harry muttered, “…Dumbledore.”

Neville nodded. “And Dumbledore’s a half-blood too.”

Harry swallowed hard. “So you’re saying Voldemort thought… I was the one who could defeat him? Just because I was half-blood?”

Neville exhaled. “It’s possible. If Voldemort believed in the prophecy—if he thought the one who could defeat him would be like Dumbledore, another half-blood—then he had to choose between us. And he chose you.”

Harry stared at the floor, trying to process it all.

Neville continued. “And here’s something else I figured out… I think Voldemort himself is a half-blood.”

Hermione gasped. “What?”

Neville nodded. “Think about it. If he was a pureblood, he would have kept his family name. You know how much purebloods flaunt their blood status. They’re obsessed with their lineages.”

Harry frowned. “But his name is Voldemort.”

Neville shook his head. “That’s a chosen name, Harry. No pureblood family, no matter how twisted, would name their kid ‘Voldemort’. They’d give him a proper wizarding name—one with a legacy, one that ties back to an ancient lineage. But he changed his name. That means he was hiding something.”

Hermione bit her lip. “You think he was ashamed of his real name?”

Neville nodded. “Yeah. Because if he wasn’t a pureblood, that means he wasn’t what his followers thought he was.”

Harem

Should Kaito get a harem?

Kaito Akaden Chapter 157

Kaito Akaden Chapter 157

His thoughts were interrupted as he saw Mangetsu retreating he fled toward the forest. and Yagura was right behind him.

“I need to save him.” Kaito said as he flickered off the tree

Kaito appeared at the scene in an instant.

Mangetsu was barely standing, gripping his severed arm, his face twisted in pain.

Yagura stood atop a tree, his Bijū cloak pulsing, the chakra swirling violently as he began shifting into Version 2.

Without a second thought, Kaito—still in his Kiri shinobi disguise—appeared in front of Yagura.

Before the Mizukage could react, Kaito’s foot crashed into his jaw with immense force, sending Yagura flying backward through the air.

His leg was wrapped in chakra chains, hidden under a genjutsu to prevent recognition of the Uzumaki technique.

The moment Yagura was sent flying, Kaito Body Flickered and vanished. 

He reappeared beside Mangetsu, who barely had time to react before Kaito placed a hand on his shoulder—

And teleported them out of there.

Yagura charged into the clearing, his V2 cloak flickering violently as his eyes scanned the surroundings.

But there was no sign of his opponent.

His chakra slowly powered down, the burning cloak dissipating as he rubbed his jaw, still feeling the force of the hit.

Frowning, Yagura muttered to himself, “Who was that?”

…

In a snow-covered clearing, a tri-pronged kunai stood alone in the center, half-buried in the frost. The moonlight hung over the forest, casting an eerie glow across the silent landscape.

Just then, Kaito—still in his Kiri shinobi disguise—appeared beside the kunai. Along with him were around twenty unconscious people, including babies, all carefully wrapped and suspended in chakra chains, carried gently through the air.

A second Kaito clone appeared, carrying more people. Then another. One after another, clone after clone flickered into the clearing, each bringing more and more rescued civilians, their numbers growing by the second.

As the last few clones arrived, a silence settled over the clearing, broken only by the soft whistling of the cold wind.

One of the Kaito clones sighed, crossing his arms. "So now what? We can't just drop them in the snow and leave, ya know."

Another clone nodded, looking down at a small bundled baby floating in his chakra chains. "Yeah… there are babies here, ya know."

A third clone, standing beside them, scratched the back of his head. "Yeah… we really didn't think this through, huh."

Another clone shook his head. "We couldn't just leave them to die, ya know."

One of the clones rubbed his chin, thinking. "We could take them to a town nearby."

Clone 14 gave him a blank stare and replied flatly, "And then what? They’d just be hunted down and killed."

Clone 12 nodded in agreement. "The Land of Water isn’t safe for them."

Clone 3 frowned, deep in thought. "Plus, Orochimaru is lurking around."

Clone 9 spoke up. "We can take them back to Konoha, ya know."

Clone 4 chuckled. "Lady Tsunade’s reaction would be really funny if we suddenly showed up with a bunch of Kiri clan members."

Clone 2 shook his head. "Be serious. We can’t take them all to Konoha unless they’re willing to go. We can’t just force them to join, ya know. And think about global politics—if Konoha started taking in Kiri clans, it might just spark a war."

One of the clones, gently cradling a Yuki clan baby, spoke up while stroking the child's cheek. "We could take the Yuki clan members. They were treated poorly in the Mist, so they might be open to the idea of living in Konoha as long as they’re treated well. Most of them are civilians and children… there are only sixty of them. We could just say they came seeking refuge."

He glanced over the Yuki clan members and noticed their ragged clothes—worn, torn, barely fit for the cold. His grip on the baby tightened slightly.

"They deserve better. ya know"

Among them were thirty small children, around the ages of three to five, twenty-two women, ranging from twenty to forty-five, and fourteen babies. The women looked frail and weak, their bodies worn down from years of mistreatment.

The other clans they had rescued had around one hundred Genin each, since their Genin were kept out of the coup battle. There were fifteen Chūnin per clan, all of whom had been guarding the civilians. Among the non-combatants, there were about a hundred children, also between the ages of three to five, along with forty to fifty women, ranging from nineteen to forty years old. The clans also had ten to fifteen elders among them.

Clone 11 spoke up. “We could take them all to the Land of Tea or one of the other neutral countries.”

Clone 5 shook his head. “I doubt they’d want to stay there, especially the Terumi and Hōzuki clans. And even if they did, if word got out that members of their clans were hiding there, the Raikage wouldn’t just let them be. He’d force them into Kumo, turn them into Jōnin and—” he grimaced, “—breeding stock.” His expression darkened. “And let’s not forget Danzo. He’d kill off the adults and recruit the kids into Root.”

Clone 1 rubbed his face in frustration. “This is a mess. You know what the best part is? The boss doesn’t even know what we did yet.”

Clone 7 sighed. “Whatever we do, we need to decide soon, or they might freeze to death.”

Clone 14 let out a breath. “One of us has to dispel ourselves and inform the boss.”

Everyone nodded. Clone 6 carefully transferred the unconscious people he was carrying to the others, ensuring they were all secured. Once everyone was safely handed off, he dispelled himself in a puff of smoke.

Clone 13 shrugged. “Well, all we can do now is wait.”

Just then, the lead clone arrived in the field—with someone in tow.

Clone 5 threw his hands in the air and groaned. “Oh, come on!”

…

In a snow-covered town, the streets were illuminated by softly glowing lanterns as people went about their daily lives.

Inside a yakiniku shop, Kaito sat in a booth alongside Hotaru, Haku, Kimimaro, and Guren. The warmth of the restaurant contrasted with the cold outside, the scent of sizzling meat filling the air.

A serving lady approached their table, carefully placing their order down. "Here you go," she said with a polite smile.

Hotaru nodded and said, "Thank you. Come on, everyone, let’s eat!" She clapped her hands together, eager to start.

Haku looked at the grill, then at Kaito. "Umm… so we just place the meat on the grill and eat it?"

Kaito nodded. "Yeah, just wait for it to cook, then you can eat."

Hotaru smiled. "Here, let me make them for you three." She placed some pieces of thinly sliced meat onto the hot grill, the sizzling sound filling the booth.

Kimimaro watched curiously as Hotaru flipped the meat and asked, "Why are you flipping them?"

Hotaru glanced at him and replied, "To cook the other side."

Once the meat was done, Hotaru placed a piece onto their plates. "Here, try it."

Guren poked the meat with her chopsticks, her expression uncertain. "Is it cooked?"

Kaito nodded. "Yeah, it’s cut thin, so it cooks fast. Go on, try it."

Haku clasped his hands. "Thank you for the food," he said before picking up a piece with his chopsticks and eating it. His eyes brightened as he hummed in satisfaction. "It’s good."

Kimimaro silently took a piece and ate it without saying anything, his face neutral as he chewed.

Guren, seeing the others eating, took a small nibble, still skeptical.

Hotaru leaned in slightly, watching her. "So? How is it?"

Guren nodded. "It’s good."

Hotaru smiled. "You can eat it with rice or wrap it in lettuce leaves too."

Kaito took a piece of meat, bringing his chopsticks to his mouth—

Then suddenly froze mid-bite, his eyes widening in shock.

Hotaru immediately noticed and, using the communication seal, asked, "Kai-kun, what happened?"

Kaito internally groaned before responding through the seal. "I have to take care of something. You guys finish up, and when I come back, we’re leaving."

Hotaru’s face turned serious, but she simply nodded. "Just be careful."

Kaito quickly stood up and sighed. "Oh, shit, I forgot to buy something. I need to get to the shop before they close," he said, making an excuse.

Hotaru nodded. "Oh, okay. Be back soon."

Kaito gave her a quick nod before rushing out of the shop.

Kaito slipped into an alleyway, making sure no one was following him.

He let out a frustrated groan. "Stupid clones," he muttered before channeling chakra into his communication seal, trying to contact Kakashi—but there was no response.

He sighed, running a hand through his hair in frustration. 'Why isn’t Kakashi answering?'

Taking a deep breath, Kaito muttered to himself, "Okay, I need to calm down and think." Closing his eyes, he steadied his breathing.

"I can't blame them. I would have done the same thing…. Now what should I do?"

Just then, another wave of memories from his clones flooded into his mind.

Kaito sighed, already knowing this was going to be a headache. he created a shadow clone, and both of them teleported away using Hiraishin.

…

Back in the clearing, Mangetsu instinctively jumped back the moment he arrived. His eyes darted around, scanning his surroundings.

The Kaito clone who had brought him there dispelled, sending all its memories to the original.

As Mangetsu took in the surroundings his eyes widened. Dozens of Kiri shinobi stood before him—no, not shinobi. Clones. They all wore disguises, and from their backs, golden chakra chains extended, restraining unconscious people. he recognized his brother, his Hōzuki clan members, and among them, the Terumi and Yuki clans.

His gaze landed on Mei Terumi, knocked out among them.

Then his eyes snapped to the chakra chains. His expression hardened as recognition hit him.

"Those chains… Uzumaki."

Just then, the original Kaito arrived, landing right beside the Hiraishin marker in the clearing.

Mangetsu immediately pointed Hiramekarei at the group, his stance aggressive. "What do you think you’re doing, Uzumaki?" His voice was sharp, demanding answers.

Kaito sighed, barely sparing him a glance as he looked over the scene. "What does it look like? I saved your ass from getting killed."

Mangetsu’s arm reformed, the water-like consistency still unsteady from his earlier injury. He clutched his sword with both hands, eyes narrowing further. "Why are you in the Land of Water? And why the hell do you have them here? Explain."

Kaito exhaled, rolling his shoulders lazily. "Relax, would you? I'd rather not explain this twice."

He turned just in time to see Mei Terumi stirring.

She groaned, rubbing her head as she blinked herself awake. The last thing she remembered—the genjutsu, the sealing technique, and that Kiri shinobi…

Her eyes snapped open fully, shinobi instincts kicking in instantly. She took in her surroundings, her breath sharpening as she immediately righted herself into a defensive stance.

The Kaito clone keeping her restrained released her from the chakra chains. The moment she was free, she jumped away, distancing herself from the group.

The Kaito clone released Mei from the chakra chains. The moment she was free, she jumped back, eyes scanning the surroundings frantically.

"What did you do?! Where are we?!" she demanded.

Kaito sighed, rubbing the back of his head. "Would you both calm down?" His tone remained calm but firm. "As for where we are—this is one of the smaller islands near the Land of Water. And as for why we’re here? I saved you all from getting wiped out."

Mei’s eyes narrowed. "What do you mean by ‘saved us’?"

Then her eyes widened, as a terrifying thought hit her. "You said Yagura knew about the coup d’état?"

Kaito nodded before glancing at Mangetsu. "As you might’ve noticed by now, Yagura was expecting it."

Mangetsu’s expression darkened. Lowering his sword slightly, he nodded. "He was waiting for us… It was a trap."

Kaito crossed his arms. "Exactly. As for why I’m here, it’s part of a mission—I was sent to assess the situation in the Land of Water. While gathering intel, I witnessed the Kaguya clan incident. I didn’t think the Mizukage would wipe out the entire clan, but he did… and I knew that if I didn’t do anything, many more lives would be lost."

Mangetsu’s eyes narrowed again. "Why would you risk a war just to help us? How do we know you weren’t the one who informed the Mizukage?"

Kaito shrugged. "I couldn’t let literal children die, just because they’re from another village. If I wanted to betray you, I could’ve just let Yagura kill you and taken the kids back to Konoha myself."

Mei’s gaze sharpened. "Then why didn’t you warn us before the coup?"

Kaito raised an eyebrow. "And risk a full-scale war between Konoha and Kiri? Or worse, be labeled a rogue shinobi? Even if I had told you, would you have even believed me?"

Mangetsu looked at the restrained civilians and gestured to them. "Then why haven’t you let them down yet?"

Kaito smirked slightly, raising an eyebrow. "And what? Drop them in the snow?"

Mei sighed, rubbing her head. "If Yagura planned this whole thing, then we just gave him a reason to exterminate the clans."

Kaito’s expression turned serious as he crossed his arms. "There’s another thing you both should know."

Mei looked at him cautiously. "What?"

"The Mizukage isn’t himself," Kaito said firmly. "He’s being controlled."

Goten Chapter 9

Goten Chapter 9

"Damn it, I can’t see!" Android 17 cursed, covering his face.

Goten wasted no time.

Spreading his arms wide, he gathered the floating ki blasts he had fired earlier, all still hovering in the air. With a sharp motion, he clapped his hands together.

"Hellzone Grenade!"

The ki blasts locked onto the blinded androids and shot toward them like a relentless storm.

A massive series of explosions detonated across the battlefield, shaking the very ground.

Smoke and fire engulfed the area.

Not hesitating for a second, Goten shot forward, grabbing both Gohan and Videl. Gritting his teeth, he took off at max speed, pushing himself beyond his limits.

‘I just need to get us out of here…’ he thought.

But then pain. A searing blast ripped through the air. Android 18, even blinded, had fired her charged ki blast.

The attack barely grazed Goten, but it was enough to burn through his back.

"WAAH!" he screamed, his muscles screaming in agony. Despite the searing pain in his back, despite his body screaming at him to stop, Goten refused to falter.

With everything he had left, he clutched Gohan and Videl tighter, gritting his teeth. "I have to get them out of here..." He flew as fast as possible.

….

Goten flew as fast as he could over the vast ocean, the wind howling past him. His arms ached, weighed down by the unconscious Gohan and the injured Videl. His vision blurred, his eyelids heavy, but he forced himself to stay awake.

Just a little further…

He had no idea how far he had flown or even which direction he was heading. His mind was hazy, his body screaming in exhaustion. The only thing guiding him was the faint ki signature he sensed in the distance—the closest strong energy he could find.

…

Parsley City lay in ruins. Skyscrapers had collapsed, their steel and concrete skeletons exposed. Fires burned uncontrollably, sending thick plumes of smoke into the sky. Streets were nothing but shattered pavement and rubble. What was once a thriving metropolis had been reduced to nothing more than a graveyard.

The silence was broken by shifting debris. With a grunt, Android 17 shoved a massive slab of concrete aside and climbed out of the wreckage. He dusted himself off, his face impassive. "Well… I wasn’t expecting that."

Behind him, an explosion erupted. The ground shook as Android 18 stomped forward, emerging from the destruction, her clothes torn and tattered. Her fists trembled with fury.

"ARGHHH! Where is that twerp?!" she shrieked, her voice echoing through the ruins. Rage radiated off her in waves.

"He’s long gone, if I had to guess," 17 said, stretching his arms casually. He let out a small chuckle, shaking his head. "Looks like he outsmarted both of us, huh?"

18 growled, her fingers curling into tight fists. "Next time I see that brat, I’m going to kill him!"

17 brushed the dust off his clothes, his expression thoughtful. "We really underestimated him," he admitted. "That kid had been planning that move the whole time."

Her frustration boiling over, 18 turned and fired a ki blast, completely annihilating the remains of a nearby building. The structure crumbled, sending debris flying as dust clouds filled the air.

17 sighed. "Come on, 18. We’re just wasting our time here. They’re long gone. We’ll get them next time." His arms folded across his chest as he began to float upward.

18 scowled, glaring at the sky as if she could see where Goten had fled. "Fine," she muttered, her voice laced with venom. "But next time, we’re not playing around."

As she ascended to join him, 17 smirked slightly. "That’s fine by me… but before we go—" He turned to the shattered city below, tilting his head. "Want to blow up the place?"

18 let out an exasperated sigh. "Let’s just get this over with." as she floated next to him

Without hesitation, the two raised their hands, ki energy surging in their palms.

Then they fired.

The blasts struck the city, detonating on impact. A massive explosion engulfed what remained of Parsley City. Flames erupted into the sky, and the force of the blast tore through the ground, sending a shockwave that could be felt miles away.

When the smoke and fire finally cleared, all that remained was a massive, gaping crater.

17 smirked, nodding in satisfaction. "Well, that takes care of that," he said before turning and flying off.

18 followed, arms still folded, her rage barely contained.

….

West City was in ruins. Some parts of the city had been completely destroyed, but life still clung on. People roamed the streets cautiously, trying to rebuild what they could. Small shops remained open, selling whatever supplies they had left. Despite the devastation, the city was still standing.

The Capsule Corp building, however, had not been spared. Its once-pristine dome now had half its roof destroyed, a grim reminder of the androids’ relentless attacks.

Deep in the basement of Capsule Corp, Bulma finished cooking as she dumped a fresh batch of stir-fried meat onto a plate. She wore a plain white t-shirt and red pants, her blue hair tied back to keep it out of her face.

Behind her, Trunks, now eight years old, sat at the dining table, staring at the radio. Next to him, a small girl with long black hair, Mai, listened closely. A dog in a purple jumpsuit, Shu, fidgeted with his chopsticks, while a small blue-skinned boy wearing yellow, Pilaf, sat nervously, his eyes darting toward the static-filled radio. The room was quiet except for the crackling of the signal, which had been nothing but static for a while.

Pilaf frowned and asked, "What’s going on? It’s been static for a while now."

Mai adjusted her position and said, "Maybe the equipment got damaged or something."

Just then, the signal reconnected. A grim voice came through the speakers.

"We are sad to report that Parsley City is no more. It’s a tragedy. The androids have completely wiped it off the map. There is nothing left. Only a massive crater where the city once stood."

The table fell silent.

Pilaf’s face paled as he whispered, "They destroyed an entire city…?"

Trunks clenched his fists, his face darkening. "How could they…?"

Bulma walked over and placed a large bowl of stir-fried meat onto the table. She let out a deep sigh, her expression troubled. "Those androids are getting out of hand…" she muttered.

She handed everyone a bowl of rice. "Eat up, everyone," she said, trying to keep her voice steady.

Mai, Shu, and Pilaf quickly muttered, "Thank you for the meal," before digging in.

But Trunks didn’t touch his food. He kept staring at the radio, his mind racing.

Bulma noticed immediately. "Trunks, baby, aren’t you going to eat?" she asked gently.

Trunks finally looked up at her, his blue eyes filled with worry. "Mom… do you think Gohan made it out?"

His hands balled into fists. "He was fighting the androids…"

Shu, Mai, and Pilaf stopped eating, all turning to look at Trunks and Bulma.

Bulma sighed and placed her bowl down on the table. She reached out and gently patted Trunks’ head.

"I know you're worried, but Gohan is strong," she said softly. "He’s been fighting those androids for years. If anyone can survive, it’s him. We have to believe in him."

Trunks didn’t look convinced. "But… it’s the androids," he muttered, his voice filled with doubt.

Bulma reached over and gently patted his head. "We have to believe in him, Trunks," she said softly.

Trunks nodded slowly. The tension in his shoulders eased slightly, and a small smile formed on his face. Without another word, he picked up his bowl and started eating.

As soon as Trunks began shoveling food into his mouth, Pilaf and Shu quickly followed suit, trying to keep up.

After finishing their meals, Pilaf, Mai, and Shu let out satisfied sighs and leaned back in their chairs, patting their full bellies.

Bulma chuckled at the sight. "There’s more if you want," she offered.

Trunks, still hungry, nodded and held out his bowl. "I’ll have some more, Mom."

Bulma smiled and stood up. "Alright, let me get you some."

Just as Trunks handed her his bowl, he suddenly froze. His body stiffened, and his eyes widened in alarm.

Bulma immediately noticed and frowned. "Trunks? What is it?" she asked, her voice turning serious.

Pilaf, Mai, and Shu exchanged nervous glances, sensing the sudden shift in the atmosphere.

Trunks swallowed hard and said, "I can sense three ki signatures… they’re heading straight for us. They’re weak, but they’re coming fast."

Bulma's face paled. Without hesitation, she turned and ran towards the monitoring room.

Trunks, Mai, Pilaf, and Shu quickly followed after her.

...

Goten was barely holding on to his consciousness as he flew closer to the large ki signature he had sensed. His arms ached, his body felt numb, and he could hardly support the weight of the two people he was carrying.

His vision blurred as he blinked, trying to stay awake. In the distance, a large, semi-circular building came into view. The structure was yellow, though it had clearly seen better days—part of the roof was missing, and the exterior was damaged.

Even in his exhausted state, Goten recognized it immediately. T-That’s... Capsule Corp...

"Almost... there..." he thought, but his vision was fading again. His arms felt like they were going to give out. He gritted his teeth, trying to fight off unconsciousness. "No... I can’t... pass out..." he muttered under his breath.

With one final push, he made it to the building, but his body could take no more. His grip failed, and he dropped Gohan. At the last second, he twisted himself mid-air, ensuring his back hit the ground first to cushion Videl’s landing.

They crashed down hard, Goten sprawled across the ground as darkness finally overtook him.

Videl groaned in pain, gasping as she slowly sat up. Every inch of her body ached, and her broken arm throbbed. Looking over, she saw the two brothers lying still.

With great effort, she pushed herself up and limped toward them, clutching her injured arm. She checked on Goten first, placing her fingers near his nose and feeling the soft breath of air. "Still breathing..." she whispered in relief.

She then moved to Gohan, checking his pulse. "He’s alive, but..." she bit her lip, her expression tightening. "They need medical attention—fast."

Her eyes darted to the massive building in front of her. It looked like it was still in use. There might be people inside who can help.

Gritting her teeth, she forced herself to move, limping toward the entrance while clutching her arm.

…

Bulma sat in her chair, eyes fixed on the live CCTV footage displayed on the screen in front of her.

Her fingers tightened on the edge of the console when she spotted three figures lying outside the building.

She quickly zoomed in.

Trunks, standing beside her, furrowed his brows. "Who are they, Mom?" he asked.

Bulma adjusted the screen, focusing on a girl kneeling over two injured figures. Her breath hitched when she realized who they were.

"That’s Gohan... and..." she trailed off, recognizing the second boy immediately.

Without wasting another second, she stood up. "Come on, you guys—I need your help!" she said urgently.

Hearing that it was Gohan, Trunks immediately ran after her without hesitation.

…

Videl finally reached the entrance of the building. Spotting a security camera, she called out, "Is anyone in there?! Please, we need help!"

For a moment, there was only silence.

Then, with a loud metallic clank, the door slid open.

Bulma rushed out, followed closely by Trunks, Mai, Shu, and Pilaf.

Videl’s legs almost gave out in relief when she saw them. Her gaze quickly landed on Bulma, and she staggered forward. "Please, ma’am! They need help—both of them are seriously injured!" she pleaded, motioning to the two brothers sprawled on the ground.

Bulma gasped as she ran to them, immediately kneeling beside Goten. She placed her hands on his face, checking his breathing, then quickly moved to Gohan. "Oh, Gohan... what did you get yourself into this time?" she whispered, her heart clenching at the sight of him.

Trunks stood over Gohan, his voice tense. "Are they okay, Mom?" he asked, then turned his gaze toward Goten, noticing how much he looked like his father.

Bulma let out a sigh, shaking her head. "They’re in bad shape... We need to get them inside, now." She looked up at her son. "Trunks, you carry Gohan. I’ll take Goten."

Videl took a step forward, about to help Trunks lift Gohan, but to her surprise, Trunks bent down and effortlessly hoisted Gohan onto his back.

Bulma, now carrying Goten, turned to Videl. "Come on!" she urged.

With urgency, they all made their way inside.

Bulma led them straight to the medical room, quickly instructing Trunks to place Gohan on the operating table.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 37

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 37

Dumbledore raised his hand for silence. “Last, but not least—to Mr. Harry Potter… for pure nerve and outstanding courage, I award Gryffindor twenty-five points.”

There was a moment of stunned silence, and then the hall exploded. Anyone outside the Great Hall might have thought a bomb had gone off. The roar of celebration was so loud that Neville was sure they could hear it in Hogsmeade.

Harry, Ron, and Hermione leapt up, cheering. Neville quietly slipped back from the table a bit, watching the wild celebration unfold.

Dumbledore’s voice rang out over the uproar. “Which means,” he called, beaming, “we need a little change of decoration.”

With a clap of his hands, the Slytherin banners draped high above them dissolved into the scarlet of Gryffindor. The silver snakes transformed into golden lions that roared from the cloth.

“And now,” Dumbledore concluded, “let us eat!”

As the cheers finally diminished and everyone took their seats, the feast appeared: platters of roast chicken, mashed potatoes, buttered corn, and countless other delicious dishes.

Neville returned to sit beside Hermione, who was practically glowing. “Can you believe it, Neville? We won!”

Neville picked up a piece of chicken. “Yeah,” he said quietly, taking a bite.

He could believe it.

He’d seen it coming all along.

…

Neville stepped into the first-year dormitory, towel slung over his head as he briskly dried his damp hair. He was dressed casually in a t-shirt and long pants, comfortable for the journey ahead. The room was still quiet, save for the occasional rustling of blankets and soft snores from Ron’s bed.

Seamus let out a wide yawn as he stretched and nodded at Neville while grabbing his own towel. "Morning, mate," he mumbled sleepily before trudging off towards the showers.

Neville nodded back. "Morning, mate," he replied, watching as Seamus disappeared out the door.

Ron was still out cold, sprawled across his mattress, one arm draped dramatically over his face as he snored softly. Shaking his head, Neville walked over to his trunk and slung his towel over one shoulder. He reached for his wand from his nightstand and gave it a flick.

A warm breeze stirred around his head, quickly drying his hair. "Much better," he muttered in satisfaction. With another flick, he dried his towel before tossing it into his dirty clothes bag.

Just as he shut his trunk, Harry walked in from his shower, his hair still damp and sticking up in every direction as usual.

"All packed?" Harry asked, rubbing his neck as he grabbed his own bag.

Neville nodded. "Yeah," he said simply, then glanced over at Ron’s still-sleeping form. "You better wake him up, or he might miss the train."

Harry let out a sigh and walked over to Ron’s bed. He gave Ron’s shoulder a shake. "Ron, mate, wake up," he called, keeping his voice level. "You’re going to miss the train."

Ron groaned, shifting slightly under his blankets. "What train?" he mumbled, trying to bury his face deeper into his pillow.

Harry rolled his eyes. "The train from Hogsmeade. You’re going to be late."

Neville smirked and chimed in, "And you haven’t even packed yet, mate. Better hurry up, or you’ll miss breakfast too."

That seemed to get Ron’s attention. His eyes cracked open groggily, and he blinked blearily at them. "Right, right, I’m up," he muttered, stifling a yawn before stretching his arms. "Blimey, I stayed up too late last night."

Shuffling off his bed, Ron grabbed his towel and staggered toward the bathroom.

Neville chuckled and shook his head before turning back to his trunk. With a flick of his wand, he cast, "Reducio," shrinking it down to a size small enough to fit in his sling bag. He tucked it away and slung his sling bag over his shoulder.

"All done, I’m heading down. You coming, mate?" he asked, running a hand through his hair as he glanced at Harry.

Harry shook his head as he stuffed his clothes into his trunk. "No, I still have a few things to pack. I’ll wait for Ron."

"Then I’ll head down first. I’m starving. I’ll wait for you in the Great Hall." With that, Neville gave him a quick nod and headed out the door.

The Gryffindor common room was still lively, though not as packed as usual. Most students had already made their way down to the Great Hall for breakfast or were waiting by the carriages to head to the train. As Neville stepped inside, he spotted Hermione by the notice board, standing with a few older students who were peering at a freshly pinned parchment.

Curious, Neville walked over, rubbing a bit of sleep from his eyes. “Morning, Hermione. What are you up to?” he asked, stifling a yawn.

Hermione jumped slightly, turning around with wide eyes. “Neville! You scared me,” she said, pressing a hand to her chest before letting out a small huff. “And good morning to you too.”

Neville chuckled. “Sorry about that. Didn’t mean to sneak up on you.” His gaze flicked to the notice board. “What’s this about?”

“Professor McGonagall just posted the final rankings for the year,” Hermione said, nodding toward the parchment.

At that, Neville perked up. “Oh, right—the end-of-year rankings.” He leaned in to get a closer look. “So, I take it you came top?”

Hermione’s face turned slightly pink with pride, and she nodded excitedly. “Yep! First place,” she confirmed.

Neville scanned the list and let out a low whistle when he spotted her name right at the top. “Well done. Congratulations,” he said, giving her an approving nod.

“Thanks, Neville,” she said, beaming. “But you didn’t do too badly yourself.” She pointed at the rankings. “Look—you came in sixth!”

Following her finger, Neville’s eyes landed on his name, ranked just below Susan Bones from Hufflepuff. “Huh,” he muttered, surprised. “Not bad at all.”

He read through the list quickly.

1 Hermione Granger – Gryffindor
2 Terry Boot – Ravenclaw
3 Daphne Greengrass – Slytherin
4 Padma Patil – Ravenclaw
5 Susan Bones – Hufflepuff
6 Neville Longbottom – Gryffindor
7 Anthony Goldstein – Ravenclaw

“Well, looks like Ravenclaw dominates the rankings,” Neville mused.

“Well, of course,” Hermione said matter-of-factly. “They are Ravenclaws.”

Ignoring the other rankings, Neville moved his attention to his own subject grades.

Transfiguration – O (Outstanding)
Charms – O (Outstanding)
Potions – EE (Exceeds Expectations)
Defence Against the Dark Arts – O (Outstanding)
Herbology – O (Outstanding)
History of Magic – A (Acceptable)
Astronomy – A (Acceptable)

Neville raised an eyebrow. “Huh. Didn’t think I’d get an O from Quirrell… and Snape actually gave me an EE? That’s surprising. I expected him to mark me lower just out of spite.”

“Not bad at all,” Hermione said, glancing over his shoulder. “You aced all the practical subjects, and honestly, EE in Potions is impressive considering who teaches it.”

Neville chuckled. “Yeah, I half expected to see a ‘T’ for Troll next to Potions.”

Hermione giggled but then nudged him playfully. “You’re just as bad as Ron sometimes,” she said, though she looked pleased.

Neville smirked, rolling his eyes. “I’ll take that as a compliment.” Shaking his head, he glanced at Hermione’s name and, as expected, saw a perfect row of O’s next to her subjects.

Letting out a low whistle, he smirked and reached over to pat her on the head. “And, of course, you got all O’s. Congrats, Hermione.”

Hermione flushed, swatting his hand away with an annoyed huff. “Stop that, Neville,” she scolded, though the pink on her cheeks betrayed her pride.

Neville chuckled at her reaction, but then Hermione glanced around, her brow furrowing. “Where’s your luggage? Didn’t you bring it with you?”

Grinning, Neville patted his sling bag. “Got it right here,” he said smugly. “Shrunk it down to make it easier to carry.”

Hermione’s eyes widened in realization before she groaned and smacked her forehead. “Why didn’t I think of that?” she muttered. “It would’ve been so much easier than lugging around a giant trunk.”

Pulling out her wand, she quickly cast, “Reducio,” and her trunk shrank down to a pocketable size.

Neville smirked. “Just remember to enlarge it before getting off at Platform 9¾,” he warned playfully. “Or else you’ll be stuck with a shrunken trunk for the whole summer. Hermione without books! That would be a tragedy.”

Hermione shot him a glare and smacked his arm lightly. “Prat,” she muttered, though a smile tugged at her lips.

Neville turned back to the rankings, his curiosity piqued. “I wonder where Harry and Ron placed,” he mused aloud, scanning further down the list.

Hermione, who had already checked, answered, “They both passed. That’s what matters, or they might have had to repeat the year.”

Neville finally found their names—Harry was ranked 18th, while Ron was at 25th. He yawned, stretching his arms. “Well, at least they didn’t fail,” he said, grinning. “Could’ve been worse.”

Turning back to Hermione, he rubbed his stomach. “Fancy heading to the Great Hall? I’m starving.”

Hermione nodded, slipping her now-shrunken trunk into her pocket. “Let’s go,” she agreed.

With that, the two made their way out of the common room, ready for their last breakfast at Hogwarts before the summer break.

….

After breakfast, the students were escorted to Hogsmeade Station by the Thestral-drawn carriages. Neville fed an apple to one pulling his carriage when Harry, Ron, and Hermione weren’t paying attention.

As the carriage came to a stop, Neville stepped down first and turned, offering Hermione a hand to help her down. She accepted with a small nod of thanks.

Ron, hopping off the carriage with a grunt, glanced at the two of them before his eyes narrowed. “Huh… I just noticed—where are your trunks? Did you forget them or something?”

Hermione patted her pocket. “Oh, it’s all here, Ron. Much easier than dragging that great box around.”

Harry, dragging his heavy trunk behind him, looked over and said, “Yeah, I saw Neville shrinking his trunk earlier.”

Ron’s jaw dropped. “What?! And you didn’t do that for us? That’s not fair—now both of you don’t even have to carry your trunks!”

Hermione rolled her eyes. “Ron, we are carrying our trunks.”

Ron glared at her. “You know that’s not what I meant! It’s unfair that the two of you shrunk yours and we didn’t!”

Hermione simply shrugged. “Well, whose fault is it that you two didn’t join us when we were practicing the spell?”

Neville raised an eyebrow. “You know, even if you didn’t know the shrinking charm, both of you could have just levitated your trunks with the Levitation Charm.”

Harry blinked and sighed. “Huh, I didn’t think of that…”

Ron threw his hands up. “Now you tell me—after I’ve dragged this thing all the way here?!”

Neville just shrugged, fighting back a grin. “You didn’t ask, mate. Not my fault.”

Hermione giggled at Ron’s grumbling as they walked toward the train, Ron muttering under his breath the entire way.

As they stepped onto the platform, Neville spotted Hagrid standing off to the side, towering over the students with his usual warm smile.

Harry noticed too and turned to them. “You guys go on ahead—I want to speak with Hagrid for a bit.”

“Yeah, sure, mate,” Neville shrugged, giving Hagrid a wave as they passed by. Hagrid waved back at them before turning his attention to Harry.

Neville, Hermione, and Ron boarded the train and began walking down the corridor, peeking into compartments. Most were already filling up, but after a bit of searching, they found an empty one near the back.

Neville quickly slid the door open and grinned. “Dibs on the seat next to the window!” he declared, plopping himself down before anyone could argue.

Hermione rolled her eyes but took the seat next to him without complaint, while Ron flopped onto the seat opposite them, still grumbling after he heaved his trunk onto the overhead rack.

Hermione looked out the window, watching the platform bustle with students. She sighed softly. “Feels strange going home, doesn’t it?”

Ron nodded. “Yeah, I get you,” he admitted. “It feels weird after spending almost an entire year at Hogwarts.”

Neville shrugged. “I’d say the same, but for me, it’s a bit different. You know… with the lost memory and all,” he said, tapping his temple. “The only memory of home I really have is the one from winter break.”

Hermione’s expression softened. “That must be difficult,” she murmured.

Neville gave a small, lopsided smile. “Eh, I manage.”

A while later, the compartment door slid open, and Harry walked in, carrying a large book in one hand, Hedwig’s cage in the other, while his trunk floated behind him.

Ron’s eyes landed on the book Harry was holding. “What’s that you’ve got, Harry?” he asked curiously.

Harry sat down next to Ron and lifted the book, flipping through the pages. “It’s a photo album. Hagrid reached out to some of my parents’ old friends and put this together for me.”

Hermione smiled warmly. “That was really thoughtful of Hagrid, Harry.”

Harry nodded, his fingers gently brushing over one of the photos. “Yeah… before, thanks to Neville I had pictures of my mum—but now I’ve got some of my dad too.”

The train gave a long whistle as it started picking up speed. Harry glanced out the window and waved at Hagrid, who stood on the platform, giving them a broad smile and a wave in return. With a small sigh, Harry finally settled into his seat, placing the album carefully on his lap.

Neville stayed quiet, watching as the Hogwarts Express sped past Hogsmeade, the familiar sight of the village quickly fading into the distance. The rhythmic clatter of the wheels filled the air, a steady reminder that their first year was now behind them.

His gaze shifted to Ron, who was now animatedly chatting with Harry about Quidditch.

‘Now’s as good a time as any.’ Without drawing attention, Neville slid a hand into his robes, and discreetly took out his wand, aiming at Ron. He flicked it slightly and whispered, "Stupefy."

A red jet of light shot out, striking Ron square in the chest before he could react. His body slumped back against the seat, completely unconscious.

Harry and Hermione gasped, their heads snapping toward Neville in shock. But before they could shout, Neville swiftly flicked his wand at them and muttered, "Silencio."

Both of their mouths opened, but no sound came out. Wide-eyed, they scrambled for their wands, panic flashing in their expressions.

Before they could react further, Neville quickly traced a few glowing words in the air using Flagrate,

"PLEASE DON’T PANIC. I WILL EXPLAIN. JUST GIVE ME A MOMENT."

Harry and Hermione hesitated, exchanging a look before reluctantly lowering their hands from their wands, though their wariness remained.

Neville wasted no time. He stood up, flicked his wand at the compartment door, and whispered, "Colloportus." The door sealed shut, ensuring no unexpected interruptions.

Then, he waved his wand and cast a quiet, "Revelio." A faint glow pulsed through the compartment, scanning for any listening charms or magical surveillance.

When nothing was detected, he followed up with "Muffliato." A subtle buzzing filled the air, ensuring their conversation stayed private.

Finally, he turned back to Harry and Hermione, and murmured, "Finite Incantatem."

The Silencing Charm on both of them lifted.

Neville looked at them both. “I know that looked bad,” he admitted. “But I needed to make sure no one was listening before I said anything.” He raised his hand in a non-threatening gesture.

New Update Schedule

Hey everyone! Here’s the new upload schedule going forward:

Monday: Kaito Akaden

Tuesday: A Neville SI

Wednesday: Goten

Thursday: Kaito Akaden

Friday: A Neville SI

Saturday: Goten

Kaito Akaden Chapter 156

Kaito Akaden Chapter 156

Then, his chakra surged violently.

A dark red aura erupted around him, the oppressive presence of his bijū chakra filling the air.

A translucent red chakra cloak began to form around his body.

Mangetsu’s eyes narrowed. "He's using his Bijū mode… I can’t win this." He could already sense Mist shinobi approaching from the distance—loyalists answering their Mizukage’s call.

Mangetsu made his decision.

But before he could act, he was suddenly bisected in two—only for both halves to turn into water.

Yagura scoffed. “A water clone, huh?”

Taking advantage of the distraction, the real Mangetsu darted through the forest surrounding the Hidden Mist Village. However, he didn’t get far. Just as he reached the treeline, he was forced to dodge a circular blade of water.

He barely twisted out of the way, but not fast enough—the blade cleanly severed his left arm. Mangetsu gritted his teeth, clutching the dripping remains of his limb as water pooled on the ground.

Looking up, he saw Yagura standing atop a tree, still cloaked in his bijū chakra. Yagura’s voice echoed through the mist, cold and taunting. “You think you can get away from me that easily?”

….

Kaito stood up from the tree branch, his sharp eyes scanning the Hidden Mist Village below. His mind was a mess of thoughts, weighing his options carefully.

He clenched his fists, his jaw tightening. "They’re going to get themselves killed if I don’t do anything... but—" He hesitated, doubt creeping in. "Should I really interfere with another village’s affairs? If I get caught... it could lead to war."

His eyes darkened as another thought surfaced. "Knowing Obito, he might just use it as an excuse to start one anyway."

Kaito turned his gaze toward the direction where the Kaguya Clan had once stood. His fingers curled even tighter into his palm.

"But..." he muttered, his voice barely above a whisper. He trailed off, closing his eyes. The images were still fresh in his mind—lifeless bodies of children and women scattered across the battlefield.

His stomach twisted in regret. "I could have saved them… if I had just..." He exhaled sharply, shaking off the feeling.

He had failed them. If he had remembered in time, he could have gotten them out. Now, there was nothing left but regret.

With a heavy sigh, Kaito shifted his focus to the other clans in Kiri. Through his Mind’s Eye of Kagura, he could sense the children and women gathered within their clan compounds, only a handful of Chūnin stationed to guard them.

"If I don’t do something… this will be their end." His frown deepened. "Yagura, under Obito’s control, will no doubt order their slaughter."

Kaito frowned, deep in thought. "If I remember correctly… there weren’t any known members of Kiri’s clans during the Fourth Shinobi War. Other than Mei, who became the Mizukage, I don’t recall anyone else. Well… there was Mangetsu’s little brother, the one who ended up with Sasuke, but he was never really a Kiri shinobi. I don’t think he ever considered himself one."

His eyes narrowed. "That could only mean he was found by Orochimaru during this event. If that’s the case, then the other Kiri clans… they didn’t make it. They were wiped out."

Kaito’s jaw tightened. He knew the Hidden Mist was one of the three nations responsible for the destruction of Uzushio and the Uzumaki Clan. But that was at the end of the Second Shinobi War—most of the ones involved had long since died. This generation wasn’t to blame.

His gaze shifted to another location.

Zabuza.

He could sense him alongside Mangetsu and the clan heads, moving in to assassinate the Fourth Mizukage.

"Mangetsu must have died here in the original timeline…" Kaito realized. "So he died helping in the failed assassination attempt on Yagura."

A sudden shift in the air pulled him from his thoughts. The mist surrounding the Hidden Mist Village grew thicker, rolling in unnaturally fast.

Then—boom!

Explosions erupted at the village wall, shaking the ground beneath him. Kaito’s eyes snapped toward the source of the blasts. The attack had begun.

He let out a slow sigh, his decision already made. "I know myself… I won’t be able to live with this. If I do nothing, I'll regret it for the rest of my life."

He brought his hands together, forming the cross hand seal. In an instant, fifteen shadow clones popped into existence around him.

"You know what to do," Kaito said, his voice firm.

Without hesitation, the clones flickered away, vanishing into the mist as they sped toward the clan compounds.

Meanwhile, Kaito crossed his arms, his gaze locked onto the battlefield below. He watched as Zabuza and his team engaged Yagura.

"Let's see how this plays out."

……

Meanwhile, Kaito’s clones had split into three teams of five, each heading toward one of the major clans involved in the coup—the Terumi Clan, Hozuki Clan, and Yuki Clan.

The group assigned to the Yuki Clan compound approached silently, concealed within the thick mist. As they got closer, Kaito’s clone immediately noticed something troubling—the state of the Yuki compound was far worse than the others. It looked more rundown, neglected.

"They’ve really been treated like outcasts here…" he thought, his expression tightening.

Using the mist as cover, the clones infiltrated the compound swiftly, slipping past the few stationed guards. They moved like ghosts through the shadows, heading toward the central hall where the clan members were gathered.

Once in position, the clones silently formed hand seals, preparing a genjutsu Kaito rarely used. "Temple of Nirvana."

From above, glowing ghostly feathers began to descend, softly floating down like a gentle snowfall. The Chūnin guards stationed outside blinked in confusion, watching the strange sight.

One of them instinctively reached out to touch a feather—only for his body to sway and collapse, unconscious before he hit the ground.

Inside the compound, the clan members huddled together, weary and anxious. A woman cradling her young daughter yawned, blinking drowsily.

“You feel sleepy too, huh?” she murmured as her daughter let out a tiny yawn of her own. The woman’s eyelids fluttered before she slumped forward, still holding her child protectively in her arms.

All around her, the same thing happened. Whispers of confusion turned into murmurs, then silence as one by one, the Yuki clan members drifted into unconsciousness.

The last conscious Chūnin swayed on his feet, his vision hazy as he mumbled, “Wha…?” He barely had time to finish his thought before his knees buckled, and he hit the ground.

Kaito’s clone watched carefully, scanning the room. When not a single person stirred, he nodded to himself. "Good, that worked."

Once he was sure everyone inside was asleep, the clones moved quickly. golden chakra chains sprang from their bodies, carefully wrapping around the unconscious Yuki members.

With everyone secured, the clones gathered chakra and formed a ram hand seal. In an instant, they teleported the first group away.

The process repeated—one group at a time—until the entire Yuki Clan had been evacuated.

The Hozuki Clan operation went exactly the same way. The clones infiltrated, cast Temple of Nirvana, and secured the unconscious clan members with chakra chains before teleporting them away in groups.

Everything was going smoothly.

expect at the terumi clan compound

Kaito’s clones moved cautiously through the mist, approaching the Terumi compound with the same strategy, but as they got closer, one of the clones froze, sensing a massive and familiar chakra signature—Mei Terumi. One of them sighed, shaking his head. Damn it… I didn’t expect Mei to be on guard. She’s going to make things difficult. Despite the setback, they had no choice but to proceed. They couldn’t afford to stop now. Without hesitation, they formed hand seals and cast Temple of Nirvana, sending the glowing illusion of feathers drifting into the air.

Inside the Terumi clan’s main hall, Mei Terumi’s eyelids grew heavy as a strange drowsiness began to creep over her, but her sharp mind quickly recognized the signs of genjutsu. Her fingers flashed into a hand seal, and she muttered, “Release.” The moment she did, the sleepiness vanished, her body snapping back into full awareness.

Her eyes flew open, scanning the room. Around her, most of the clan’s Chūnin had already collapsed, completely unconscious under the genjutsu’s effect. Mei’s fingers instinctively tightened around the kunai in her thigh holster as she surveyed her surroundings, her pulse steady, but her mind racing.

"A genjutsu? Here?" The timing was too suspicious—this wasn’t an ordinary attack. A deep sense of unease settled over her.

"Could it be Yagura? Did he find out about the coup?"

Her eyes widened as realization hit her. If this was Yagura’s doing, then her clan was in serious danger.

Kaito cursed under his breath, thinking, Damn it, she didn’t fall for that… well, I was expecting as much. Aware that time was short, he motioned for the other clones to move in and start gathering the sleeping clan members. They slipped through doorways and hallways, collecting unconscious civilians—children, non-shinobi elders, and other non-combatants. Kaito had already decided not to save the shinobi elders, knowing they were too stuck in their ways and would only make things harder by spreading their prejudices. While the other clones worked, the lead clone moved to confront Mei Terumi.

In a blur, Kaito’s clone appeared in front of Mei, who reacted instantly, running through a rapid set of hand signs before spewing out a wave of molten lava. “Lava Release: Melting Apparition!”

Kaito dodged backward, raising his hands in a halting gesture. “Stop! We don’t have time for this—Yagura already knows about the coup!”

Mei’s eyes widened slightly, but she didn’t hesitate. “What are you talking about?!” she demanded, but didn’t wait for an answer, quickly forming another set of seals. “Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet!” A massive water dragon surged toward Kaito, but he sighed and vanished with a Body Flicker. Before Mei could react, he reappeared right in front of her and struck her stomach with a precise palm strike, sending her skidding backward.

She quickly regained her footing and began forming another jutsu when her body suddenly froze, intricate sealing marks appearing across her skin. Panic set in as she looked down. I… I can’t move! W-what is this?! Just then, Kaito’s clone shot out a golden chain, wrapping it around her torso. Mei’s eyes widened in realization—she knew only one person who could create chains like these. ‘He’s not a real Kiri shinobi… He’s that Uzumaki kid!’

 Kaito’s clone met her gaze for a brief second before muttering, “I’m sorry, but we don’t have time for a full explanation,” and swiftly knocked her out.

Behind him, the other clones rushed through the corridors, carrying the still-sleeping Terumi clan members wrapped in chakra chains. One clone nodded to the lead clone and said, “We got everyone.” The lead clone exhaled and gave the final command, “Now, move out.” The clones immediately formed hand seals, chakra flickering around them, and in an instant, they were gone, teleported away using Hiraishin, leaving the Terumi compound in complete silence.

….

Kaito watched from the shadows as the massacre unfolded, the assassination team failing miserably. Yagura had just killed the Terumi clan head, and Kaito could sense Zabuza fleeing, leaving Mangetsu behind to fight alone.

Kaito narrowed his eyes, thinking, I knew Yagura was strong even before he became a Jinchūriki, but this… if I had to scale him, he’s at least around the Sannin tier in strength. And now, as a Perfect Jinchūriki of the Three-Tails, that makes him the strongest Kage among the Five, even if Hiruzen was still in power.

Shaking his head, he knew Mangetsu stood no chance.

"If he were older, if he had mastered Gengetsu Hōzuki’s techniques, then maybe he could fight Yagura. He has the potential, but right now… he’s too young, too inexperienced."

Then, Kaito’s eyes widened. ‘In the original timeline, Ao was the one who discovered Yagura was under a genjutsu using his Byakugan… and Yagura died after he was freed from it. But now… Ao doesn’t have his Byakugan because of me.’

His stomach twisted. ‘If Ao never notices the genjutsu… then…’

Kaito frowned deeply, a weight settling on his chest. ‘Did I just doom all of Kirigakure by taking the Byakugan from Ao?’

His thoughts were interrupted as he saw Mangetsu retreating he fled toward the forest. and Yagura was right behind him.

“I need to save him.” Kaito said as he flickered off the tree

Kaito appeared at the scene in an instant.

Mangetsu was barely standing, gripping his severed arm, his face twisted in pain.

Yagura stood atop a tree, his Bijū cloak pulsing, the chakra swirling violently as he began shifting into Version 2.

Without a second thought, Kaito—still in his Kiri shinobi disguise—appeared in front of Yagura.

Before the Mizukage could react, Kaito’s foot crashed into his jaw with immense force, sending Yagura flying backward through the air.

His leg was wrapped in chakra chains, hidden under a genjutsu to prevent recognition of the Uzumaki technique.

The moment Yagura was sent flying, Kaito Body Flickered and vanished. 

He reappeared beside Mangetsu, who barely had time to react before Kaito placed a hand on his shoulder—

And teleported them out of there.

Yagura charged into the clearing, his V2 cloak flickering violently as his eyes scanned the surroundings.

But there was no sign of his opponent.

His chakra slowly powered down, the burning cloak dissipating as he rubbed his jaw, still feeling the force of the hit.

Frowning, Yagura muttered to himself, “Who was that?”

Goten Chapter 8

Goten Chapter 8

Author's Note:
Sorry for the long delay on this chapter, guys. I was a bit stuck and unsure of where to take the story next. But instead of overthinking it, I decided to just keep writing and see where it goes. Hope you enjoy the chapter!

18's eyes widened in surprise. Slowly, she wiped the spittle from her cheek, her expression darkening. "You'll regret that," she whispered, her tone dripping with menace.

An orb of KI began to form in 18's free hand, casting an eerie light on both their faces. The hum of power grew louder. "Any last words?" she asked mockingly.

Videl closed her eyes, a single tear escaping down her cheek. Her thoughts raced memories, regrets, and a faint hope that maybe, just maybe, this wouldn't be the end.

Suddenly, before 18 or 17 could react, 18 was punched in the face the fist connecting squarely with her jaw. sending her hurtling into the side of a nearby building.

Videl felt herself falling but was caught gently before hitting the ground. She opened her eyes to see a young man with spiky golden hair, an aura of golden light surrounding him, and a serious expression on his face.

"Are you okay?" he asked softly, not looking at Videl but at Android 17.

She nodded numbly, staring at him wide-eyed. "Who... who are you?"

…

Gohan gently set Videl down, his expression serious. "There's no time for introductions. You need to get out of here—now. I'll hold them off."

Videl hesitated for a second, looking at him with wide eyes, but she knew arguing was pointless. She gave him a quick nod, her body aching as she hobbled away as fast as she could.

Gohan turned his attention back to Android 17, his golden aura flickering around him.

"Well, that was quite the entrance," Android 17 remarked, a smirk playing on his lips as he casually crossed his arms.

From the rubble, Android 18 pushed herself up, her face contorted in irritation. Her sharp eyes scanned the battlefield before locking onto Gohan. Then, she smirked. "Well, well, look who decided to play the hero," she said, brushing dust off her clothes.

As she glanced down, she noticed the torn fabric of her jacket. Her expression darkened, her annoyance quickly turning into anger. "You ruined my clothes," she muttered, her fingers curling into fists. Her blue eyes burned with frustration as she snapped her gaze back to Gohan. "You're gonna pay for that! I just got this jacket!"

Android 17 chuckled, shaking his head. "Honestly, I'm glad you showed up," he admitted, his smirk widening. "I was starting to get bored. Now, things are finally getting interesting."

Gohan remained silent, his fists clenching as he braced himself.

"Enough talk!" Android 18 snarled before rocketing toward him, energy building in her palm. As she closed the gap, she thrust her hand forward and unleashed a powerful ki blast. "Haaah!"

Gohan reacted instantly, powering up and blasting the ground beneath him with a surge of ki. "Haaah!" he shouted, using the explosion to create a smokescreen as he shot into the air.

Android 18 narrowed her eyes as the dust and debris clouded the battlefield. "Oh no, you don't!" she growled, immediately giving chase.

Gohan weaved through the sky, dodging her first strike before countering with his own ki blast. "HAA!"

Android 18 smirked and fired a blast of her own. Their attacks met mid-air, resulting in a violent explosion that shook the sky.

Before the smoke could clear, Android 18 appeared right in front of Gohan, her fist already swinging.

Gohan barely managed to raise his arms in time, blocking her punch. The sheer force sent a shockwave through his arms. Gritting his teeth, he retaliated with a punch of his own.

But Android 18 was faster. She effortlessly dodged, twisting to the side before delivering a powerful kick to his ribs.

The impact sent Gohan hurtling backward.

Just then, Android 17 appeared above Gohan in an instant, a cocky grin on his face. "Don't hog all the fun now, 18," he said before driving his foot down hard on Gohan’s back.

The impact sent Gohan crashing into the ground, the rocky terrain cracking beneath him as dust and debris flew into the air.

Gohan groaned in pain, buried in the rubble, but he didn’t stay down. Sensing movement above him, he quickly pushed off the ground, flipping backward just in time to dodge as both Androids slammed their feet down where he had been lying just moments ago.

Wasting no time, Gohan cupped his hands, charging a Kamehameha. "HAAAH!" he roared as he fired the massive blue beam straight at the androids.

Androids 17 and 18, unfazed, both extended their hands and fired their own ki blasts. Their combined energy clashed with Gohan’s Kamehameha in a violent struggle.

Gohan gritted his teeth, pushing with everything he had. But their blasts were too powerful. Inch by inch, their energy overtook his Kamehameha, swallowing it whole.

"Dammit!" Gohan cursed as he realized he couldn’t hold it back.

At the last second, he shot upward, barely dodging as the ki blast obliterated the spot he had just been standing in. The sheer force sent shockwaves through the ruined city, blowing away rubble and debris.

Desperate, Gohan fired another ki blast at the androids.

Android 17 merely scoffed, swiping the blast away with ease. Before Gohan could react, Android 18 shot forward, delivering a brutal punch to his face.

The blow sent Gohan flying backward, slamming through the side of a crumbling building. The structure groaned under the impact, large chunks of concrete and steel falling as he crashed through.

The androids didn't give him a moment to recover.

They chased after him, moving effortlessly through the air. Gohan fought back as best as he could, but he was struggling—badly.

The androids weren’t just attacking him; they were toying with him.

At that moment, a streak of light shot across the sky.

Goten had finally arrived.

As he hovered above the wreckage, his sharp eyes scanned the battlefield. His stomach twisted when he saw what was happening.

Gohan was getting beaten mercilessly. His movements were slowing, his attacks becoming sloppy.

"They’re playing with him," Goten thought, his fists clenching. "Even as a Super Saiyan, he’s completely outmatched."

His gaze shifted slightly, and that’s when he spotted a girl huddled against a pile of rubble, clutching her broken arm. Her face was pale, her breathing shaky.

Goten's eyes widened in recognition. "Videl? What is she doing here?" His mind raced. "She must’ve gotten caught up in the chaos."

Looking between Gohan and Videl, he knew he had to act fast.

"If this keeps up, Gohan's going to lose... I need to create a distraction. If I can just get their attention, we might have a chance to escape."

His hands cupped together at his side, blue energy rapidly gathering between them. "Kaa... meee... haaa... meee..."

"HAAAAH!" he roared as he fired the Kamehameha aiming straight at Android 18’s exposed back.

The energy blast struck Android 18 square between the shoulder blades, sending her tumbling, crashing into the ground below with a surprised yelp.

17 immediately snapped his head toward the direction of the attack.

Goten floated there, his expression serious.

Android 17 narrowed his eyes at Goten. "Aren't you supposed to be dead?" he asked, tilting his head in curiosity.

Android 18, coming out of the rubble, floated over to her sibling while looking at Goten in bewilderment, tilting her head as she studied him. "What the...?" Her brows furrowed. "Goku? Was he always this small? I thought he would be taller."

Before Goten could respond, Gohan’s voice rang out in alarm. "Goten! What are you doing here?! Get out of here, quickly!" His tone was urgent, almost panicked.

Android 18’s eyes widened slightly as realization hit her. "Goten... he's not Goku," she muttered, then nodded to herself. "That makes sense. He must be Goku’s kid."

Android 17 looked Goten up and down, his smirk widening. "Yeah, he does look just like Goku... too bad he’s just a kid," he mused. "Would’ve been fun to toy around with him."

Android 18 gave a playful hum, her lips curling into a smirk. "I don’t know, 17," she said, stepping forward. "He did just damage my clothes. I think I’ll have some fun with the little guy."

Goten closed his eyes and took a deep breath, pushing aside his nerves. "I have to compress my ki… keep it contained inside my body," he thought, focusing his energy inward.

In the blink of an eye, Android 18 vanished, reappearing right in front of him. "I’ll let you go first, small fry," she teased, crossing her arms.

Goten reacted instantly, disappearing and reappearing in front of her, throwing a punch straight at her face. But Android 18 easily leaned to the side, dodging without breaking a sweat.

Goten didn’t let up. He immediately went on the offensive, launching a barrage of rapid-fire ki blasts.

Android 18 dodged them all with ease, her arms still crossed, her expression unbothered.

Goten gritted his teeth and pushed forward, throwing a series of punches and kicks while mixing in more ki blasts.

But Android 18 effortlessly weaved through his attacks no matter what he did, still looking completely relaxed.

Goten’s breathing grew heavier. He was starting to get tired.

Noticing his slowing movements, Android 18 smirked. "Getting winded already? You won’t last much longer at this rate."

Without warning, she counterattacked.

Goten barely managed to block the first strike, but 18 increased her pressure, sending a relentless series of punches and kicks his way.

Goten dodged and blocked as best as he could, but he wasn’t fast enough to evade them all. A few hits landed.

Then, Android 18’s knee slammed into his stomach.

"Guh—!" Goten gasped, his body doubling over from the impact.

She raised her hand for a final blow, aiming to chop the back of his neck.

But at the last second, Goten reacted and blasted her point-blank in the stomach.

The explosion pushed Android 18 back, making her skid through the air as Goten quickly moved away, panting.

A trickle of blood dripped from the corner of his mouth. His body ached, but he clenched his fists, thinking, "It’s all set."

Just then, Goten’s eyes snapped to the side—when he heard Gohan cry out in pain as Android 17 appeared beside him and delivered a brutal kick to his arm.

With a sharp snap, Gohan's arm broke.

Gohan was sent flying through the air, crashing hard into the ground near where Videl was standing, watching the fight unfold in shock.

Goten eyes widened. "Gohan!" he shouted, immediately rushing over to him.

Videl, already nearby, rushed to Gohan’s side, dropping to her knees beside him. "Are you okay?!" she asked, her voice filled with worry as she reached out, trying to help him sit up.

Gohan gritted his teeth, trying to push himself up despite the searing pain in his broken arm. "… what are you doing here?!" he rasped, wincing. "You need to get out of here—now!"

Above them, Android 17 floated lazily, smirking as he looked down at the scene. "How touching," he mocked, his voice dripping with amusement. "The weakling has himself a little admirer."

Goten appeared in front of his brother, arms spread wide in a defensive stance.

Gohan’s eyes widened in alarm. "Goten?! What are you doing here?! Get out of here—now!" he shouted.

Android 17 chuckled. "Man, this just keeps getting better. This really is a touching sight," he said, shaking his head. "The little brother trying to protect his elder brother."

"Damn brat," Android 18 muttered, as she flew over, casually dusting soot off her tattered clothes. She glared at Goten, eyes narrowing.

Android 17 glanced at his sister, smirking. "He got you, uh sis," he teased.

Android 18 scoffed, rolling her shoulders. "Tch. He caught me off guard, I held back too much," she admitted. Raising her hand, she began charging a ki blast, the blue energy swirling ominously. "Now, I'm getting serious. You're gonna pay for that."

Gohan, struggling to even stay on his feet, felt a deep sense of dread creep up his spine. ‘No... If that hits Goten, he’s dead!’ He gritted his teeth, as he tried to stand up as his vision began to darken.

Meanwhile, Goten narrowed his eyes. ‘Now!’

Bringing both hands to his forehead, he took a deep breath and shouted, "Solar Flare!"

A massive explosion of blinding light engulfed the battlefield.

"Gah! What the hell?!" Android 18 shrieked, staggering back, shielding her eyes.

"Damn it, I can’t see!" Android 17 cursed, covering his face.

Goten wasted no time.

Spreading his arms wide, he gathered the floating ki blasts he had fired earlier, all still hovering in the air. With a sharp motion, he clapped his hands together.

"Hellzone Grenade!"

The ki blasts locked onto the blinded androids and shot toward them like a relentless storm.

A massive series of explosions detonated across the battlefield, shaking the very ground.

Smoke and fire engulfed the area.

Not hesitating for a second, Goten shot forward, grabbing both Gohan and Videl. Gritting his teeth, he took off at max speed, pushing himself beyond his limits.

‘I just need to get us out of here…’ he thought.

But then pain. A searing blast ripped through the air. Android 18, even blinded, had fired her charged ki blast.

The attack barely grazed Goten, but it was enough to burn through his back.

"WAAH!" he screamed, his muscles screaming in agony. Despite the searing pain in his back, despite his body screaming at him to stop, Goten refused to falter.

With everything he had left, he clutched Gohan and Videl tighter, gritting his teeth. "I have to get them out of here..." He flew as fast as possible.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 154

Kaito Akaden Chapter 154

He knelt down in front of her, his voice gentle but firm. “I’m really sorry to hear that, Guren-chan.” He hesitated briefly before continuing, “If you have nowhere else to go… would you like to come with me?”

Guren’s eyes widened, and she looked up at him, her voice trembling. “You… you want me to come with you?” she asked, stammering.

Kaito nodded with a warm smile. “Yeah, if you want to, you can come with me, ya know. As for why…” He paused, his gaze softening as he looked at her. “You remind me of my little brother and sister. They’ve been through similar things like you have. And I’m sure they’d be excited to meet you. If you come with me, I promise I’ll treat you like my little sister, ya know?”

“I… I…” Guren stammered, her wide eyes staring at Kaito in disbelief. She seemed to struggle to process his words, her small hands trembling slightly. Finally, she nodded, tears slipping down her cheeks as she bowed her head. Her voice was barely audible as she whispered, “Thank you, Kaito-nii.”

Kaito smiled warmly, reaching out to ruffle her hair again—this time with more care and gentleness. “You don’t have to thank me, ya know. Don’t worry—you’re safe with me now.”

….

A street food vendor handed a freshly grilled squid skewer to a customer and said, “Here you go. That’ll be 100 yen.”

The customer, a Kiri shinobi wearing the standard village uniform, nodded and handed over the money. He had black shaggy hair and an unremarkable appearance—just another soldier among many.

“Thank you,” he said, taking the skewer.

The old woman behind the food stand nodded. “Come back again.”

The shinobi walked away, taking a bite of the grilled squid and humming in delight.

This was Kaito, disguised as a Kiri shinobi. He was currently inside the Village Hidden in the Mist.

Even though Kakashi had explicitly told him not to infiltrate Kirigakure, Kaito wasn’t about to miss the chance to gather intel straight from the source. He had been in the village for about a day now, blending in, roaming the streets, eating, and eavesdropping on conversations between shinobi.

Taking another bite of his grilled squid skewer, Kaito strolled through the village, observing everything he passed.

‘The tension here is really high… The whole village feels oppressive. Everyone seems to be on edge,’ he thought, chewing thoughtfully.

he body-flickered away from the streets.

Kaito landed atop a tall tree on a hill overlooking the village. He settled on a sturdy branch, leaning against the trunk as he gazed down at Kirigakure.

His eyes locked onto the Mizukage’s office, standing prominently in the center of the village. Taking another bite of his skewer, he studied the building.

The office was heavily guarded. Kaito felt tempted to infiltrate it, maybe even free Yagura, but he held himself back. He didn’t know what the consequences of such an action would be, and he wasn’t willing to take that risk yet.

‘If I remember correctly, the original Yagura died after he was freed from the genjutsu… or was he killed by Mei? I know the civil war happened, and it ended sometime during or after Naruto’s Chunin Exams. That would make sense—since the Three Tails needed time to reform, which is why the Akatsuki waited three years before hunting the Tailed Beasts.’

His expression darkened. ‘If I’m right… I don’t think I could defeat Pain right now. And if Madara is revived before we’re ready—everyone dies.’

Unlike the Hidden Leaf, where most of the population lived within the village and coexisted in relative harmony, the Hidden Mist was different. The village was divided into a strict three-class system.

The first class consisted of the founding families and the bloodlines of the Mizukage. They lived in the center of the village, enjoying the highest privileges. This included the Terumi Clan, Karatachi Clan, and Hozuki Clan.

The second class was made up of families and clans who joined after the founding. They lived within the village walls but had fewer rights than the first class. The Hoshigaki Clan was among them.

The third class was composed of those who had been forcibly subjugated into the Mist, and treated as lesser citizens. They were forced to live outside the village walls and subjected to unfair laws. These included the Yuki Clan and the Kaguya Clan.

The third-class citizens were often sent on the most dangerous, near-suicidal missions, and treated as expendable by the village leadership.

Yagura had been elected Mizukage because he opposed these outdated systems and wanted to reform the Mist. But before he could make any changes, Obito placed him under a powerful genjutsu. Instead of progress, conditions worsened under his rule. Yagura made sure that all Kekkei Genkai users were hated, blaming them for the previous wars and instability. Even some of the first- and second-class clans suffered under this new prejudice. While they weren’t openly persecuted, distrust and fear toward Kekkei Genkai spread throughout the village.

Kaito’s eyes darkened. ‘That’s why members of the Yuki Clan, like Haku’s mother, and others from the third class fled and lived as civilians. Their clans still exist, but only a few remain.’

His thoughts were suddenly interrupted when he sensed a large amount of chakra near the village gates.

Kaito immediately stood up, focusing his Mind’s Eye of Kagura to get a clearer picture of what was happening.

Several strong chakra signatures were attacking Kirigakure’s entrance.

Kaito body flickered closer, moving toward the source of the disturbance.

Kaito arrived at a ledge overlooking the scene below. His eyes narrowed as he took in the chaos unfolding beneath him.

‘Those markings… they’re from the Kaguya Clan. So, it starts now, huh?’

Down below, the streets had turned into a battlefield as Kiri shinobi fought desperately against the Kaguya Clan, who had launched a full-scale assault on the Hidden Mist.

The village guards caught off guard, were quickly overwhelmed as the Kaguya warriors flooded the streets, cutting down every shinobi and civilian in sight. Blood painted the snow-covered ground, and terrified screams echoed through the village.

Kaito’s expression darkened as he observed the slaughter. ‘They aren’t even organized…’ he thought, shaking his head. ‘They’re throwing their lives away. If they had just united with the other oppressed clans and strategized, they could have overthrown Yagura.’

But the Kaguya were doing nothing of the sort. Instead, they rampaged through the village, killing anyone who wasn’t one of their own. It was only a matter of time before they were completely overpowered and wiped out.

Suddenly, the blaring of alarm sirens rang out through the village, signaling an emergency.

Kaito’s gaze remained fixed on the unfolding carnage. His mind drifted as he contemplated, ‘If the Uchiha Clan had gone through with their coup… would it have looked like this?’

The thought lingered in his mind, and he couldn’t help but compare. In the original timeline, had Itachi not massacred his clan, would Konoha have been reduced to a war zone like this?

Kaito knew that Itachi’s actions weren’t the smartest or best solution. But given the circumstances, and the fact that Itachi was only thirteen years old, it had probably seemed like the best option to him.

In Kaito’s opinion, taking out the corrupt Konoha higher-ups would have been the better solution. But he couldn't blame Itachi. The boy had been barely a teenager, placed under insane pressure from both Danzo, Fugaku, and the passive Third Hokage, who had done nothing but twiddle his thumbs instead of taking real action.

‘At least I was able to prevent the Uchiha Massacre in this timeline.’

Now, the Uchiha Clan was much happier, and the village was in a much better state with Tsunade as Hokage. The Third Hokage and his cronies were gone, and the village was finally healing.

The only thing that would make things even better would be Danzo’s death—but that would come in time.

The invasion below had escalated. Buildings were burning, and the fighting had grown more intense. Bodies of both Kaguya Clan members and Kiri shinobi littered the blood-soaked battlefield.

Kaito also noticed that Yagura had yet to intervene. His eyes narrowed in thought.

"Is he really just going to stay out of this and let the jonin and chunin handle everything?"

His attention was suddenly caught by a civilian mother and her young daughter, caught in the middle of the chaos. A stray Water Release jutsu was heading straight for them.

The mother clutched her daughter tightly, shielding the girl with her own body, bracing for the inevitable impact.

Kaito didn’t hesitate. He body-flickered next to them just in time and teleported them away an instant before the jutsu struck, obliterating the spot where they had stood.

He brought them to the other side of the village, where the fighting hadn’t spread yet.

As Kaito set them down, the mother turned to him, her eyes wide with gratitude. “Thank—”

Before she could finish, Kaito was already gone.

Kaito reappeared at his original vantage point, arms crossed as he surveyed the battlefield.

"Where’s Kimimaro? If I remember correctly, he should be here."

There was no way Kaito was going to let Orochimaru get his hands on that kid. From what he remembered, Kimimaro and Haku were very similar—both had been raised as tools for others, both were unwaveringly loyal to the people who gave them purpose.

The difference was that Kimimaro was more malleable. Unlike Haku, who had at least found someone like Zabuza, Kimimaro had no one who truly cared for him. Zabuza might have been harsh, claiming he saw Haku as nothing more than a tool, but at the very end, he had admitted the truth—he cared for Haku like a son.

Orochimaru, however, was different. He used and discarded people like they were nothing. Kimimaro was just another pawn in his game.

Kaito hated people like Orochimaru.

He wasn’t going to let Kimimaro end up in Orochimaru’s hands.

Just then, his attention drifted to the edge of the battlefield.

A lone white-haired boy was cutting down Kiri shinobi like they were nothing.

Even from a distance, Kaito could see the deadly precision in his movements, the way he weaved through the enemy lines, bones protruding from his arms like blades, effortlessly slicing through his opponents.

Kaito’s eyes narrowed.

"At least chunin-level, maybe higher," he assessed, watching Kimimaro in action.

But he didn’t interfere.

Instead, he leaned against a tree, and watched over Kimimaro from a distance, keeping guard for the remainder of the fight.

….

The sun rose over the Village Hidden in the Mist, its golden light cutting through the lingering smoke from the previous night’s battle.

At the village entrance, Kiri shinobi piled up the bodies of the fallen Kaguya Clan members, stacking them like discarded firewood. Soon after, they set the bodies ablaze. The crackling flames filled the air with the stench of burning flesh.

Around the fire, Mist shinobi cheered in victory, celebrating the end of the battle.

Kaito had watched everything—from the very beginning to the bitter end. But right now, his eyes were focused elsewhere.

Up in the trees, Kimimaro stood silently, his gaze locked on the burning corpses of his clan. The young boy’s face remained unreadable as he watched the flames consume the last remnants of his kin.

After a while, Kimimaro turned and left, heading further away from the village, deeper into the wilderness.

Kaito pushed himself off the tree branch, stretching slightly before muttering, “Well, I better get to him before that snake bastard does.”

With that, he body-flickered away.

Kaito followed Kimimaro for several kilometers, tracking him to a quiet clearing where a river flowed gently through.

The boy had knelt beside the water, staring at his reflection in the rippling surface. After a long moment, he cupped some water in his hands and drank.

Kaito landed in the clearing, keeping some distance so as not to startle him.

However, Kimimaro was immediately on guard. The moment he heard the slightest movement, he whipped around, gripping a sharpened bone blade in a reverse grip. His intense green eyes locked onto Kaito, his stance tense and ready to strike.

Kaito smiled and opened his mouth to speak—

—but was forced to dodge as Kimimaro lunged forward, slashing at him without hesitation.

Kaito caught Kimimaro’s wrist, stopping the blade mid-swing. “Hey—”

But before he could finish, Kimimaro twisted his body, launching a swift kick toward Kaito’s head.

Kaito blocked it effortlessly, then threw Kimimaro back toward his original position.

The boy landed smoothly, skidding back a few feet but staying firmly on his feet. His grip on the bone knife tightened, his stance still tense and ready.

Kaito quickly raised both hands in surrender. “Hey, wait! I’m not here to fight,” he said, keeping his voice calm.

Kimimaro didn’t lower his guard, his sharp gaze never leaving Kaito. “Then why are you here, Kiri ninja?”

Kaito blinked, then glanced down at himself, realizing he was still wearing his Mist shinobi disguise.

“Huh…?” He let out a small chuckle. “Oh, yeah, my bad.”

Reaching up to scratch the back of his head, Kaito puffed into a cloud of white smoke.

When the smoke cleared, he stood there in his original appearance—red spiky hair, sharp blue eyes, and a face that resembled Minato Namikaze but with a wilder, more relaxed expression.

Still scratching the back of his head, Kaito gave a sheepish grin. “Yeah… forgot I was still in disguise, ya know?”

With a casual wave, he introduced himself. “Hi! My name’s Kaito Uzumaki. I’m from Konoha. And you are?”

"Kimimaro…" The boy’s voice was guarded as he tightened his grip on the bone knife. "What do you want with me?"

Kaito spread his hands in a gesture of peace. "I saw what happened back there... to your clan. I just wanted to talk." He paused, searching Kimimaro’s expression for any sign of hostility. "I was wondering… do you have anywhere to go now?"

Kimimaro’s gaze dropped to the ground, his knuckles whitening on the hilt of his weapon. "No, I… I don’t."

His voice was barely above a whisper as he looked down at his reflection in the river. "Where would I even go?" His grip on the knife loosened slightly. "I have no clan left… no reason to stay in the Land of Water."

Kaito nodded sympathetically. "If you’d like, you can come with me."

Kimimaro lifted his gaze slightly, watching him with cautious curiosity.

"I’m from Konoha, like I said. You could make friends there, figure out what you want to do. Nobody would force you into a suicide attack or treat you like a weapon."

Kimimaro hesitated, his fingers curling around the handle of his blade once more. "I… I don’t know anything but killing," he admitted quietly. "My clan wanted to die in battle. I never questioned it, but… now they’re gone. I don’t have a purpose to live for."

Kaito sighed, running a hand through his hair. "You’re not a tool, Kimimaro."

The boy blinked at him, surprised by how firm Kaito’s tone was.

"People aren’t meant to be used as weapons," Kaito continued. "We find purpose through those we live with. You’re still young. I’m sure you’ll find your reason."

He knelt down in front of Kimimaro, placing a reassuring hand on his shoulder. "Like I said, sometimes all you need are a few friends to help you figure things out, ya know?"

Kimimaro stared at the hand on his shoulder, the contact unfamiliar but… strangely grounding.

A long silence stretched between them.

Finally, he gave a small nod. "I… I’ll come."

Kaito smiled and nodded, but before he could say anything else, his eyes shifted sharply to the misty treeline.

His expression hardened.

"I know you’re there, Orochimaru. Why don’t you come out?"

A low, sinister chuckle echoed through the mist.

"Kukukukuku… My, my, you even sensed me?"

From the shadows of the forest, Orochimaru emerged, his piercing golden eyes glinting with amusement. His serpentine smirk stretched across his pale face as he walked toward them.

"So, the rumors were true about you being a great sensor," Orochimaru mused, his voice dripping with curiosity.

His gaze flickered between Kaito and Kimimaro before settling on the red-haired shinobi.

"Might I ask what the eldest son of our beloved Fourth Hokage is doing in the Land of Water?"

Kaito shrugged casually, not the least bit intimidated. "Just a mission to assess the current situation, ya know?"

Then, tilting his head slightly, he asked, "And what about you, Snake Sannin? What brings you all the way out here?"

Orochimaru chuckled darkly. "Oh, you know… sightseeing, the usual," he said smoothly, his golden eyes gleaming as they shifted to Kimimaro.

His smirk widened slightly. "And I happened upon a very… interesting individual."

Kaito exhaled through his nose, already knowing where this was going. "Let me guess—you want Kimimaro, right?"

Orochimaru’s smirk turned almost predatory, his snake-like pupils narrowing slightly.

Orochimaru smirked, a hungry gleam in his snake-like eyes. "Straight to the point, just like your mother. Yes. I do want Kimimaro-kun."

Kaito scowled. "Stop doing that. It’s creepy as hell."

Orochimaru’s lips curled into something resembling a grin. "Danzo told me you had a sharp tongue," he mused, ignoring Kaito’s jab. "He also mentioned how you orchestrated Sarutobi-sensei’s removal from power. Quite the feat."

Kaito raised an eyebrow. "So he ran to you, huh? Figures. And yeah, I helped clear out the old fools who were running my village into the ground." He gestured toward Kimimaro. "But I’m not about to hand this kid over to you. I know exactly what you do to people."

Orochimaru let out a soft, mocking chuckle. "That’s unfortunate," he whispered, tilting his head. "I wasn’t asking for your permission."

Without warning, a massive wave of killing intent flooded the clearing.

It was suffocating—an invisible force pressing down, choking the air itself.

Kimimaro stiffened, his body locking up as the sheer dread of Orochimaru’s malice weighed on him.

But Kaito?

Kaito didn’t even flinch. Instead, he snorted. "Is that supposed to scare me? You’re not the only one who can leak out chakra."

Before Orochimaru could react, Kaito was already in front of him, slashing with a tri-pronged kunai in a blur of motion.

A sickening schlick filled the air.

Orochimaru’s body was severed cleanly in two, his upper torso hitting the ground with a heavy thud as Kaito stood over him.

For a second, everything was still.

Then—Orochimaru’s severed upper half twisted grotesquely, his mouth opening far wider than humanly possible.

With an eerie, wet slither, he shed his own body, launching himself toward Kaito like a venomous serpent striking its prey.

"Got you," Orochimaru hissed as he reached for Kaito’s throat—

—Only for his hand to pass straight through Kaito’s neck.

An afterimage.

Kaito reappeared above him, a swirling ball of chakra in his right palm cracking with red lightning.

"Red Lightning Rasengan!" Kaito shouted as he slammed the spiraling mass of chakra straight into Orochimaru’s back, driving him to the ground.

The impact exploded outward, sending a massive shockwave through the clearing.

The ground cratered violently, red lightning arcing wildly as it charred everything in its path—including Orochimaru’s body.

As the dust settled, Kaito stood over the scorched remains of the Sannin, watching as they slowly melted into mud.

A few meters away, Orochimaru reappeared, his golden eyes narrowing as he clutched a bleeding hand.

Licking his lips, he chuckled. "You’ve gotten quite strong, Kaito-kun."

Kaito scoffed, crossing his arms. "Nah. You guys are just weak." He tilted his head slightly, eyes sharp. "I thought the Sannin were supposed to be strong, but so far, you’ve all been disappointing. What can I expect, though? You only got the title Sannin after losing to Hanzo. Weaklings."

Orochimaru’s smirk faltered for the briefest moment before returning.

He began sinking into the ground, the earth swallowing him like a living swamp.

"You can keep Kimimaro if you want," he said, his voice still carrying that unsettling amusement. "I’ll find other amusements."

With one last eerie chuckle, he vanished beneath the ground, leaving nothing behind.

Kaito exhaled, shaking his head. "Man, that guy is creepy as hell."

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 34

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 34

Neville reacted quickly, catching the key midair. He sprinted to the heavy wooden door without hesitation, jamming the key into the lock. “Come on, come on,” he muttered under his breath, twisting it with all his might as the keys swarmed closer.

“Hurry up, Neville!” Hermione urged, her voice high with panic.

“Anytime now, mate!” Ron shouted, his eyes wide as the buzzing grew louder.

With a loud click, the lock turned, and Neville pushed the door open. “Got it!” he called, holding the door wide as Harry looped around for another pass.

Ron and Hermione darted through the opening, Neville close behind. “Quick, Harry! Come on!” they shouted, waving him in.

Harry dove through the open doorway just as the keys swarmed toward him. Neville slammed the door shut, pressing his weight against it as the keys thunked and embedded themselves into the wood, their wings fluttering madly.

Hermione slumped against the door, breathing heavily. “That was too close,” she said, her voice trembling slightly.

“You could say that again,” Harry said, landing next to them and wiping sweat from his forehead. He leaned on the broomstick, his chest heaving from the effort.

Ron, catching his breath, pointed past them. “Uh… guys? Look.”

….

They found themselves standing at the edge of a massive chessboard, the black chessmen towering above them, each piece carved from what appeared to be solid black stone. Opposite them, on the far side of the chamber, were the white pieces, equally massive and eerily faceless. Their smooth, blank surfaces gleamed in the dim light of the room.

Hermione stepped forward cautiously, stopping at the edge of the board. “It’s a chessboard,” she said, her voice hushed.

She pointed across the room to the opposite side of the board. “There’s the door,” she said, gesturing toward a heavy wooden door visible beyond the white pieces. “That must lead to the next chamber.”

“Maybe we can just cross it,” Ron suggested, already stepping forward.

Neville sighed, shaking his head. “I doubt it’s that simple,” he said flatly, following them.

They moved carefully across the board toward the opposite side, but before they could get far, one of the black pawns stepped forward with a heavy clang. It raised a massive stone sword and blocked their path.

“Ahh!” Hermione yelped, jumping back in fright.

Neville crossed his arms, his expression unsurprised. “Just like I thought,” he said calmly. “It won’t be that easy.”

Hermione huffed and shrugged. “It was worth a try.”

“Now what do we do?” Harry whispered, glancing nervously at the imposing chess pieces.

“It’s obvious, isn’t it?” Ron said, his tone more excited than worried. “We’ve got to play our way across the room.”

Neville glanced at Ron, noticing the slight grin tugging at the corners of his lips. ’Of course, he’s excited,’ Neville thought dryly. ‘It’s something he’s actually good at. Dumbledore really did tailor these obstacles for us, didn’t he?’

“How?” Hermione asked nervously, pointing to gaps in the lineup. “Some of the pieces are missing.”

Ron stepped forward, inspecting the board closely. “I think,” he said slowly, “we’re going to have to be chessmen.”

He walked up to one of the black knights and extended his hand toward the horse. The moment his fingers touched the cold stone, the knight sprang to life. The horse pawed the ground, and the knight turned its helmeted head, looking down at Ron with an expressionless but somehow expectant posture.

“Do we—er—have to join you to get across?” Ron asked hesitantly.

The black knight nodded stiffly.

Ron turned back to the group. “This needs some thinking,” he said, rubbing his chin. “I suppose we’ve got to take the place of three of the black pieces.”

Harry and Hermione remained silent, watching as Ron’s mind worked through the problem. Neville stood nearby, his gaze shifting between the board and Ron, already resigned to the fact that the redhead would be leading this part of the challenge.

After a few moments of contemplation, Ron spoke again. “Now, don’t be offended or anything, but neither of you are particularly good at chess—”

“We’re not offended,” said Harry quickly. “Just tell us what to do.”

Ron nodded, his face serious as he surveyed the chessboard. “Alright, Harry, you take the empty bishop square. Hermione, you’re the queenside castle. Neville, you take that rook’s spot on the kingside.” He pointed to their positions.

Neville let out a sigh and thought to himself, Let’s just get this over with, as he mentally braced for whatever madness was about to unfold.

“What about you?” Harry asked, curiosity laced with concern.

“I’m going to be a knight,” Ron declared, his tone resolute as he strode confidently toward the piece and climbed onto the horse.

Neville rolled his eyes, muttering under his breath, “Why does it feel like he’s making this more dramatic than it needs to be?” Still, he walked to his assigned square, along with Harry and Hermione, while Ron adjusted his grip on the reins of the now riderless knight.

Hermione glanced nervously between the chess pieces and Ron. “What happens now?” she asked, her voice trembling slightly.

“White always goes first in chess,” Ron explained, squinting at the board as the pieces came to life. “Look, there it goes...”

Neville quipped instinctively, “That’s racist.”

All three of them turned to stare at him. Harry blinked, and Hermione looked scandalized. Ron just gave him a deadpan look.

Neville shrugged and mumbled, “What? It’s true.”

Before anyone could respond, a white pawn moved forward two spaces, the faint grinding of stone against stone echoing through the chamber. Ron immediately began directing the black pieces, pointing sharply as he gave instructions. The game was on.

“Harry—move diagonally four squares to the right,” Ron ordered, his voice sharp with focus.

Their first real shock came when one of their knights was sacrificed. The white queen advanced, smashing the black knight into jagged pieces that scattered across the board.

Ron winced but kept his composure. “Had to let that happen,” he muttered, though his shaken tone betrayed his nerves. “Leaves you free to take that bishop, Hermione. Go on.”

Neville gripped his wand tightly, his mind racing. ‘If I could cast Bombarda, we could end this whole mess in a second.’ His thumb brushed the tip of his wand as he glanced around the board.

The game dragged on for nearly twenty minutes, with Ron issuing commands and directing their moves with unwavering focus. Tension built with every turn, and each piece they lost made the stakes feel higher.

“We’re nearly there,” Ron muttered suddenly, his voice low as he scanned the board. “Let me think... let me think...”

The white queen turned her blank, unfeeling face toward him, her next move clear.

“Yes,” Ron said softly, his expression resolute. “It’s the only way... I’ve got to be taken.”

“NO!” shouted Harry and Hermione in unison, their voices echoing through the chamber.

“That’s chess!” snapped Ron, his frustration bubbling over. “You’ve got to make sacrifices! I make my move, she’ll take me, and that leaves you free to checkmate the king, Harry!”

Neville groaned, rolling his eyes so hard it felt like they might fall out of his head. Why is he acting like this is the end of the world? Just get off the bloody horse and let’s finish this already.

“But—” Harry began, his face pale.

“Do you want to stop Snape or not?” Ron shot back, cutting him off with a sharp glare.

“Ron—” Harry tried again, but Ron silenced him with a raised hand.

“Look, if you don’t hurry up, he’ll already have the Stone!” Ron shouted, his voice rising dramatically. “There’s no alternative.”

He took a deep breath, his pale face determined, and called out, “Ready? Here I go—don’t hang around once you’ve won.”

With that, Ron urged the horse forward. The white queen moved swiftly, her marble arms raised to strike.

Neville’s eyes narrowed as he watched the queen’s movements. His grip tightened on his wand. The moment the queen lunged, Neville acted. With a quick flick of his wand, he shouted, “Accio!” aiming at Ron’s robes.

Ron yelled in surprise as the spell yanked him off the horse just as the queen’s blow shattered it into pieces. He landed with a thud on the ground next to Neville, his face a mix of confusion and shock.

“What just happened?” Ron stammered, looking bewildered as he stared at Neville.

Neville sighed, his expression unimpressed. “Stop being so dramatic, Ron. You weren’t hit by the queen. Just walk off the board next time.”

Ron blinked, then looked sheepish. “Er, yeah. Thanks, mate.”

Hermione, realizing what Neville had done, looked at him with a mixture of awe and relief. “Brilliant, Neville! You saved Ron!”

Harry, still wide-eyed, asked, “How did you do that?”

Hermione jumped in to explain. “It was the Summoning Charm! He used it on Ron’s clothes and pulled him back just in time.”

Neville shrugged off the praise, turning to Harry. “What are you waiting for? Let’s finish this and get it over with.”

Ron, still sitting on the floor, nodded. “Yeah, Harry. Checkmate the king.”

Harry snapped out of his shock, stepped forward, and moved three spaces to the left. The white king froze, then removed his crown and threw it to the ground, signaling the end of the game. The chessmen parted, bowing to the group as the path to the next door cleared.

“We did it!” Harry said, excitement mingling with relief. “Come on, let’s go.”

Come on, let’s go,” Harry said, his voice firm as he led the way toward the next door.

Neville, Hermione, and Ron followed close behind, their footsteps echoing softly in the tense silence of the chamber.

As they reached the door, Harry hesitated briefly, glancing back at his friends. “What do you reckon’s next?” he asked, his voice low.

Hermione furrowed her brow, thinking aloud. “We’ve had Sprout’s—Devil’s Snare; Flitwick must’ve enchanted the keys; McGonagall transfigured the chessmen to make them alive... that leaves Quirrell’s spell and Snape’s.”

Neville froze mid-step, his eyes widening as her words sank in. ‘Wait, Quirrell?’ he thought,

as soon as Harry pushed the door open, and a wave of putrid stench hit them immediately. The foul smell made their eyes water, making all of them pulled their robes up over their noses. As they stepped inside, the source of the smell became painfully clear.

Lying flat on the floor in front of them was a massive troll—easily larger than the one they had faced on Halloween. Its mottled, greyish skin gleamed with sweat, and its enormous limbs twitched slightly as it stirred. The moment the door creaked open, the troll turned toward them, its beady eyes narrowing with a low, guttural growl.

Neville’s thoughts froze for a split second. 'Shit.'

The troll let out an ear-splitting roar, as it stood up and lunged toward them with terrifying speed.

Acting on instinct, Neville pointed his wand and shouted, “Lumos Maxima!” unleashing an overpowered burst of light that blazed through the room. The troll howled in fury, shielding its face from the searing brightness, but it kept charging.

“Move!” Neville yelled, grabbing Hermione’s and Harry’s arms. Harry managed to grab Ron’s hand as they dove out of the troll’s path. The troll crashed into the wall, then fell heavily to the ground, momentarily dazed and still blinded by the light.

Neville shoved his friends toward the door on the far side of the chamber. “Go! I’ll distract it!” he shouted.

Hermione, still blinking spots out of her vision, shook her head. “No! We can’t leave you to face that troll alone!” she shouted.

Harry nodded in agreement, his grip tightening on his wand. “She’s right, Neville! We can’t just leave you here!”

Neville turned to them, his expression firm. “Go! I can’t focus on keeping you alive and fighting this thing. You’ll only slow me down. Get to the next chamber—I’ll catch up. Trust me, I have a plan.”

His eyes darted back to the troll, which was shaking its massive head in an attempt to clear its vision.

“Quickly!” Neville shouted as the troll stood up and roared again, turning toward them, its vision slowly clearing.

Harry hesitated, looking between Neville and the troll, then gritted his teeth. “Come on, Hermione. He says he has a plan. We’d just get in his way. And we can’t waste more time—Snape might already be after the Stone.”

Ron nodded quickly. “We’ve got to hurry. That thing’s starting to figure out where we are.”

Hermione looked torn, her hands clenched into fists. She finally stepped forward, hugging Neville tightly. “You’d better be okay when we come back,” she said, her voice trembling.

Neville gave her a small, reassuring smile and gently patted her shoulder. “Yeah, sure. Now go, before it’s too late!”

Harry grabbed Hermione’s arm, pulling her away as Ron opened the door on the far side of the chamber. The three of them darted through the opening, sparing one last glance at Neville before disappearing into the next room.

Neville turned to the troll, which had now steadied itself. It let out a low growl and focused its beady eyes on him.

All right, Neville thought, gripping his wand. Now I just have to take down this troll. Let’s hope the others stick to the plan—and that only Harry ends up hurt like in the movies. His eyes swept the room, searching for anything he could use.

The troll roared and charged, raising its massive club. Neville dove to the left, rolling away just as the troll’s club slammed into the floor where he’d stood seconds before. Coming to a stop, Neville aimed his wand at the troll’s wrist and shouted, “Flipendo!” firing an overpowered spell.

The spell hit the troll’s wrist with a loud thud, forcing it to drop the club. The troll roared in pain, clutching its wrist.

Neville, not letting up, raised his wand again. “Lumos Maxima!” he shouted. sending another blinding flash of light into the troll’s face. The troll stumbled back, roaring and thrashing blindly as it tried to protect its eyes.

Neville ducked under the troll’s wild swing, rolling toward the fallen club. His breathing was ragged as he tapped the club with his wand “Acusfors!” he incanted. The club shimmered, twisting and shrinking into a giant, sharp needle.

The troll shook its head again, blinking as its vision returned. Spotting Neville, it let out an enraged growl and stomped forward.

 Neville pointed his wand at the needle and cast, “Wingardium Leviosa!” lifting the needle into the air and aimed it at the trolles head.

As the troll roared and took a step forward, Neville yelled, “Depulso!” The needle shot forward like a spear, piercing straight through the troll’s skull. The creature froze, let out a low groan, and then toppled backward with a thunderous crash that shook the floor.

Neville dropped to his knees, panting heavily. He stared at the troll, now lying still on the ground, and let out a shaky breath.

He fell onto his bum, panting hard. Sweat dripped down his face, and his whole body felt tired from the magic he’d used.

‘Good thing I came up with a strategy after the Halloween troll incident,’ he thought, wiping his forehead. ‘If I hadn’t, I’d be squashed by now.’

Neville then looked toward the door the others had gone through.’ Now I just have to wait for them to come back,,’ he thought.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 153

Kaito Akaden Chapter 153

Haku sniffled, tears beginning to roll down his cheeks as he listened.

“And,” Kaito continued with a small smile, “my mom always taught me to help people who need it—especially if you know you can. So, come with us, Haku. You deserve better than this.”

Haku lowered his head, his shoulders trembling as he tried to hold back his emotions. Finally, the weight of Kaito’s words broke through his walls, and tears spilled freely.

“Thank you,” Haku said in a shaky voice, bowing his head as his soft sobs filled the alley.

Kaito smiled warmly, patting Haku’s head gently. “You don’t have to thank us. Now, let’s get you cleaned up, yeah? Some new clothes, a warm bath… and maybe something other than dango to eat,” he winked playfully.

Haku looked between them, still overwhelmed but feeling a glimmer of hope for the first time in a long while. He sniffled again and nodded, his grip tightening on the scarf Kaito had given him. For the first time, the bitter cold didn’t feel so unbearable

…

It was a bright afternoon, the sun shining down and illuminating the snow-covered forest. The air was crisp, and the soft crunch of boots on snow echoed through the otherwise quiet landscape.

Three figures walked along the road leading away from the town.

Kaito trailed at the back of the group, dressed in his disguise. He held a steamed bun in one hand, taking a bite now and then as he strolled casually.

Walking slightly ahead of him was Hotaru, disguised as Hikari. Beside her was Haku, now wearing clean clothes and holding his own steamed bun, nibbling on it as they walked together.

During their journey, Kaito and Hotaru had explained to Haku who they were and why they were in the Land of Water, revealing that they were shinobi from Konoha.

Haku looked up at Hotaru with curiosity. “Umm, Hikari-nee-san,” he said, his voice soft as he chewed on his bun, “where are we heading next?”

Hotaru glanced at him with a gentle smile. “We’re planning to see the sights in the next town over,” she replied warmly. “It’s supposed to have a nice hot spring and a small festival coming up soon. We thought it’d be fun to check it out.”

Kaito nodded in agreement, gesturing with his half-eaten bun. “Yeah, the town’s kinda famous for its winter festival. Figured we might as well visit while we’re here, ya know?”

Haku nodded, taking another bite of his bun. After a moment of silence, he looked back at Kaito. “Kaito-nii… can you tell me more about Konoha? What’s it like there?”

Kaito took a bite of his steamed bun, chewing thoughtfully before answering Haku’s question. “Well,” he began, “Konoha is pretty big. It’s surrounded by these huge, tall trees—that’s why it’s called the Hidden Leaf, by the way. Most of the people there are friendly, but like anywhere, there are some bad folks too… just fewer, I guess.” He shrugged, thinking. “Hmmm, what else? Oh! Yeah, it’s definitely warmer than here. And the food? The food in Konoha is amazing. You’d love it, ya know.”

Hotaru perked up, clearly excited to chime in about home. But after hearing Kaito’s casual description, her face fell, and she looked annoyed. “Is that how you describe Konoha?” she asked, exasperated.

Kaito shrugged. “What? It’s accurate.”

Hotaru sighed and turned to Haku with a soft smile. “Let’s see… Konoha is a really cheerful place,” she said, her tone warm. She paused, thinking. “The weather is great! Personally, I love spring the most, especially when the cherry blossoms bloom. It’s so beautiful…” She trailed off, struggling to think of what else to say. “Umm, it’s… it’s…”

Kaito couldn’t hold back a snicker, covering his mouth as he grinned. “Not so easy, is it, Hotaru?” he teased.

Hotaru’s face turned pink as she blushed, and she swatted his shoulder with a huff. “Hmph!” she exclaimed, crossing her arms and pouting.

Haku smiled softly, watching the two interact. There was an easy warmth between them that felt comforting.

Kaito smirked and turned back to Haku. “Honestly, it’s hard to explain, Haku. We grew up there, so what we experience feels normal to us. It’s better if you get to see it for yourself and form your own opinion, ya know.” He popped another bite of his steamed bun into his mouth but suddenly froze, his eyes widening

He began coughing violently, clutching his throat and pounding on his chest as he tried to dislodge the piece of food.

“Kai-kun!” Hotaru exclaimed, her voice filled with concern. She quickly set down her bag, pulled out a water bottle, and handed it to him while patting his back. “Are you okay? You shouldn’t talk and eat at the same time!” she scolded gently as she helped him drink.

Haku concern etched on his face. “Kaito-nii, are you all right?”

After a few moments of coughing and drinking water, Kaito finally caught his breath. “Ah… thanks, Hotaru,” he wheezed, sighing in relief. “I’m good now.”

Hotaru crossed her arms and gave him a look. “You’re impossible sometimes, Kai-kun.”

Kaito chuckled weakly, brushing off the moment. Then his expression shifted, becoming serious as he glanced at Haku briefly before focusing on Hotaru. “Actually, Hotaru,” he began, “we’re going to have another person joining us.”

Hotaru tilted her head, puzzled. “Another person?” she asked, curiosity evident in her voice.

….

In a quiet town on the east side of the Land of Water, a tea house bustled with life. Among its patrons sat a man with black hair, dressed like a merchant. To any casual observer, he seemed ordinary, sipping tea and minding his own business.

But this was no ordinary merchant. It was a shadow clone of Kaito, disguised and gathering information.

The clone smiled and thanked the server as she brought him a steaming cup of tea.

“Is there anything else you need?” she asked kindly.

The clone shook his head with a polite smile. “No, thank you. I’m good,” he replied, taking a sip of his tea.

His attention, however, was focused on the group of Kiri shinobi sitting at the table beside him. They were speaking in hushed but frustrated tones about the current situation in Kirigakure.

One of the Kiri shinobi, his voice tinged with frustration, muttered, “The Mizukage is making things worse with his latest policies. It’s like he doesn’t care about the village anymore.”

Another shinobi nodded in agreement. “You’re right. He’s not the same as when he first became Mizukage. Back then, he was kind and wanted to end the Bloody Mist era. But now? He’s only continuing it.”

The first shinobi slammed his hand lightly on the table. “Exactly! It’s like he’s a different person now. He doesn’t even leave his office anymore!”

A female Kiri kunoichi glanced around nervously. “We shouldn’t be talking about this out in the open,” she warned, her voice low.

The first shinobi shook his head, his frustration evident. “That’s the problem! Everyone’s too scared to talk about it, and that’s why we’re in this mess!”

Kaito’s clone took a sip of his tea, his mind racing as he processed what he had overheard. ‘It seems the village is divided in its opinion of Yagura as the Fourth Mizukage. Some people still like and support what he’s doing, but others have started suspecting him, even criticizing him. They’ve noticed his character has changed... and they’re right.’

Kaito set his cup down gently, his eyes flicking toward the group of Kiri shinobi as they continued their quiet conversation. ‘If I remember correctly, Obito is controlling Yagura Karatachi,’ Kaito thought grimly. ‘But I still don’t understand how he managed to put a perfect Jinchūriki like Yagura under genjutsu. Didn’t Bee say that perfect Jinchūriki can’t be placed under genjutsu because their Bijū can break them out?’

He frowned, his fingers tapping lightly against the table as his mind raced. ‘It doesn’t make sense. Does Obito have a genjutsu that powerful? If he did, why wouldn’t he have used it when he came for Mom? No, that doesn’t add up.’

Kaito’s thoughts shifted to the Mangekyō Sharingan. ‘From what I know, the Mangekyō only grants two abilities—one for each eye. Obito’s powers are short-range Kamui and long-range Kamui, as seen with Kakashi’s Sharingan. So… could it be someone else’s Mangekyō power?’

His memory flashed to Madara using Kamui after stealing Kakashi’s Sharingan. ‘Madara could use it, but if Obito had access to a genjutsu that strong, he could’ve already captured all the Jinchūriki. Why hasn’t he?’

Kaito leaned back slightly, taking another sip of tea as he considered other possibilities. ‘Maybe the genjutsu has a really long cooldown, like Shisui’s Kotoamatsukami with its ten-year reset. Or… maybe Obito placed both the Bijū and Yagura under separate genjutsu. That would explain it.’

He sighed softly, his eyes narrowing as he pieced his thoughts together. ‘At least, that’s the most logical explanation I can think of right now.’

After finishing his tea, Kaito’s clone placed the cup gently on the table and stood up, slinging his bag over his shoulder. He walked over to the counter, paying for his tea.

The owner smiled politely. “Come again.”

The clone nodded, offering a small smile. “Thank you,” he replied, before stepping out into the cold, snow-covered street.

As he walked through the town, his thoughts lingered. ‘All the signs point to a civil war in Kiri being just around the corner. The clans here are deeply unhappy and have started voicing their dissatisfaction out loud. From what I’ve gathered, Zabuza hasn’t tried to assassinate the Mizukage yet… That might actually be the trigger for the war.’

He continued down the snowy street, absentmindedly lost in thought, until the sound of a commotion pulled him back to reality.

He turned his head toward the noise and saw a mob of people gathered, shouting angrily. They were holding broomsticks and rocks, yelling, “Get out of here, you filth!”

In the center of the mob stood a little girl, no older than eight. She had bruises on her face and wore ragged clothes. Her blue hair was messy, and her wide, terrified eyes darted around at the angry villagers.

One person threw a rock at her, hitting her on the head. “Get lost, you freak!” they shouted.

The girl clutched her head as blood trickled down her forehead, tears streaming down her cheeks. She stumbled backward, trying to get away, her small frame trembling in fear.

The shopkeeper stepped forward, whacking her with a broomstick. “We don’t need your kind in this town! Get lost, you monster!”

Another villager picked up a stone and hurled it at her.

The girl squeezed her eyes shut, bracing herself for the impact.

But the hit never came.

When she opened her eyes, she saw someone standing in front of her, shielding her from the mob.

Kaito’s clone had appeared, catching the stone mid-air and pushing back the broomstick aimed at the girl. His face was filled with rage as he stood protectively in front of her.

“What are you people doing?!” he shouted, his voice cutting through the angry cries of the mob. “She’s just a little girl!”

One of the villagers sneered, stepping forward. “What’s it to you? She’s not wanted in this village!”

Kaito’s eyes narrowed. ‘Arguing with them will just attract Kiri shinobi… This isn’t worth it.’

Without a word, he placed a hand on the girl’s shoulder. In an instant, they vanished, body-flickering away from the mob and leaving them in stunned silence.

The crowd stared at the spot where Kaito had stood. One man muttered, “That guy… he was a shinobi.”

….

Kaito and the girl arrived some distance away, appearing in a snowy clearing outside the town near a tall tree. The cold air was still, and the ground was blanketed in white.

The girl stumbled as they landed, falling to the ground from the sudden change in scenery.

Kaito immediately knelt down in front of her, his voice calm and gentle. “Are you okay?”

As he spoke, his clone dispelled in a puff of white smoke, revealing Kaito in his original appearance. His spiky red hair, reminiscent of Minato’s but slightly shorter and untamed, caught the soft sunlight filtering through the snow-laden branches.

The girl looked up at him with wide, tearful eyes, clearly still shaken.

Kaito reached out his hand to help her, but she flinched, instinctively trying to back away.

“It’s alright,” Kaito reassured her softly, keeping his voice steady. “We’re far away from those people now. They can’t hurt you anymore, ya know?” He gave her a warm smile. “Here, let me heal you.”

The girl hesitated but didn’t resist as Kaito moved closer. Her eyes stayed fixed on him, studying his face intently as he reached out.

Kaito’s hand glowed green with healing chakra as he touched the wound on her forehead. She flinched slightly at the initial contact, but Kaito quickly reassured her. “It’s alright, just a second, okay?” he said with a kind smile.

She gave a small nod, her body relaxing slightly.

“There we go,” Kaito said, pulling his hand back after a moment. “All better now.”

The girl tentatively touched the spot where the wound had been, her fingers brushing her forehead. Her eyes widened in amazement when she felt no pain. She looked back at Kaito, her expression a mix of disbelief and gratitude.

Kaito smiled warmly. “See? Told ya it’d be okay.”

Kaito smiled warmly and unsealed some fresh fruits from a scroll. Handing them to the girl, he said gently, “Here, have some. They’re fresh, ya know.”

The girl hesitated for a moment, her eyes darting between the food and Kaito. Seeing his encouraging gesture, she finally took the fruits. As soon as she began eating, it became clear she hadn’t eaten in a while—she devoured the food quickly, her small hands clutching it tightly.

‘Why does she look so familiar?’ Kaito wondered as he watched her. While she ate, he gently placed his glowing hand over the bruises on her arms and face, healing them one by one.

“What’s your name?” Kaito asked casually, his voice soft as he worked on healing her.

The girl paused mid-bite, lowering the fruit slightly. “My name is Guren,” she said quietly.

“Guren, huh? That’s a nice name,” Kaito replied with a kind smile. “I’m Kaito Uzumaki.” But even as he spoke, the name triggered something in his memory. ‘Guren… why does that sound familiar?’

His gaze fell on her blue hair, and the pieces started to fall into place. ‘Wait a second… Guren. Isn’t she one of Orochimaru’s subordinates? Yeah, that’s right—she’s the one with the Crystal Release. If I remember correctly, Orochimaru must not have found her yet. I think she and Naruto fought together against the Three Tails at some point.’

Guren finished eating the fruit and wiped her mouth with the back of her hand. She looked up at Kaito with wide, grateful eyes. “Thank you, Kaito-san,” she said softly.

Kaito grinned at her. “It’s no problem! And just call me Kaito-nii, okay?” he added playfully, ruffling her hair gently.

Guren blinked in surprise at his kindness, a shy smile forming on her lips.

After a moment, Kaito’s expression softened, and his tone became more serious. “Guren-chan, if you don’t mind me asking… where are your parents?”

At the question, Guren’s face fell. Her gaze dropped to the ground, and her voice became a whisper. “They’re… gone. My village was attacked. I’m the only survivor.”

Kaito’s chest tightened at her response. ‘As I thought… she’s all alone. If I leave her here, she’ll no doubt end up with Orochimaru—or worse, Danzo.’

He knelt down in front of her, his voice gentle but firm. “I’m really sorry to hear that, Guren-chan.” He hesitated briefly before continuing, “If you have nowhere else to go… would you like to come with me?”

Guren’s eyes widened, and she looked up at him, her voice trembling. “You… you want me to come with you?” she asked, stammering.

Kaito nodded with a warm smile. “Yeah, if you want to, you can come with me, ya know. As for why…” He paused, his gaze softening as he looked at her. “You remind me of my little brother and sister. They’ve been through similar things like you have. And I’m sure they’d be excited to meet you. If you come with me, I promise I’ll treat you like my little sister, ya know?”

“I… I…” Guren stammered, her wide eyes staring at Kaito in disbelief. She seemed to struggle to process his words, her small hands trembling slightly. Finally, she nodded, tears slipping down her cheeks as she bowed her head. Her voice was barely audible as she whispered, “Thank you, Kaito-nii.”

Kaito smiled warmly, reaching out to ruffle her hair again—this time with more care and gentleness. “You don’t have to thank me, ya know. Don’t worry—you’re safe with me now.”

Author's Note:
I’m not entirely sure when or where Guren was originally from, as there isn’t much detailed information available about her background. However, given that Kirigakure had significant issues with Kekkei Genkai users during that time, it’s likely she originated from the Mist. Since she’s roughly the same age as Naruto, I figure that she must have been recruited by Orochimaru around this point in the timeline.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 33

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 33

Harry hesitated, his determination faltering slightly. “But if we get caught, you three will be expelled, too,” he said, looking at them with concern.

Neville shook his head, annoyed. ‘Yeah, like Dumbledore’s going to expel you,’ rolling his eyes. ‘I’m afraid you’re the center of his plans, Harry, so don’t worry about that, And as for us, he probably wants his golden boy to have a few friends who can help.’

Neville sighed, leaning back against the armchair and rubbing his temple. “Anyway, Hogwarts isn’t the only magical school in the world. If we get expelled, we’ll just have to apply somewhere else. I’ve heard there’s a school in France.”

Ron looked at Neville like he’d grown a second head. “You’re joking,” he said flatly.

Neville shrugged. “I’m not. It’s called Beauxbatons. There’s another one in Eastern Europe somewhere—Durmstrang, I think? Hogwarts isn’t the be-all and end-all of magical education, you know.”

Hermione looked thoughtful, but Harry still looked unconvinced. “We’re not getting expelled,” she said firmly. “We’re going to stop Snape, or whoever it is, from getting the Stone.”

Neville sighed again, running a hand through his hair. ‘This is going to end badly,’ he thought. “Fine,” he said aloud,

…

Neville stood at the back of the group, panting slightly as he adjusted Hermione on his back. She clung to his shoulders as he crouched low, the group huddling together under Harry’s Invisibility Cloak. It was a tight squeeze, and the cloak barely covered all of them as they shuffled quietly down the corridor leading to the third-floor door.

They had just narrowly avoided Peeves, who was humming to himself as he floated by, and Mrs. Norris, who had sneezed loudly before slinking off into the shadows.

When they finally reached the door to the forbidden corridor, Neville crouched lower to let Hermione climb off his back. Straightening, he helped her steady herself before lifting the cloak off them. As the fabric slipped away, the group could see the door ahead of them—slightly ajar.

“Well, there you are,” Harry said quietly, his voice tense. “Snape’s already got past Fluffy.”

Neville rolled his eyes. “So, how long are we just going to stand here for?” he asked, his tone dry as he crossed his arms.

Harry didn’t respond immediately, his face pale as he turned to look at the others. “If you want to go back, I won’t blame you,” he said, his voice barely above a whisper. “You can take the cloak—I won’t need it now.”

“Don’t be stupid,” Ron said sharply, stepping forward. “We’re coming.”

“We’re all in this together,” Hermione added firmly, brushing off her cloths.

Neville sighed, already regretting his decision to follow along. Without another word, he moved to the door and peeked through the small gap. Inside, he could see Fluffy, the massive three-headed dog, lying on the floor. Its chest rose and fell with deep, rumbling breaths as it slept, lulled by the soft melody of a harp.

Neville pushed the door open slightly, careful not to make too much noise. “He’s asleep,” he whispered over his shoulder. “Come on.”

He led the way into the room, stepping lightly on the stone floor. The door creaked slightly as they entered, and a low growl rumbled from one of Fluffy’s throats. The three massive heads stirred, noses twitching madly as they caught a hint of the intruders’ scent.

“What’s that at its feet?” Hermione whispered, her voice barely audible as she pointed toward the giant dog.

“Looks like a harp,” said Ron, pointing to the instrument near Fluffy’s massive paws. “Snape must have left it there.”

“It must wake up the moment you stop playing,” Harry said, his voice filled with tension. “Well, here goes—”

Before Harry could make a move, the harp abruptly stopped playing. The gentle melody faded, and Fluffy’s three heads snapped awake. Its eyes glinted in the dim light, and low, rumbling growls began to echo through the room. Each head turned toward them, sniffing the air and baring its teeth.

“Uh, guys,” Ron said, backing up slightly, his voice rising in panic.

Neville didn’t waste a second. He stepped forward and raised his wand. “Cantus Continuo!” he cast, directing the spell at the harp. Instantly, the instrument began playing again, this time shifting into a soothing lullaby. The calming tune filled the room, and Fluffy’s heads tilted slightly as the growls softened.

The massive dog swayed on its feet, its eyelids drooping. Slowly, it staggered, collapsing first to its knees and then to the ground, snoring deeply.

Harry, Ron, and Hermione turned to Neville, their faces a mix of shock and admiration.

“That was brilliant, Neville,” Harry said, stepping closer. His voice was filled with genuine awe. “Where’d you learn that?”

Neville shrugged, brushing off the praise. “I figured your obsession with the Philosopher’s Stone would drag us here by the end of the year,” he said with a faint smirk. “So, I asked Professor Flitwick to teach me a spell that makes instruments play music on their own.”

Hermione’s face lit up. “You have to teach me that spell, Neville!”

“Yeah, sure,” Neville replied with a nod. “But let’s focus on the task at hand. The faster we’re done here, the faster we can leave.”

“Well, that’s a lifesaver,” Ron muttered, exhaling in relief.

The group crept cautiously toward the trapdoor. Fluffy’s snoring rumbled like distant thunder, and the oppressive heat of its breath filled the room. Neville gagged slightly, covering his nose with his sleeve. I really need to learn the Bubble-Head Charm, he thought as he edged closer to the sleeping beast.

“All right, mate,” Ron hissed, nudging Harry. He gestured toward the trapdoor, partially obscured by one of Fluffy’s massive paws. “Go on, see if you can shift it.”

Harry nodded, his face set with determination. He crouched low and carefully pushed against Fluffy’s paw. It was heavy and coarse, but after some effort, he managed to move it enough to reveal the trapdoor. He grabbed the iron ring and heaved it open. The trapdoor swung upward with a loud creak, revealing a pitch-black hole.

“What can you see?” Hermione whispered, peering anxiously over Harry’s shoulder.

“Nothing—just black,” Harry replied, his voice echoing slightly in the hollow space below. “There’s no ladder or anything. Looks like we’ll just have to drop.”

Ron leaned in beside Harry, squinting into the darkness. “Want to go first, Hermione?” he asked, turning to her.

“No, I don’t!” Hermione said quickly, stepping back with a shake of her head. “Someone else can do it.”

“I’ll go first,” Harry said firmly, taking a deep breath.

“You want to go first? Are you sure?” Ron asked, his voice laced with concern. “We don’t even know how deep it goes.”

“Yeah, I'm sure, “ Harry said. He then turned back to the trapdoor, lowering himself carefully until he was hanging by his fingertips. The room was silent except for the soft music of the harp and Fluffy’s rhythmic snores.

As he hung there, Harry glanced up at Ron. “If anything happens to me, don’t follow. Go straight to the Owlery and send Hedwig to Dumbledore. Got it?”

Neville, standing at the back, rolled his eyes thinking, 'Yeah, because Dumbledore would really let anything happen to his golden pawn. This whole thing’s probably going exactly the way he planned.'

“Right,” said Ron.

“See you in a minute, I hope,” Harry said. With a deep breath, he let go and dropped into the darkness below.

Neville leaned over the trapdoor and shouted, “You okay, mate?” He already knew the answer but felt compelled to ask.

A moment later, Harry’s voice echoed back up. “Yeah, I’m fine! It’s okay to come—it’s a soft landing. You can jump!”

Hearing that, Neville straightened and turned to Ron and Hermione. “All right, I’m going in next. You two, jump a bit further than where Harry and I are, or you’ll land on our heads.”

Ron and Hermione nodded, stepping aside to give Neville space.

“I’m coming in,” Neville called, gripping his wand tightly as he swung one leg over the edge. Without hesitation, he dropped through the trapdoor, landing softly on the spongy surface below. He stumbled slightly but caught himself, glancing around in the dimness. “Come on, Hermione!” he shouted up.

“All right, here I come!” Hermione’s voice rang out. Moments later, she dropped through the hole, landing lightly on Harry’s other side.

Ron was the last to follow, landing in a heap beside Harry. “What’s this stuff?” were his first words, brushing at his robes.

“Dunno,” Harry replied, crouching to examine the ground. “Some sort of plant thing. I suppose it’s here to break the fall.”

Neville stood silently, holding his wand ready as he surveyed their surroundings. It was pitch black, the air cool and damp. He strained to hear any sounds beyond the faint rustling of the plant beneath them.

“We must be miles under the school,” Hermione said, her voice echoing faintly.

“Lucky this plant thing’s here, really,” Ron said, stretching his legs out.

“Lucky?” Hermione shrieked, her voice filled with alarm. “Look at you both!”

She leapt up, struggling toward the damp wall. Neville noticed her movements becoming sluggish as the plant’s tendrils began snaking around her ankles. Harry and Ron, meanwhile, were oblivious to the fact that their legs had already been tightly bound by the creeping vines.

“It’s Devil’s Snare,” Neville said calmly, watching the tendrils with a critical eye. “You need to stay calm. It tightens when you struggle.”

“Of course!” Hermione exclaimed, relief in her voice. “That’s exactly what it is.”

“Oh, I’m so glad we know what it’s called,” Ron snarled sarcastically, leaning back as he fought to pull the tendrils away from his neck. “That’s a great help!”

Hermione stilled herself, taking slow, steady breaths. As she calmed down, the Devil’s Snare loosened its grip on her and began retreating. Neville, who had remained calm the entire time, was unaffected and helped pull Hermione free. The two of them turned to watch as Ron and Harry wrestled frantically with the plant. The more they struggled, the faster and tighter the tendrils wrapped around them.

“Shut it, and calm down, you idiots!” Neville shouted. “Stop moving, or you’ll make it worse!”

“What should we do?” Hermione panicked. “Think, Hermione, think!”

“Well, hurry up—I can’t breathe!” Harry gasped, the tendrils curling tightly around his chest.

Neville sighed, shaking his head. He raised his wand and said firmly, “Lumos Solem!”

From the tip of Neville’s wand, a brilliant beam of golden light burst forth, illuminating the entire pit. The Devil’s Snare recoiled instantly, its tendrils writhing and hissing as they retreated into the shadows. Within seconds, Harry and Ron were free, collapsing onto the plant’s surface as they caught their breath.

“That,” Harry said, leaning against the wall and wiping the sweat from his face, “was too close.”

Harry sat up, gasping. “Thanks, mate,” he said, his voice hoarse.

“That… was horrible. Never thought I’d miss Fluffy.” Ron muttered, shooting a pointed look at Hermione. “Next time someone calls a plant ‘lucky,’ I’m putting my foot down.”

Hermione folded her arms, her cheeks flushing slightly. “I just meant it was lucky it broke our fall,” she said quietly, looking away. “I didn’t know it was Devil’s Snare until it started strangling us.”

Neville sighed, keeping his wand ready as he nodded toward the passage ahead. “Let’s keep moving. We’re wasting time.”

“This way,” Harry said, pointing to the sloping stone passageway that stretched into the darkness ahead.

They moved cautiously, their footsteps echoing softly off the walls. The air grew cooler as they descended, the faint sound of fluttering reaching their ears.

“Can you hear something?” Ron whispered, his voice tense.

“Do you think it’s a ghost?” Hermione asked, glancing around nervously.

Neville tilted his head, listening carefully. “Sounds more like birds flapping,” he said, his tone calm but wary. The soft fluttering grew louder as they approached a bright light ahead.

“There’s light up there,” Harry said, squinting as he led the way. “I can see something moving.”

The passageway opened into a brilliantly lit chamber, its ceiling arched high above them. The room sparkled as if it were alive, filled with hundreds—maybe thousands—of small, jewel-bright creatures. They fluttered and darted around the room, their wings shimmering in the bright light. On the far side of the chamber stood a heavy wooden door with a large lock.

“Do you think they’ll attack us if we cross the room?” Ron asked, his voice hushed.

“Probably,” Harry replied, scanning the chamber. “They don’t look vicious, but if they all swooped down at once…” He trailed off, shaking his head. “Well, there’s no other way forward.”

Neville stared up at them, narrowing his eyes. “Those aren’t birds,” he said matter-of-factly. “They’re keys.”

Harry, Ron, and Hermione all squinted upward, following his gaze.

“They’re not birds!” Harry exclaimed, realization dawning. “They’re keys! Winged keys—look carefully.” He glanced around the chamber, his eyes darting between the swirling mass of keys and the door on the far side. “That must mean…”

“One of them is the key to open the door,” Neville finished, pointing to the locked door. “Probably the one that stands out from the rest.”

Harry nodded. “And I bet that broomstick over there is how we’re supposed to catch it.”

“What’s this all about?” Hermione asked.

Harry shook his head, his expression darkening. “I don’t know, but it feels too convenient.”

Neville smirked faintly, his thoughts echoing Harry’s sentiment. 'Yeah, not suspicious at all, Dumbledore. All the obstacles were perfectly suited for the four of us. Nothing strange about that.'

“But there are hundreds of them!” Ron said, staring up at the swarm. He moved to the door and drew his wand. “Alohomora!” he cast, pointing at the lock, but nothing happened. The door didn’t budge. “Well, worth a try,” he muttered, stepping back.

Hermione threw her hands up in frustration. “What are we supposed to do? There are so many up there—it could take ages!”

Hermione groaned in frustration, pacing back and forth as she looked up at the swirling mass of keys above them. “What are we going to do?” she growled, throwing her hands up. “There must be a thousand keys up there!”

“Well,” Harry said, gripping the broomstick firmly, “the only thing we can do is catch the key.” With that, he mounted the broom, kicked off the ground, and soared into the air.

As soon as Harry’s hands touched the broom, the keys reacted. The entire swarm buzzed to life, darting and speeding around the room like a chaotic, glittering storm. Their wings beat furiously, the sound filling the chamber as Harry zigzagged through the air, chasing after them.

Neville, Hermione, and Ron watched from below, their heads tilted back as they tried to follow the movement.

“This is going to take forever,” Ron muttered, his tone exasperated. “It’s like looking for a needle in a haystack.”

Neville squinted up at the cloud of keys, his eyes darting between them. “I think Harry’s just spotted the one,” he said, his voice steady.

Sure enough, Harry was zeroing in on a large silver key with a bent wing, which fluttered awkwardly among the others.

“That’s it!” Hermione exclaimed, pointing. “The one with the broken wing—it must have been caught before!”

Harry darted toward the key, weaving through the swarm as the other keys zipped past him in every direction. With a sudden burst of speed, he reached out and snatched the silver key from the air. The buzzing intensified as the swarm turned its attention to Harry, chasing him furiously as he dove toward the ground.

“Catch the key and open the door!” Harry shouted as he neared them. He threw the key toward the group in a swift arc, narrowly avoiding the pursuing keys.

Neville reacted quickly, catching the key midair. He sprinted to the heavy wooden door without hesitation, jamming the key into the lock. “Come on, come on,” he muttered under his breath, twisting it with all his might as the keys swarmed closer.

“Hurry up, Neville!” Hermione urged, her voice high with panic.

“Anytime now, mate!” Ron shouted, his eyes wide as the buzzing grew louder.

With a loud click, the lock turned, and Neville pushed the door open. “Got it!” he called, holding the door wide as Harry looped around for another pass.

Ron and Hermione darted through the opening, Neville close behind. “Quick, Harry! Come on!” they shouted, waving him in.

Harry dove through the open doorway just as the keys swarmed toward him. Neville slammed the door shut, pressing his weight against it as the keys thunked and embedded themselves into the wood, their wings fluttering madly.

Hermione slumped against the door, breathing heavily. “That was too close,” she said, her voice trembling slightly.

“You could say that again,” Harry said, landing next to them and wiping sweat from his forehead. He leaned on the broomstick, his chest heaving from the effort.

Ron, catching his breath, pointed past them. “Uh… guys? Look.”

Kaito Akaden Chapter 152

Kaito Akaden Chapter 152

Hotaru’s brow furrowed, her voice low. “Peace through force? That’s… terrible. And they’re strong enough to actually pull it off?”

Kakashi nodded slowly. “If Pain can keep people like Orochimaru and Sasori in line, he must be unbelievably powerful. And if the masked man is involved too…” He sighed, rubbing his chin in thought.

After a moment, he glanced at Kaito. “I take it you’ve already informed Lady Tsunade about all this?”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah, she needed to know. Plus, with the pardon and Mukai’s son’s condition, it was important. She’s already treating his kid personally.”

Kakashi let out another sigh. “Well, no point in worrying about something we can’t control right now. We should focus on the mission.” He glanced at the clock on the wall. “I should get going—my ship leaves at 2. The two of you should head out a few minutes after me. Blend in by walking around and acting like tourists before boarding your ship. And try to enjoy yourselves while you’re in the Land of Water,” he added with a small smirk.

Kakashi stood up, adjusting his scarf. “We’ll stay in touch through the ear clips. Be careful out there.” With that, he body-flickered away, leaving Kaito and Hotaru alone in the room.

Kaito turned to Hotaru, stretching his arms lazily. “We should grab something to eat before we head out, you know?”

….

Snow gently drifted down from the sky as the sun shone brightly over the small town. The streets were blanketed in snow, and the roofs of the buildings wore thick, white layers. It was November, and winter had fully settled in.

The townsfolk were going about their day, the streets bustling with activity and the shops open for business. Kaito and Hotaru stepped out of the inn where they were staying, both dressed in their disguises.

Kaito had wrapped a scarf around his neck to ward off the cold, his hands buried in his pockets. Beside him, Hotaru—disguised as Hikari—wore a warm coat and a scarf that complemented her attire.

Hotaru exhaled softly, rubbing her hands together for warmth. “I could really go for a warm cup of tea,” she said.

Kaito pointed down the street, his breath forming a small white cloud in the chilly air. “I saw a tea shop up ahead when we came in yesterday.”

With a pleased smile, Hotaru nodded. “Hmm, sounds good,” she replied, her voice warm as they began walking down the snowy street toward the tea shop.

It had been three days since they arrived in the Land of Water, and this was the second town they had visited. Kaito and Hotaru had been wandering through the towns, enjoying their time as tourists while Kaito’s shadow clones gathered the information they had come for. They had been traveling as a couple, sightseeing and blending in perfectly with the locals.

When they reached the small tea shop, Kaito pushed the door open, and a gentle bell chimed above them.

“Welcome!” an older woman greeted from behind a small counter. Her kind face, weathered by years of greeting customers through all seasons, lit up with a smile. “Please, take a seat.”

The two were led to a simple table near a window. As they sat down, the old woman handed them a menu, though Kaito already knew what he wanted.

After a quick glance at the menu, Kaito said, “Could I have some green tea, please? And we’d like to order breakfast as well.”

Hotaru smiled at the woman and added, “I’d like some sencha tea, please.”

“Of course,” the old woman replied with a nod. She pulled out a small notepad and pen. “What would you like to eat?”

“I’ll have a bowl of zenzai,” Hotaru said with a nod, then added, “I’ll also get some tsukemono and natto with rice, please.”

“And I’ll also have some tamagoyaki with rice,” Kaito said.

The old woman wrote down their order and smiled warmly. “Coming right up. Please make yourselves comfortable.”

As the woman headed to the kitchen, Hotaru leaned closer to Kaito. “So, Kai-kun,” she said, “what do you want to do after breakfast?”

“I was about to ask you the same thing,” Kaito replied with a grin. “We’ve got some free time before moving on. Any ideas?”

Hotaru tipped her head back, thinking. “There’s that famous shrine on the edge of town. I’ve heard it’s beautiful in the snow. And… this town is known for its sushi, right? Maybe we can find a good place for lunch.”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah, sure. Sounds like a good plan.”

The server returned with their tea, placing the cups gently on the table. “Enjoy,” she said politely before stepping away.

A short while later, their food arrived. They both clasped their hands together and said, “Itadakimasu,” before starting their meal.

Hotaru picked up a spoon, blowing gently on a scoop of zenzai before tasting it. “Mmm,” she sighed softly. “This is really good. Want some, Kai-kun?”

Kaito smiled and nodded. “Yeah, sure.” Hotaru scooped up a spoonful and fed it to him. He tasted it and grinned. “Hmm, it’s good. Especially in this weather, ya know?”

Hotaru nodded enthusiastically, her cheeks pink as she blushed.

As Kaito took a bite of his tamagoyaki, he said, “We should get some souvenirs before we leave. The last town didn’t have anything good.”

Hotaru nodded in agreement. “Yeah, this place seems to have more options.”

While they ate and chatted, two Kiri shinobi entered the tea shop, their uniforms marking them as belonging to the Mist Village. They sat at a table behind Kaito and Hotaru, their voices low but audible enough for the two to overhear.

“…Did you hear the news, Kotachi?” one of the shinobi muttered, his tone laced with irritation. “The Mizukage forced that clan to hand over all their hidden jutsu. I even heard there are talks of kicking them out of Kirigakure.”

Kotachi let out a low snort. “Serves them right. Some of those people get so full of themselves. Just because they’re born with special powers, they think they can lord it over the rest of us.”

Kaito knew about the Kiri civil war that began after Obito started controlling the Mizukage, but he wasn’t sure exactly when it would happen. If he remembered correctly, the manga didn’t really delve deeply into the timeline of those events.

What Kaito did know was that people with kekkei genkai were viewed with suspicion in Kiri and throughout the Land of Water because of their devastating efficiency during times of war. This mistrust led to widespread persecution and even the murder of those with kekkei genkai. This deep-seated hatred was what ultimately ignited the civil war.

Since arriving in the Land of Water, Kaito had learned that there wasn’t an active civil war at the moment. However, tensions were high. The clans were hated and scapegoated for past conflicts, and the resentment was palpable.

Kaito vaguely remembered that the civil war in Kiri wasn’t completely isolated from the outside world, but as the village grew more silent and isolated, he knew it was only a matter of time before things spiraled into chaos.

After finishing their breakfast, Kaito and Hotaru paid for their meal. The old woman at the counter thanked them warmly for their patronage.

Stepping out of the tea house, they walked southward down the snowy street, making their way to the shrine located at the edge of town.

The shrine was massive and reminded Kaito of the Uchiha clan’s Naka Shrine back in Konoha. They spent some time exploring the area, both taking a moment to pay their respects. Together, they prayed quietly and took a few photos to commemorate their visit.

As they were about to leave, Hotaru’s eyes lit up when she noticed a small stall near the shrine. The sweet aroma wafting from it immediately caught her attention.

“Kai-kun, look! They’re selling dango,” she said excitedly, pausing mid-step. “Let’s buy some! They look so good!”

Kaito smiled at her enthusiasm. “Sure,” he said. They approached the stall, where an elderly woman wrapped in a thick shawl greeted them warmly.

“Good morning! Care for some dango?” the vendor asked, her voice cheerful despite the chilly weather.

“Yes, please,” Kaito replied. “We’d like a dozen.”

The vendor smiled warmly as she prepared their order. While she worked, her eyes flicked between Kaito and Hotaru, noting how close they stood. “Are you two a couple?” she asked curiously. “I don’t think I’ve seen you here before. Where are you from?”

Hotaru felt her cheeks warm. “Yes, we’re together,” she added with a shy smile, glancing at Kaito. “We’re from the Land of Tea. Just traveling around.”

Kaito nodded in agreement. “We heard the Land of Water is really nice this time of year, and we wanted to see the snow before it gets too deep.”

The vendor’s face brightened. “That’s wonderful! The snow can be a hassle, but it’s beautiful, isn’t it?” She handed them the skewers of dango, the round dumplings coated in a sweet, glossy sauce. “Enjoy, and keep warm.”

They thanked her, paid for the food, and walked off, nibbling on the sticky dango. Kaito glanced at Hotaru, who was clearly enjoying the treat, her face lighting up with every bite.

As they strolled down the snowy street, nibbling on their dango, Kaito suddenly felt a faint chakra presence coming from an alleyway they were passing. He stopped mid-step, his eyes narrowing as he glanced down the shadowy path.

Noticing his abrupt pause, Hotaru turned to him with a puzzled expression. “Kai-kun, what is it?” she asked, her voice tinged with concern.

Kaito didn’t reply immediately, his gaze fixed on the dim alley. At first, all he could see were the backs of old buildings and a few crates stacked haphazardly. Then, in the shadows near a dumpster, he spotted a small figure huddled on the ground.

It was a boy, no older than eight or nine. His thin frame was curled tightly, arms wrapped around his knees. He wore ragged, threadbare clothes that were completely inadequate for the freezing weather, and his unkempt black hair hung in uneven clumps around his face. Snowflakes clung to his hair and shoulders, and his bare feet rested on the icy, snow-covered ground.

A frown crossed Kaito’s face as he wondered why anyone would leave a kid alone in the freezing cold. If he’s an orphan, shouldn’t the villagers or someone have helped him? What caught Kaito’s attention even more was the faint but noticeable amount of chakra emanating from the boy—unusually strong for someone so young. It suggested that the kid might belong to a clan or had received some form of training.

Hotaru stepped up beside Kaito, her expression mirroring his concern. Kaito couldn’t just ignore the boy. He walked over slowly, careful not to startle him. The boy’s eyes went wide as he noticed someone approaching, and he tried to scoot back, but there wasn’t much space to go.

Kaito raised his hands in a peaceful gesture. “Hey there,” he said softly, his tone warm and friendly. He held out one of the sticks of dango. “Here, you can have this if you’re hungry.”

The boy’s eyes flicked between the dango and Kaito, suspicion etched into his face. He didn’t seem to trust strangers, but hunger appeared to outweigh his fear. Hotaru stepped forward as well, her kind smile gentle and reassuring. “They’re still warm,” she said. “They’re sweet and taste really good.”

The boy hesitated, then slowly reached out and took the dango. He bowed his head slightly, mumbling a quiet “thank you” before taking a cautious bite. Kaito smiled and offered him the rest of the sticks. The boy looked surprised but eventually accepted them.

Watching this scene reminded Kaito of just how cruel and unforgiving this world could be. Once the boy began eating, Kaito removed the scarf from around his neck and gently wrapped it around the boy’s shoulders. The boy’s eyes widened again at the unexpected kindness. Kaito smiled softly.

“It’s really cold out,” Kaito said, adjusting the scarf so it fit snugly around the boy’s neck. “You should keep yourself warm.” Hidden inside the scarf was a warming seal Kaito had crafted, designed to provide a gentle, comforting heat to its wearer.

Hotaru knelt down beside him, speaking softly. “My name is Hikari, and this is Kaito. What’s your name?”

The boy held the dango in one hand, pressing the warm scarf closer to his body. He looked between them before answering quietly, “My name is Haku.”

Kaito’s eyes widened at the name. 'Wait, what? This kid is Haku? 'he thought, his mind racing. 'This must be where Zabuza found him in the original timeline.'

Kaito swallowed his surprise and gently asked, “Do you know where your parents are, Haku?”

The boy lowered his gaze, his expression darkening. “They’re gone,” he said softly, his voice tinged with pain.

Hotaru’s face fell, her eyes filled with sympathy. “I’m so sorry to hear that, Haku-kun,” she said gently.

Kaito sighed, his gaze lingering on Haku’s thin frame and bare feet. He couldn’t leave him like this. The image of Haku’s potential—the power he would grow into—flashed through Kaito’s mind, but more importantly, he remembered the kind and selfless person Haku was deep inside. He couldn’t just walk away.

Kaito sighed and asked, “Would you like to come with us, Haku?”

Kaito had always admired Haku’s character from the original Naruto. Haku was a tragic figure, yet he embodied the ideals of the shinobi in a way few others did. He was the one who taught Naruto the true meaning of the Will of Fire: “When a person has something important they want to protect, that’s when they can become truly strong.” It wasn’t the hollow teachings of Hiruzen; Haku’s philosophy embodied the real spirit of the Will of Fire.

Kaito couldn’t help but recall how unfairly Haku’s life had ended in the original timeline. And now, standing face-to-face with a young Haku, Kaito saw an opportunity. I can change his fate, he thought, his resolve hardening.

The question made Haku’s eyes widen with disbelief. He stared at Kaito as if he couldn’t quite process what he had just heard.

Hotaru smiled softly, her heart warming at Kaito’s question. She looked at Haku with kind eyes, silently encouraging him.

Haku’s mouth opened slightly, and his eyes glistened with tears. “Why…?” he whispered, his voice cracking with emotion. “Why are you being so kind to me? Everyone calls me a monster because of what I can do. People are scared of me.”

Kaito knelt to Haku’s level and gently placed a hand on his head. He spoke softly, but his tone was steady. “You remind me of my younger brother,” Kaito admitted. “He’s about your age and has a special ability, too. If my mom and I hadn’t been there for him, he might have gone through something like this. I can’t just leave you here, knowing what I know.”

Haku sniffled, tears beginning to roll down his cheeks as he listened.

“And,” Kaito continued with a small smile, “my mom always taught me to help people who need it—especially if you know you can. So, come with us, Haku. You deserve better than this.”

Haku lowered his head, his shoulders trembling as he tried to hold back his emotions. Finally, the weight of Kaito’s words broke through his walls, and tears spilled freely.

“Thank you,” Haku said in a shaky voice, bowing his head as his soft sobs filled the alley.

Kaito smiled warmly, patting Haku’s head gently. “You don’t have to thank us. Now, let’s get you cleaned up, yeah? Some new clothes, a warm bath… and maybe something other than dango to eat,” he winked playfully.

Haku looked between them, still overwhelmed but feeling a glimmer of hope for the first time in a long while. He sniffled again and nodded, his grip tightening on the scarf Kaito had given him. For the first time, the bitter cold didn’t feel so unbearable

Kaito Akaden Chapter 151

Kaito Akaden Chapter 151

Authors note: Sorry, everyone. I've been sick for the past few days and haven’t been able to write.

Jiraiya blinked, looking bewildered. “H-hey, where’d they go?”

Kushina pointed down the road. “They left a while ago,” she said dryly.

“Wha—? Why didn’t anyone stop them?” Jiraiya asked, confused.

Tsunade gave him a flat look, tapping her foot. “Because I agree with Kaito. I can’t send you to the Land of Water. You might cause an international crisis with your peeping. We’re trying to keep the peace, remember?”

Jiraiya looked crestfallen. But before he could argue further, Kushina grabbed him by the ear again, pulling him in close. “And you’re not running off, either,” she growled. “You’re going to meet Naruto today, like I said.”

Jiraiya yelped in pain, stumbling as Kushina dragged him along. “O-ow, Kushina, let go! Fine, fine—I’ll meet him, I promise!”

Tsunade shook her head, mildly amused, and motioned for Shizune to follow her back to the Hokage Tower. The morning bustle of Konoha continued around them as Kushina marched off with Jiraiya in tow, ignoring his protests. Villagers who passed by gave them curious looks but didn’t dare to intervene. Everyone knew Kushina had a fiery temper, and Jiraiya was… well, Jiraiya.

…

Jiraiya jumped up, dusting himself off. “Because I can’t let these youngsters handle such a dangerous mission on their own! I, the Toad Sage of Mount Myōboku—” He launched into a long-winded speech about his skills, his honor, and how it was his duty to protect the village.

Kaito had already had enough. ‘This is going to take forever,’ he thought. Without a word, he placed his hands on Kakashi and Hotaru. In an instant, they vanished, leaving Jiraiya mid-speech.

They reappeared in a forest clearing. Kakashi stumbled slightly but quickly regained his footing, while Hotaru wasn’t as lucky. She tripped and landed on the ground, startled by the sudden teleportation.

She blew a strand of hair off her face and grumbled, “A little warning would’ve been nice.”

“Sorry about that, Hotaru,” Kaito said, rubbing the back of his head apologetically. “I couldn’t take any more of that, you know?” He reached out and helped her up.

Kakashi looked around the unfamiliar clearing. “So… where are we?” he asked, noting that they were far from Konoha.

“We’re in the Land of Tea,” Kaito explained while steadying Hotaru. “I had a Hiraishin marker here from when we were looking for Lady Tsunade.” He pointed behind them. “Degarashi Port is a few kilometers that way. Don’t we need to take a ship to the Land of Water?” His voice carried a hint of uncertainty.

Kakashi nodded. “That actually saves us some time. I was thinking we’d head through the Land of Hot Springs, but this works too. Let’s get moving.” With that, Kakashi leapt onto a nearby tree and set off.

Kaito and Hotaru exchanged a glance before following him.

After a short journey, they arrived at Degarashi Port. The streets were bustling with merchants, dockworkers, and travelers going about their day.

“So, what’s the plan, Kakashi-senpai?” Hotaru asked as they walked through the busy port, her eyes darting around at the activity.

Kakashi hummed in thought. “First, we need to find a ship heading to the Land of Water. I’ll take care of that. Meanwhile, you two should find an inn where we can change into disguises. We don’t want to stand out.”

Kaito and Hotaru nodded in agreement. Without another word, they split up from Kakashi and headed into the crowd to complete their task.

…

Kakashi and Kaito sat waiting for Hotaru in the living room of the inn they had booked. Kakashi, without his usual mask, had a laid-back, slightly slouching posture. His short, tousled brown hair framed his forehead in uneven layers, and two bold streaks of purple face paint extended from below his eyelids down his cheeks. A small beauty mark rested just below the left corner of his mouth. Wrapped around his neck was a soft-looking pink scarf that draped over a green coat fastened with toggle-style closures, giving him a casual, everyday look. He was idly fiddling with a camera, occasionally snapping pictures of random objects in the room.

Beside him, Kaito leaned back, looking somewhat impatient in his own disguise. He wore a fitted black undershirt beneath a light lavender, short-sleeved jacket zipped in the front, creating a simple yet relaxed look. His medium-gray pants were cropped at mid-calf, leaving his ankles exposed above traditional open-toed ninja sandals secured with several bands. A slender cross-body messenger bag in a soft lilac hue was slung from his shoulder to his hip. Using a seal, he had changed his hair and eye color, his hair now a light blond like Tsunade’s, and his eyes a vibrant green.

The door to the room slid open, and Hotaru stepped in.

Kaito glanced up, and his jaw nearly dropped.

Her hair was long, flowing freely well past her shoulders, framing her face. She wore a pink, knee-length tunic with short sleeves over purple undersleeves, paired with black leggings and simple open-toed sandals. The layered pink ensemble had a loose, flowing silhouette with side slits for ease of movement.

Seeing Kaito’s reaction, Hotaru smiled, turning slightly to the side. “So… how do I look, Kai-kun?” she asked softly.

“Wow,” Kaito said without thinking. Realizing he had blurted it out, he quickly coughed and scratched the back of his head. “Ahem, you look great, Hotaru.” He grinned sheepishly, but when he noticed he was still staring, he quickly averted his eyes. ‘What’s wrong with me? But… that outfit…’ he thought, unable to stop himself. In Kaito’s opinion, Hotaru’s new outfit suited her perfectly.

Kakashi looked up from his camera, raising an eyebrow. “Smooth,” he said dryly.

Kaito, Hotaru, and even Itachi didn’t look like typical 13-year-olds anymore. They looked closer to 18. Itachi already resembled the older version of himself Kaito remembered from his first appearance. ‘Maybe it’s the stress we’re under,’ Kaito thought. ‘It’s making us grow up faster or something.’ Still, in his eyes, Hotaru looked stunning.

Hotaru smiled again. “That’s great to hear. Lady Kushina helped me pick this outfit,” she said warmly. Then, with a faint blush, she added, “I was thinking of making this my regular look. Oh, and… um… you look great too, Kaito-kun.”

Kaito scratched his head again, grinning awkwardly. “Umm, thanks, Hotaru,” he said, feeling a bit flustered.

Hotaru then glanced at him, still blushing slightly. “Ano… Kai-kun, can you place the disguise seal for me?” she asked shyly.

Kaito nodded. “Yeah, sure. Turn around and hold your hair up. I’ll place it on your neck.”

Hotaru turned around, gently gathering her hair to reveal her neck. Kaito took a deep breath, made a few hand signs, and placed his hand over her neck. A seal appeared on her skin, and with a faint shimmer, her appearance changed. Her Byakugan was concealed, replaced by normal eyes, and her midnight-blue hair transformed into a pale, silvery-gray color. The genjutsu was subtle, but it did the job.

Kaito stepped back, taking a moment to look at her.

Kakashi, finding the situation amusing, smirked and said, “Well, if Kaito is done staring at Hotaru, maybe we can discuss our plan now?”

Both Kaito and Hotaru snapped their attention to him, their reactions immediate.

“I-I wasn’t staring at her!” Kaito stammered, his face turning red.

Kakashi chuckled softly before motioning for them to sit at the small coffee table in the room. They each took a cup of tea as Kakashi spread a map across the table, pointing at specific locations.

“Here’s the plan,” Kakashi began. “We’ll be splitting up once we leave Degarashi Port. It’ll help us cover more ground. We’ll board two separate ships.” He handed Kaito and Hotaru two tickets. “The two of you will travel together on this ship,” he said, pointing to a marked route on the map. “It departs at 4 p.m. from Harbor 8. It’s a tour ship that’ll take you from here to the northern port of the Land of Water.”

Kakashi then tapped another location on the map. “As for me, I’ll board a ship leaving at 2 p.m. It’s heading to the southern port.”

Both Kaito and Hotaru nodded in understanding.

“Once we’re in the Land of Water, keep a low profile. Act like regular tourists while gathering information. Don’t go near the Village Hidden in the Mist,” Kakashi warned, his tone serious. “We should be able to get what we need from the surrounding small towns and villages. We’ll stay in the Land of Water for a week unless we find what we’re looking for sooner. And remember, stick together. If you run into trouble, abandon the mission and use Hiraishin to escape immediately.”

Kakashi paused for emphasis before continuing, “Our main goal is to gather rumors or information about Kirigakure’s situation.”

Kaito nodded and reached into his pouch, pulling out two small ear clips. Handing one to Kakashi, he explained, “Here, this will help us stay in contact. I’ve improved the seal on these—better range than the old ones. Just channel chakra into it and either talk or think, and Hotaru and I will hear you.” He pointed to his own ear clip as he spoke.

Kakashi took the clip, examining it briefly before attaching it to his ear. Hotaru followed suit, clipping hers on as well.

“It’s also linked to my Hiraishin marker,” Kaito added. “If you’re in trouble, channel chakra into the seal, and we’ll come to you right away.”

Hotaru sipped her tea and suggested, “Since we’re in disguise, we should probably use different names for the rest of the mission.”

Kakashi nodded thoughtfully. “Yeah, Kakashi isn’t exactly a common name… Hmm, I think I’ll go by Sukea,” he said after a moment, smirking slightly.

Hotaru tilted her head, considering. “Hikari,” she decided. “It’s simple and common enough.”

Kaito, however, scratched his head awkwardly. “Uh, names… Yeah, not really my strong suit,” he muttered, rubbing his chin in thought. ‘Why did I have to inherit Dad’s lousy naming sense? This must be karma for making fun of him for that…’ He racked his brain, but every name he came up with sounded cringy. Letting out a sigh, he finally said, “I’ll just stick with Kaito. It’s a common enough name anyway.”

Kakashi nodded, but his expression turned serious as he leaned forward slightly. “Kaito, before we split up, there’s something I’ve been meaning to ask you. It’s about the Akatsuki. You mentioned the masked man is part of it.”

Hotaru blinked in confusion. “Akatsuki?”

Kaito sighed, setting his teacup down. “Yeah, I would’ve told you both sooner, but you were busy with ANBU work. And after Lady Tsunade became Hokage, I got swamped with missions… It kept slipping my mind, you know?” He gestured casually to the room. “Don’t worry, I’ve sealed this place with privacy seals, so we’re good to talk.”

Hotaru nodded, and Kakashi waited silently, his eyes focused on Kaito.

“All right,” Kaito began. “A while back, when we were searching for Lady Tsunade, I had a few shadow clones running around gathering information. One of them came across a mercenary organization called the Akatsuki. They’re made up of shinobi at least A-rank or higher.” He paused for a moment. “What really caught my attention was when my clone found out they were discreetly gathering information on the Jinchūriki.”

“Jinchūriki?” Hotaru asked, her brow furrowed.

“They’re the people who have tailed beasts sealed inside them,” Kakashi explained, his tone calm but serious.

Hotaru’s eyes widened in realization. “So… like Naruto-kun?”

Kaito nodded, taking a sip of his tea before continuing. “Exactly. That’s what made me suspicious. Why would an organization like that focus on the Jinchūriki? It’s not like just anyone can control the Bijū. That meant the leader of the organization could control them, which… led me to suspect the masked man.”

Kakashi leaned back slightly, processing the information. “And you’re certain it’s him?”

“I suspected it,” Kaito admitted, setting his cup on the table. “But I needed confirmation. To do that, I needed someone inside Akatsuki.”

Kakashi frowned. “Someone inside…?”

He looked at Kakashi. “Do you remember Mukai Kohinata? He was on your squad when my team was tasked with guarding the Daimyo. That was the day the masked man tried to kill the Daimyo.”

Kakashi’s gaze sharpened as he nodded. “I remember him. He was reassigned to a different squad later, but… what does he have to do with Akatsuki?”

“Well,” Kaito began, “Mukai was part of Root at the time. I was already dealing with Danzo back then, and it turns out Mukai had been hiding his true abilities while in Konoha. He’s a descendant of the Hyūga clan—though from a branch of the family that split off years ago because they didn’t manifest the Byakugan. That changed with Mukai himself.”

Hotaru blinked in surprise. “Wait, so he had the Byakugan?”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah, he has the Byakugan. His son was very ill, and back then, before Lady Tsunade overhauled the medical system, the village’s healthcare wasn’t much help. The cost of treatment for his son was high, and even though he sought aid from the village, he didn’t get any support. Being part of Root didn’t exactly make it easier for him to ask for help.”

Kakashi frowned slightly, his expression unreadable.

Kaito continued, “Long story short, Mukai ended up selling village secrets to Kirigakure to pay for his son’s treatment. Danzo found out, of course, and assigned Itachi to kill him as part of his initiation into the ANBU. Itachi went with Shisui for the mission.”

Hotaru’s eyes widened. “So… what happened?”

“Well,” Kaito said, leaning back slightly, “the mission didn’t go as planned. Mukai was hiding his true strength. He was actually a low Kage-level shinobi. He was willing to take full blame so his family wouldn’t be held accountable, but Danzo doesn’t like loose ends.” Kaito’s voice darkened. “Danzo sent his Root agents to eliminate Mukai’s family too.”

Kaito nodded. “I was already tailing Mukai at the time because he was a perfect candidate for infiltrating Akatsuki. I intervened in the fight between him and Itachi. I offered Mukai a deal: I’d save his family if he agreed to become a spy for Konoha inside Akatsuki. In return, his family would be safe, and I’d secure a pardon for him from the new Hokage.”

Hotaru’s expression softened. “So you saved him and his family… and he agreed to act as our spy?”

“Yeah,” Kaito confirmed. “He’s under a new identity, and he’s been feeding us information ever since. Mukai also confirmed that he’s seen the masked man during Akatsuki meetings. He goes by the name Tobi, but according to Mukai, he isn’t an official member. He acts like a newbie, someone who doesn’t possess any spectacular jutsu.”

Kakashi folded his arms. “And the leader? Do we know anything about him?”

He leaned back, crossing his arms. “As for the leader, the one in charge is a man called Pain. But I’m positive the masked man is the one pulling the strings from behind the scenes. No way his ego lets him take a back seat like that.”

“And so far,” Kaito added, “their confirmed members include Orochimaru, Jūzō Biwa, Sasori of the Red Sand, and Kakuzu.”

Kakashi rubbed his chin thoughtfully. “They even have the likes of Orochimaru in their ranks… All these S-rank types—they’re insanely strong. What do they want with the Jinchūriki?”

Kaito shrugged slightly. “World domination, I guess. Mukai said they claim they want to bring peace to the shinobi world. But their plan is to use all the tailed beasts to force that ‘peace.’ Their leader, Pain, is considered a god among them.”

Hotaru’s brow furrowed, her voice low. “Peace through force? That’s… terrible. And they’re strong enough to actually pull it off?”

Kakashi nodded slowly. “If Pain can keep people like Orochimaru and Sasori in line, he must be unbelievably powerful. And if the masked man is involved too…” He sighed, rubbing his chin in thought.

After a moment, he glanced at Kaito. “I take it you’ve already informed Lady Tsunade about all this?”

Kaito nodded. “Yeah, she needed to know. Plus, with the pardon and Mukai’s son’s condition, it was important. She’s already treating his kid personally.”

Kakashi let out another sigh. “Well, no point in worrying about something we can’t control right now. We should focus on the mission.” He glanced at the clock on the wall. “I should get going—my ship leaves at 2. The two of you should head out a few minutes after me. Blend in by walking around and acting like tourists before boarding your ship. And try to enjoy yourselves while you’re in the Land of Water,” he added with a small smirk.

Kakashi stood up, adjusting his scarf. “We’ll stay in touch through the ear clips. Be careful out there.” With that, he body-flickered away, leaving Kaito and Hotaru alone in the room.

Kaito turned to Hotaru, stretching his arms lazily. “We should grab something to eat before we head out, you know?”